TS-570S

4 6
2
L
O
W
C
U
T
H
IG
H
C
U
T
4 6
2

PF
ATT PRE-AMP
VOX PROC
SEND
CH1
MIC
CW
FSK
LSB
USB
FM
AM
AT TUNE
POWER
HF TRANSCEIVER TS-570D
PHONES
1
CH2
2
CH3
3
ANT
4
REC
5
FINE
6
NB
7
AGC/TONE
8
REV
9
CLR
F.LOCK
0 ENT
MIC
PWR
KEY
DELAY MENU 1MHz
SPLIT
M/V
DOWN
UP
MR
TF-SET
A=B
SCAN M>VFO M.IN
M.IN
FILTER
CWTUNE
B.C.
N.R.
A/B
CLEAR
RIT
XIT
RIT/XIT
IF SHIFT SQL CH
0 10
8
A F R F
HIGH
DSP SLOPE
LOW
0 10
8
+ –
Intelligent Digital Enhanced Communications System
© B62-0898-00 (K,E,M)(MC)
09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
KENWOOD CORPORATION
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
ALL MODE MULTI-BANDER
TS-570D
HF TRANSCEIVER
INFORMATION TO THE DIGITAL DEVICE USER REQUIRED
BY THE FCC
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can generate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that the
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference
by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
• Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from
that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer for technical assistance.
FCC WARNING
This equipment generates or uses radio frequency energy.
Changes or modifications to this equipment may cause harmful
interference unless the modifications are expressly approved in
the instruction manual. The user could lose the authority to
operate this equipment if an unauthorized change or modification
is made.
APPLICABLE MODEL
This manual applies to the following model:
TS-570S: All mode multi-bander
TS-570D: HF Transceiver
Intelligent Digital Enhanced Communications System
SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES
Carefully unpack the transceiver. We recommend that
you identify the items listed in the table below. In
addition, it is safe to keep the box and the packing
material. You may need to repack the transceiver in
the future.
NOTICE TO THE USER
One or more of the following statements may be
applicable to this equipment.
This transceiver is equipped with a bail on the bottom so
that you can angle the transceiver. Pull the bail forward
to the limit as shown:
Microphone
DC power cable
7-pin DIN plug
13-pin DIN plug
Fuse (25 A)
Fuse (4 A)
Instruction manual
Schematic/block diagrams
(U.S.A. and Canada only)
Warranty card
(U.S.A., Canada, and
Europe only)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Accessory
Part Number
Quantity
1
1
T91-0352-XX
E30-3157-XX
E07-0751-XX
E07-1351-XX
F05-2531-XX
F06-4027-XX
B62-0898-XX


For other markets, schematic and block diagrams are
available as options.
i
Thank you for choosing the KENWOOD TS-570 series.
This Intelligent Digital Enhanced Communications
System was developed by a team of engineers
determined to continue the tradition of excellence and
innovation in KENWOOD HF transceivers.
This transceiver includes a 16-bit Digital Signal
Processing (DSP) unit to process audio frequencies. By
taking maximum advantage of DSP technology the
transceiver gives you enhanced interference reduction
capabilities and improves the quality of audio that you
transmit. You will find the differences when you fight
QRM and QRN in the new solar cycle. As you learn
how to use this transceiver, you also will find
KENWOOD is pursuing “user friendliness”. For
example, each time you change the Menu No. in Menu
mode, you will see, on the display, scrolling messages
that tell what you are selecting.
Though user friendly, this transceiver is technically
sophisticated and some features may be new to you.
Consider this manual to be a personal tutorial from the
designers. Allow the manual to guide you through the
learning process now, then act as a reference in the
coming years.
FEATURES
Taking full advantage of DSP technology, this
transceiver
• Provides high performance receive filters.
• Enhances the Beat Cancel and Noise Reduction
tools.
• Allows total customization of transmitted audio
through the use of functions such as the Transmit
Equalizer.
• Enables Automatic Zero-beating for CW operation.
To pursue user friendliness, this transceiver
• When in Menu mode, scrolls messages to tell you
what you are selecting.
• Allows you to quickly and easily save the current
transceiver settings in Quick memory.
• Is equipped with a large, easy to read LCD display.
WRITING CONVENTIONS FOLLOWED
The writing conventions described below have been
followed to simplify instructions and avoid unnecessary
repetition. This format is less confusing for the reader.
Reviewing the following information now will reduce
your learning period. That means less time will be
spent reading this manual; more time will be available
for operating.
Furthermore, a system of advisories is used as follows:
WARNING! ¬ Possibility of personal injury
CAUTION: ¬ Possibility of equipment damage
Note: ¬ Important information or operating tip
Note: Basic procedures are numbered sequentially to guide you
step-by-step. Additional information pertaining to a step, but not
essential to complete the procedure, is provided in bulleted form
following many steps.
THANK YOU
Instruction What to Do
Press and release KEY.
Press and hold KEY1 down,
then press KEY2. If there are
more than two keys, press and
hold down each key in turn
until the final key has been
pressed.
Press KEY1 momentarily,
release KEY1, then press
KEY2.
With the transceiver power
OFF, press and hold KEY,
then switch ON the transceiver
power by pressing the
POWER switch.
Press [KEY].
Press
[KEY1]+[KEY2].
Press
[KEY1], [KEY2].
Press
[KEY]+ POWER ON.
ii
PRECAUTIONS IV
CHAPTER 1 INSTALLATION 1
ANTENNA CONNECTION ....................................... 1
GROUND CONNECTION ........................................ 2
LIGHTNING PROTECTION ..................................... 2
DC POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION ..................... 2
REPLACING FUSES ........................................... 2
ACCESSORY CONNECTIONS .............................. 3
FRONT PANEL .................................................... 3
Headphones (PHONES) ................................ 3
Microphone (MIC) ........................................... 3
REAR PANEL ...................................................... 3
External Speaker (EXT SP) ............................ 3
Keys and Keyboards for
CW Operation (PADDLE and KEY) ................ 3
CHAPTER 2 YOUR FIRST QSO 4
RECEIVING............................................................. 4
TRANSMITTING...................................................... 5
CHAPTER 3 GETTING ACQUAINTED 6
FRONT PANEL ........................................................ 6
MICROPHONE ........................................................ 9
REAR PANEL ........................................................ 10
DISPLAY................................................................ 11
CHAPTER 4 OPERATING BASICS 13
SWITCHING POWER ON/OFF .............................. 13
ADJUSTING VOLUME........................................... 13
AUDIO FREQUENCY (AF) GAIN ...................... 13
RADIO FREQUENCY (RF) GAIN...................... 13
SELECTING VFO A OR VFO B.............................. 13
SELECTING A BAND............................................. 13
SELECTING A MODE............................................ 14
ADJUSTING SQUELCH ........................................ 14
SELECTING A FREQUENCY ................................ 14
FRONT PANEL METER......................................... 14
TRANSMITTING.................................................... 15
SELECTING TRANSMIT POWER .................... 15
MICROPHONE GAIN ........................................ 15
CHAPTER 5 MENU SETUP 16
WHAT IS A MENU?................................................ 16
MENU A/ MENU B ................................................. 16
MENU ACCESS..................................................... 16
MENU CONFIGURATION...................................... 17
CROSS REFERENCE FOR
MENU FUNCTIONS .............................................. 19
CHAPTER 6 BASIC COMMUNICATING 20
SSB TRANSMISSION............................................ 20
CW TRANSMISSION............................................. 21
AUTO ZERO-BEAT............................................ 21
TX SIDETONE/ RX PITCH FREQUENCY......... 21
FM TRANSMISSION.............................................. 22
TX DEVIATION SELECTION ............................. 22
CONTENTS
AM TRANSMISSION ............................................. 22
CHAPTER 7 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATING 23
SPLIT-FREQUENCY OPERATION ....................... 23
TF-SET (TRANSMIT FREQUENCY SET) ......... 23
FM REPEATER OPERATION ................................ 24
SELECTING SUBTONE FREQUENCY............. 25
CONTINUOUS OR BURST SUBTONES?......... 25
FM CTCSS OPERATION ....................................... 25
DIGITAL OPERATION............................................ 26
RTTY (FREQUENCY SHIFT KEYING) .............. 26
AMTOR/ PACKET/ PACTOR/ G-TOR
TM
/ CLOVER 27
SLOW SCAN TV/ FACSIMILE................................ 28
SATELLITE OPERATION....................................... 28
CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATING AIDS 29
RECEIVING........................................................... 29
SELECTING YOUR FREQUENCY ................... 29
Direct Frequency Entry.................................. 29
Using 1 MHz Steps ....................................... 29
Quick Changes ............................................. 29
Fine Tuning ................................................... 29
Equalizing VFO Frequencies (A=B) .............. 30
RIT (RECEIVE INCREMENTAL TUNING) ......... 30
AGC (AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL) ............... 30
RX EQUALIZER ................................................ 30
TRANSMITTING.................................................... 31
VOX (VOICE-OPERATED TRANSMIT) ............. 31
Microphone Input Level ................................. 31
Delay Time.................................................... 31
SPEECH PROCESSOR .................................... 32
XIT (TRANSMIT INCREMENTAL TUNING) ....... 32
CUSTOMIZING TRANSMIT SIGNAL
CHARACTERISTICS ......................................... 33
Changing Transmit
Bandwidth (SSB/AM) .................................... 33
Equalizing Transmit Audio (SSB/FM/AM) ...... 33
MONITORING TRANSMITTED SIGNALS......... 33
TRANSMIT INHIBIT ........................................... 33
CHANGING FREQUENCY WHILE
TRANSMITTING................................................ 33
CW BREAK-IN....................................................... 34
USING SEMI BREAK-IN OR
FULL BREAK-IN ................................................ 34
ELECTRONIC KEYER........................................... 34
CHANGING KEYING SPEED ............................ 34
AUTO WEIGHTING ........................................... 34
Reversible Auto Weighting ............................ 34
CHANGING LOCKED-WEIGHT ........................ 35
BUG KEY FUNCTION........................................ 35
CW MESSAGE MEMORY ................................. 35
Storing CW Messages .................................. 35
Checking CW Messages without Transmitting35
Transmitting CW Messages.......................... 35
CHAPTER 9 REJECTING INTERFERENCE 36
IF FILTER .............................................................. 36
CHANGING IF FILTER BANDWIDTH ............... 36
IF SHIFT ............................................................ 36
NOISE BLANKER .................................................. 36
iii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Transferring Data .......................................... 50
Receiving Data ............................................. 50
COMPUTER CONTROL ........................................ 51
SETTING UP ..................................................... 51
Equipment Needed ....................................... 51
Connections.................................................. 51
COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS .................. 51
USING A TRANSVERTER ..................................... 51
AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER............................ 52
PRESETTING.................................................... 52
DRU-3A DIGITAL RECORDING UNIT
(OPTIONAL) .......................................................... 53
RECORDING MESSAGES ................................ 53
MESSAGE PLAYBACK...................................... 53
Checking Messages ...................................... 53
Sending Messages ....................................... 54
Changing Inter-message Interval .................. 54
Changing Volume.......................................... 54
VS-3 VOICE SYNTHESIZER (OPTIONAL) ........... 55
CHAPTER 13 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 56
CHAPTER 14 INSTALLING OPTIONS 57
REMOVING THE BOTTOM CASE ........................ 57
DRU-3A DIGITAL RECORDING UNIT................... 57
VS-3 VOICE SYNTHESIZER UNIT ....................... 58
YK-88C-1/ YK-88CN-1/ YK-88SN-1 FILTERS........ 58
SO-2 TEMPERATURE-COMPENSATED CRYSTAL
OSCILLATOR (TCXO) ........................................... 59
CHAPTER 15 CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT 60
COMPUTER .......................................................... 60
COMPATIBLE TRANSCEIVER .............................. 60
RTTY EQUIPMENT ............................................... 61
LINEAR AMPLIFIER .............................................. 61
ANTENNA TUNER ................................................ 61
MCP AND TNC ...................................................... 62
CHAPTER 16 MAINTENANCE 63
GENERAL INFORMATION .................................... 63
SERVICE........................................................... 63
SERVICE NOTE ................................................ 63
CLEANING ........................................................ 63
INTERNAL ADJUSTMENTS .................................. 64
REFERENCE FREQUENCY CALIBRATION..... 64
ACCESSING THE INTERNAL FUSE ................ 64
TROUBLESHOOTING........................................... 65
SPECIFICATIONS 68
APPENDIX: COM CONNECTOR PROTOCOL 70
INDEX 82
ATTENUATOR ....................................................... 37
PREAMPLIFIER..................................................... 37
DSP TOOLS .......................................................... 37
CHANGING RECEIVE BANDWIDTH................ 37
SSB/ FM/ AM Modes ..................................... 37
CW/ FSK Modes ........................................... 38
BEAT CANCEL .................................................. 38
NOISE REDUCTION ......................................... 38
Changing NR1 Performance ........................ 38
Setting NR2 Time Constant .......................... 38
CHAPTER 10 MEMORY FEATURES 39
MICROPROCESSOR MEMORY BACKUP ........... 39
CONVENTIONAL MEMORY.................................. 39
STORING DATA IN MEMORY .......................... 39
Simplex Channels ......................................... 39
Split-Frequency Channels ............................. 40
MEMORY RECALL AND SCROLL .................... 40
Memory Recall .............................................. 40
Memory Scroll ............................................... 41
Temporary Frequency Changes ................... 41
Memory-VFO Split Operation ....................... 41
MEMORY TRANSFER....................................... 42
Memory ¬ VFO Transfer .............................. 42
Channel ¬ Channel Transfer ....................... 42
STORING FREQUENCY RANGES................... 43
Confirming Start/End Frequencies ................ 43
Programmable VFO ...................................... 43
ERASING MEMORY CHANNELS..................... 43
Full Reset ..................................................... 43
Memory Channel Lockout ............................. 44
QUICK MEMORY .................................................. 44
STORING INTO QUICK MEMORY ................... 44
RECALLING QUICK MEMORY......................... 45
TEMPORARY FREQUENCY CHANGES.......... 45
QUICK MEMORY ¬ VFO TRANSFER.............. 45
CHAPTER 11 SCAN 46
PROGRAM SCAN ................................................. 46
SCAN HOLD...................................................... 46
MEMORY SCAN.................................................... 47
ALL-CHANNEL SCAN ....................................... 47
GROUP SCAN................................................... 47
CHAPTER 12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES 48
MICROPROCESSOR RESET................................ 48
INITIAL SETTINGS ............................................ 48
PARTIAL RESET ............................................... 48
FULL RESET ..................................................... 48
SWITCHING ANT 1/ ANT 2 .................................... 48
FREQUENCY LOCK FUNCTION.......................... 48
BEEP FUNCTION.................................................. 49
DISPLAY DIMMER................................................. 49
PROGRAM FUNCTION BUTTON......................... 49
QUICK DATA TRANSFER...................................... 50
SETTING UP ..................................................... 50
Equipment Needed ....................................... 50
Connections.................................................. 50
USING QUICK TRANSFER ............................... 50
iv
PRECAUTIONS
Please read all safety and operating instructions before
using this transceiver. For best results, be aware of all
warnings on the transceiver and follow these operating
instructions. Retain these safety and operating
instructions for future reference.
1 Power Source
Connect this transceiver only to the power source
described in the operating instructions or as marked
on the transceiver itself.
2 Power Cable Protection
Route all power cables safely. Ensure the power
cables can neither be walked upon nor pinched by
items placed near or against the cables. Pay
particular attention to locations near AC receptacles,
AC outlet strips and points of entry to the transceiver.
3 Electrical Shocks
Take care not to drop objects or spill liquids into the
transceiver through enclosure openings. Metal
objects, such as hairpins or needles, inserted into
the transceiver may contact voltages resulting in
serious electrical shocks. Never permit children to
insert any objects into this transceiver.
4 Grounding and Polarization
Do not attempt to defeat methods used for
grounding and electrical polarization in the
transceiver, particularly involving the input power
cable.
5 Outdoor Antenna Grounding
Adequately ground all outdoor antennas used with
this transceiver using approved methods.
Grounding helps protect against voltage surges
caused by lightning. It also reduces the chance of a
build-up of static charges.
6 Power Lines
Minimum recommended distance for an outdoor
antenna from power lines is one and one-half times
the vertical height of the associated antenna support
structure. This distance allows adequate clearance
from the power lines if the support structure should
fail for any reason.
7 Ventilation
Locate the transceiver so as not to interfere with its
ventilation. Do not place books or other equipment
on the transceiver that may impede the free
movement of air. Allow a minimum of 4 inches
(10 cm) between the rear of the transceiver and the
wall or operating desk shelf.
8 Water and Moisture
Do not use the transceiver near water or sources of
moisture. For example, avoid use near bathtubs,
sinks, swimming pools, and in damp basements and
attics.
9 Abnormal Odors
The presence of an unusual odor or smoke is often a
sign of trouble. Immediately turn the power OFF and
remove the power cable. Contact a dealer or the
nearest Service Center for advice.
10 Heat
Locate the transceiver away from heat sources such
as radiators, stoves, amplifiers or other devices that
produce substantial amounts of heat.
11 Cleaning
Do not use volatile solvents such as alcohol, paint
thinner, gasoline or benzene to clean the cabinet.
Use a clean cloth with warm water or a mild
detergent.
12 Periods of Inactivity
Disconnect the input power cable from the power
source when the transceiver is not used for long
periods of time.
13 Servicing
Remove the transceiver’s enclosure only to do
accessory installations described by this manual or
accessory manuals. Follow provided instructions
carefully to avoid electrical shocks. If unfamiliar with
this type of work, seek assistance from an
experienced individual, or have a professional
technician do the task.
14 Damage Requiring Service
Enlist the services of qualified personnel in the
following cases:
a) The power supply or plug is damaged.
b) Objects have fallen or liquid has spilled into the
transceiver.
c) The transceiver has been exposed to rain.
d) The transceiver is operating abnormally or
performance has degraded seriously.
e) The transceiver has been dropped or the
enclosure damaged.
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING
ANTENNA
LEAD IN
WIRE
GROUND
CLAMP
ELECTRIC SERVICE
EQUIPMENT
ANTENNA
DISCHARGE UNIT
GROUNDING
CONDUCTORS
GROUND CLAMPS
POWER SERVICE
GROUNDING ELECTRODE
SYSTEM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
INSTALLATION
ANTENNA CONNECTION
The type of the antenna system, consisting of the
antenna, ground, and feed line, will greatly affect the
successful performance of the transceiver. Use a
properly adjusted 50 Ω antenna of good quality to let
your transceiver perform at its best. Use a good-quality
50 Ω coaxial cable and a first-quality connector for the
connection. Match the impedance of the coaxial cable
and antenna so that the SWR is 1.5:1 or less. All
connections must be clean and tight.
While the transceiver’s protection circuit will activate if
the SWR is greater than 2.5:1, do not rely on protection
to compensate for a poorly functioning antenna system.
High SWR will cause the transmit output to drop, and
may lead to radio frequency interference to consumer
products such as stereo receivers and televisions. You
may even interfere with your own transceiver. Reports
that your signal is garbled or distorted, especially at
peak modulation, may indicate that your antenna
system is not efficiently radiating the transceiver’s
power. If you feel a tingle from the transceiver’s cabinet
or the microphone’s metal fittings when you modulate,
you can be certain that, at the least, your coax
connector is loose at the rear of the radio and, at the
worst, your antenna system is not efficiently radiating
power.
Connect your antenna feed line to ANT 1. If you are
using two antennas, connect the second antenna to
ANT 2.
CAUTION:
x TRANSMITTING WITHOUT FIRST CONNECTING AN
ANTENNA OR OTHER MATCHED LOAD MAY DAMAGE THE
TRANSCEIVER. ALWAYS CONNECT THE ANTENNA TO THE
TRANSCEIVER BEFORE TRANSMITTING.
x USE A LIGHTNING ARRESTOR TO PREVENT FIRE,
ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR DAMAGE TO THE TRANSCEIVER.
APPROX. LOSS (dB) PER 30 METERS (100 FEET) OF
CORRECTLY MATCHED 50 Ω LINE
• Use only as a general guide. Specifications may vary
between cable manufacturers.
Connect all accessories to the transceiver {pages 3, 60}.
Accessories include the following:
• Microphone
• Antenna Tuner
• CW Key
• Computer
• TNC/ Multimode Communications
Processor
|nstall and connect an antenna system
{page 1}.
Install a ground system that satisfies DC
and RF grounding requirements {page 2}.
Install lightning protection to protect the
antenna system, your personal safety,
and your property {page 2}.
Install and connect a DC power supply {page 2}.
• Headphones
• External Speaker
• RTTY Equipment
• Linear Amplifier
6.4
2.6
2.3
2.3
2.1
2.0
1.4
1.2
1.0
0.90
0.90
0.72
0.70
0.68
0.54
0.45
0.48
0.40
0.39
0.32
0.26
4.3
1.6
1.5
1.5
1.4
1.0
0.93
0.80
0.80
0.60
0.60
0.50
0.48
0.48
0.37
0.33
0.29
0.26
0.25
0.21
0.16
2.3
0.75
0.80
0.65
0.70
0.50
0.45
0.38
N/A
0.29
0.29
0.24
0.24
N/A
N/A
N/A
0.13
0.12
< 0.10
< 0.10
< 0.10
RG-174, -174A
RG-58A, -58C
3D-2V
RG-58, -58B
RG-58 Foam
RG-8X
5D-2V
RG-8, -8A, -9, -9A, -9B,
-213, -214, -215
5D-FB
RG-8 Foam
8D-2V
10D-2V
9913
8D-FB
10D-FB
12D-FB
RG-17, -17A
1/2" Hardline
20D-2V
3/4" Hardline
7/8" Hardline
Transmission Line 3. 5 MHz 14 MHz 30 MHz
N/A: Not available
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
2
First connect the DC power cable to the regulated DC
power supply and check that polarities are correct
(Red: positive, Black: negative). Then connect the
connectorized end of the DC power cable to the
DC 13.8 V power connector on the transceiver rear
panel. Press the DC power cable connector firmly into
the connector on the transceiver until the locking tab
clicks.
REPLACING FUSES
If the fuse blows, determine the cause then correct the
problem. After the problem is resolved, only then
replace the fuse. If newly installed fuses continue to
blow, disconnect the power plug and contact your
dealer or nearest Service Center for assistance.
CAUTION: REPLACE BLOWN FUSES ONLY AFTER
INVESTIGATING AND CORRECTING THE CAUSE OF THE
FAILED FUSE. ALWAYS REPLACE A BLOWN FUSE BY A NEW
FUSE WITH THE SPECIFIED RATINGS.
1 INSTALLATION
GROUND CONNECTION
At the minimum, a good DC ground is required to
prevent such dangers as electric shock. For superior
communications results, a good RF ground is required,
against which the antenna system can operate. Both of
these conditions can be met by providing a good earth
ground for your station. Bury one or more ground rods,
or a large copper plate under the ground, and connect
this to the transceiver GND terminal. Use heavy gauge
wire or a copper strap, cut as short as possible, for this
connection. Just as for antenna work, all connections
must be clean and tight.
LIGHTNING PROTECTION
Consider carefully how to protect your equipment and
your home from lightning. Even in areas where
lightning storms are less common, there are usually a
limited number of storms each year. Take the time to
study the best way to protect your installation from the
effects of lightning by consulting reference material on
the subject.
The installation of a lightning arrestor is a start, but there
is more that you can do. For example, terminate your
antenna system transmission lines at an entry panel
that you install outside your home. Ground this entry
panel to a good outside ground, and then connect
appropriate feed lines between the entry panel and your
transceiver. When a lightning storm occurs, you can
ensure added protection by disconnecting the feed lines
from your transceiver.
CAUTION: DO NOT ATTEMPT TO USE A GAS PIPE (WHICH IS
CLEARLY DANGEROUS), AN ELECTRICAL CONDUIT (WHICH
HAS THE WHOLE HOUSE WIRING ATTACHED AND MAY ACT
LIKE AN ANTENNA), OR A PLASTIC WATER PIPE FOR A
GROUND.
DC POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
In order to use this transceiver, you will need a separate
13.8 V DC power supply that must be purchased
separately. DO NOT directly connect the transceiver to
an AC outlet! Use the supplied DC power cable to
connect the transceiver to a regulated power supply. Do
not substitute a cable with smaller gauge wires. The
current capacity of your power supply must be 20.5 A
peak or more.
CAUTION:
x BEFORE CONNECTING THE DC POWER SUPPLY TO THE
TRANSCEIVER, BE SURE TO SWITCH THE TRANSCEIVER
AND THE DC POWER SUPPLY OFF.
x DO NOT PLUG THE DC POWER SUPPLY INTO AN AC
OUTLET UNTIL YOU MAKE ALL CONNECTIONS.
Fuse Location Fuse Current Rating
Supplied Accessory
Cable
25 A
TS-570
4 A
(For an external antenna tuner)
DC power supply
TS-570
Black Red
Fuse holders
DC 13.8 V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
3
1 INSTALLATION
ACCESSORY CONNECTIONS
FRONT PANEL
s Headphones (PHONES)
Use headphones having 4 to 32 Ω impedance. You
can also use stereo headphones. When
headphones are used, no sound is heard from the
internal (or optional external) speaker. Use a 6.0 mm
(1/4") diameter, 2-conductor (mono) or 3-conductor
(stereo) plug.
s Microphone (MIC)
To communicate in the voice modes, connect to the
MIC connector a microphone having an impedance
between 250 Ω and 600 Ω. Insert the connector
from your microphone fully, then screw the retaining
ring clockwise until snug. Compatible microphones
include the MC-43S, MC-47, MC-60A, MC-80,
MC-85, and MC-90. Do not use the MC-44,
MC-44DM, MC-45, MC-45E, MC-45DM,
MC-45DME, MC-52DM, or MC-53DM microphone.
REAR PANEL
s External Speaker (EXT SP)
Ensure any external speaker used has an
impedance of 8 Ω. Use a 3.5 mm (1/8") diameter,
2-conductor (mono) plug. When an external speaker
is used, no sound is heard from the internal speaker.
WARNING! DO NOT CONNECT HEADPHONES TO THIS
JACK. THE HIGH AUDIO OUTPUT AT THIS JACK COULD
DAMAGE YOUR HEARING.
s Keys and Keyboards for CW Operation
(PADDLE and KEY)
For CW operation using the internal electronic keyer,
connect a keyer paddle to the PADDLE jack. For
CW operation without using the internal electronic
keyer, connect a straight key, semi-automatic key
(bug), electronic keyer, or the CW keyed output from
a Multimode Communications Processor (MCP) to
the KEY jack. The jacks mate with a 6.0 mm (1/4")
3-conductor plug and a 3.5 mm (1/8") 2-conductor
plug respectively. External electronic keyers or
MCPs must use positive keying to be compatible
with this transceiver. Use a shielded cable between
the key and the transceiver.
Note: Due to the full-featured functionality of the internal
electronic keyer, you may decide it’s unnecessary to connect
both a paddle and another type of key unless you specifically
want to use a keyboard for CW. It’s recommended that you
become familiar with the internal keyer by reading
“ELECTRONIC KEYER” {page 34} before making your decision.
TS-570
Headphones
Microphone
·GND(STBY)
MIC·
¹GND(MIC)
'NC
'8 V(10 mA max)
PTT´
DOWN
UP¹
MIC connector (Front view)
External speaker
TS-570
• Paddle • Straight key
• Bug
• Electronic keyer
• MCP CW output
Ground +
Ground Dash Dot
Y
O
U
R

F
I
R
S
T

Q
S
O
4
RECEIVING
2 YOUR FIRST QSO
Note: Only those buttons and controls required to briefly try the
transceiver are explained in this section.
q Set the following as specified:
• AF control: Fully counterclockwise
• RF control: Fully clockwise
• DSP SLOPE (HIGH) control:
Fully clockwise
• DSP SLOPE (LOW) control:
Fully counterclockwise
• IF SHIFT control: Center
• SQL control: Fully counterclockwise
w Switch ON the DC power supply, then press and
hold the [POWER] switch briefly.
• The transceiver switches ON. Indicators and
frequency digits should appear on the display.
e VFO A should already be selected for receiving
and transmitting, and you should see “tA” on the
display. If not, press the [A/B] button.
r Increase the AF control slowly clockwise until you
hear a suitable level of background noise.
t Select an Amateur band by pressing the [UP] or
[DOWN] button.
y Select an operating mode by pressing the
[LSB/USB] or [CW/FSK] button.
• Press the same button again to toggle to the
second function on the button. For example,
repeatedly pressing the [LSB/USB] button
switches between LSB and USB modes.
u Turn the Tuning control to tune in a station.
• If no stations are heard but you have an
antenna connected, possibly the wrong
antenna connector is selected. Pressing the
[ANT] button toggles between the Antenna 1
and the Antenna 2 connectors.
Since you’ve now installed the TS-570, why not try it? The instructions below are abbreviated. They are intended
only to act as a quick introduction. If you encounter problems or there’s something you don’t understand, you can
read about the subject in more detail later.
PF
ATT PRE-AMP
VOX PROC
SEND
CH1
MIC
CW
FSK
LSB
USB
FM
AM
AT TUNE
POWER
HF TRANSCEIVER TS-570D
PHONES
1
CH2
2
CH3
3
ANT
4
REC
5
FINE
6
NB
7
AGC/TONE
8
REV
9
CLR
F.LOCK
0 ENT
MIC
PWR
KEY
DELAY MENU 1MHz
SPLIT
M/V
DOWN
UP
MR
TF-SET
A=B
SCAN M>VFO M.IN
M.IN
FILTER
CW TUNE
B.C.
N.R.
A/B
CLEAR
RIT
XIT
RIT/XIT
IF SHIFT SQL CH
4 6
0 10
2 8
AF RF
L
O
W
C
U
T
H
IG
H
C
U
T
HIGH
DSP SLOPE
LOW
4 6
0 10
2 8
+ –
q
q

e
u
t

qr
q
q
q

w

y
• Note that pressing [POWER] for more than
approximately 2 seconds switches the
transceiver power OFF.
5
Y
O
U
R

F
I
R
S
T

Q
S
O
TRANSMITTING
2 YOUR FIRST QSO
After tuning in a few stations as explained in the
previous section “RECEIVING”, try making a contact.
q Assuming you are already on the correct band
with the correct mode selected (steps 1~7 in
“RECEIVING”), use the Tuning control to tune in
a station or to select an unused frequency.
w Momentarily press the [AT TUNE] button.
• “AT” appears.
e Press and hold the [AT TUNE] button to allow the
built-in antenna tuner to function.
• “AT” blinks and “TX” appears.
• Tuning should be completed in less than
approximately 20 seconds. “AT” stops blinking
and “TX” disappears.
• If tuning is not completed in approximately 20
seconds, error beeps sound. Press
[AT TUNE] to stop the error beeps and to quit
tuning. Check your antenna system before
continuing.
Note: Tuning will automatically turn off after approximately
60 seconds. In addition, “AT” will disappear and the error beeps
will stop.
r SSB: Press the [MIC] button to activate the
Microphone Gain Setting function.
• “MIC-50” appears.
CW: Skip this step.
t Press the [SEND] button.
• “TX” appears.
y Begin speaking into the microphone or sending
CW with your key.
u SSB: While speaking into the microphone, adjust
the MULTI/CH control so that the ALC meter
reflects according to your voice level.
CW: Skip this step.
i Press the [SEND] button again when you want to
return to receive mode.
o Press the [MIC] button again to quit the
Microphone Gain Setting function.
This completes your introduction to the TS-570, but
there is a great deal more to know. “OPERATING
BASICS” {page 13} and following chapters explain all
functions of the transceiver starting with the most
basic, commonly-used functions.
PF
ATT PRE-AMP
VOX PROC
SEND
CH1
MIC
CW
FSK
LSB
USB
FM
AM
AT TUNE
POWER
HF TRANSCEIVER TS-570D
PHONES
1
CH2
2
CH3
3
ANT
4
REC
5
FINE
6
NB
7
AGC/TONE
8
REV
9
CLR
F.LOCK
0 ENT
MIC
PWR
KEY
DELAY MENU 1MHz
SPLIT
M/V
DOWN
UP
MR
TF-SET
A=B
SCAN M>VFO M.IN
M.IN
FILTER
CW TUNE
B.C.
N.R.
A/B
CLEAR
RIT
XIT
RIT/XIT
IF SHIFT SQL CH
4 6
0 10
2 8
AF RF
L
O
W
C
U
T
H
IG
H
C
U
T
HIGH
DSP SLOPE
LOW
4 6
0 10
2 8
+ –
we
ro
ti
u q
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
6
FRONT PANEL
' '' '' PHONES jack
Connect headphones to this jack. Inserting a plug into
the jack automatically mutes the audio from the speaker
{page 3}.
1 1 1 1 1 MIC connector
Connect a compatible microphone, then snugly screw
down the connector locking ring {page 3}.
1 1 1 1 1 Multi-purpose keypad
Consists of 10 buttons that are used for inputting
numeric data. Also used for the following functions.
• CH 1, CH 2, CH 3 buttons
Press to select functions associated with the internal
electronic keyer {page 34} and the DRU-3A Digital
Recording Unit {page 53} .
• ANT button
Press to select either Antenna 1 or Antenna 2 that
are connected to their respective antenna
connectors on the rear panel {pages 1, 48}.
• REC button
Press to select the record mode for CW Message
Memory {page 35} or for the optional DRU-3A Digital
Recording Unit {page 53}.
• FINE button
Press to reduce by one-tenth the Tuning control
step size to allow more precise tuning {page 29}.
• NB button
Press to switch ON or OFF the analog Noise Blanker
{page 36}.
• AGC/TONE button
Press to switch the Automatic Gain Control function
between Slow and Fast {page 30}. Also switches
ON or OFF the Subtone {page 24} or CTCSS
function {page 25}.
· ·· ·· POWER switch
Press and hold down briefly to switch ON the
transceiver power. Press again to switch OFF the
power {page 13}.
´ ´´ ´´ PF button
A function can be assigned by the user to this
Programmable Function button {page 49}. The default
function is Voice 1 {page 55}.
PRE-AMP button
Press to switch ON or OFF the receive preamplifier
{page 37}.
¹ ¹¹ ¹¹ ATT button
Press to switch ON or OFF the receive attenuator
{page 37}.
' '' '' PROC button
Press to switch ON or OFF the Speech Processor for
transmitting {page 32}.
' '' '' VOX button
In voice modes, press to switch ON or OFF the Voice-
Operated Transmit function {page 31} or, in CW mode,
to switch ON or OFF the Break-in function {page 34}.
¹ ¹¹ ¹¹ AT TUNE button
Use for activating the internal antenna tuner {page 52}
or an external antenna tuner.
· ·· ·· SEND button
Press to switch the transceiver between receive mode
and transmit mode {page 15}.
GETTING ACQUAINTED
PF
ATT PRE-AMP
VOX PROC
SEND
CH1
MIC
CW
FSK
LSB
USB
FM
AM
AT TUNE
POWER
HF TRANSCEIVER TS-570D
PHONES
1
CH2
2
CH3
3
ANT
4
REC
5
FINE
6
NB
7
AGC/TONE
8
REV
9
CLR
F.LOCK
0 ENT
MIC
PWR
KEY
DELAY MENU 1MHz
SPLIT
M/V
DOWN
UP
MR
TF-SET
A=B
SCAN M>VFO M.IN
M.IN
FILTER
CW TUNE
B.C.
N.R.
A/B
CLEAR
RIT
XIT
RIT/XIT
IF SHIFT SQL CH
4 6
0 10
2 8
AF RF
L
O
W
C
U
T
H
IG
H
C
U
T
HIGH
DSP SLOPE
LOW
4 6
0 10
2 8
+ –
1
1
· ´

¹
'
'
¹
·
'
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
7
3 GETTING ACQUAINTED
• REV button
In CW or FSK mode, press to select either the upper
or lower sideband while receiving {pages 21, 26}.
• CLR button
Press to exit from, abort, or reset various functions.
Also used for erasing memory channels {page 43}
or for locking out memory channels from the scan
list {page 44}.
• F.LOCK button
Press to switch ON or OFF the Frequency Lock
function {page 48}.
• ENT button
Press to enter the desired frequency via the keypad
{page 29}.
1 1 1 1 1 Transmit function buttons
Used in conjunction with the MULTI/CH control to set
various transmit functions.
• MIC button
Used for setting the microphone gain level
{page 15}.
• PWR button
Used for setting the transmit output power
{page 15}.
• KEY button
Used for setting the internal electronic keyer speed
{page 34}.
• DELAY button
When using the VOX or Break-in function, used for
setting the time delay from transmit mode to receive
mode {pages 31, 34}.
1 1 1 1 1 Mode buttons
Press these buttons to select your operating mode
{page 14}.
• LSB/USB button
Press to select lower sideband or upper sideband
mode for voice or digital operation {pages 20, 27}.
• CW/FSK button
Press to select CW or frequency shift keying mode
{pages 21, 26}.
• FM/AM button
Press to select FM or AM mode {page 22}.
1 1 1 1 1 MENU button
Press to select or cancel the Menu mode that is used for
activating and configuring functions {page 16}.
1 1 1 1 1 1MHz button
Press to switch between the 1 MHz step mode and the
Amateur band mode {page 29}.
1 1 1 1 1 Tuning control
Turn to select the desired frequency {page 14}. Use the
convenient finger-tip cavity for continuous tuning.
The lever behind the control adjusts the control torque
level; turn fully clockwise for light torque or fully
counterclockwise for slightly heavy torque.
PF
ATT PRE-AMP
VOX PROC
SEND
CH1
MIC
CW
FSK
LSB
USB
FM
AM
AT TUNE
POWER
HF TRANSCEIVER TS-570D
PHONES
1
CH2
2
CH3
3
ANT
4
REC
5
FINE
6
NB
7
AGC/TONE
8
REV
9
CLR
F.LOCK
0 ENT
MIC
PWR
KEY
DELAY MENU 1MHz
SPLIT
M/V
DOWN
UP
MR
TF-SET
A=B
SCAN M>VFO M.IN
M.IN
FILTER
CW TUNE
B.C.
N.R.
A/B
CLEAR
RIT
XIT
RIT/XIT
IF SHIFT SQL CH
4 6
0 10
2 8
AF RF
L
O
W
C
U
T
H
IG
H
C
U
T
HIGH
DSP SLOPE
LOW
4 6
0 10
2 8
+ –
1
1
1 1 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
8
3 GETTING ACQUAINTED
1 1 1 1 1 Frequency control buttons
These buttons control functions related to selecting a
frequency, a VFO, or a memory channel.
• UP/DOWN buttons
Press to step through all Amateur bands
consecutively {page 13} or to step the transceiver
frequency in 1 MHz increments {page 29}. Also
used for making selections from the Menu
{page 16}, and to check Start and End frequencies
for the Scan function {page 43}.
• SPLIT button
Press to use split-frequency operation which allows
a different transmit frequency and receive frequency
{page 23}.
• M/V button
Press to select either Memory or VFO mode
{page 40}.
• TF-SET button
While operating split-frequency, press to monitor or
change your transmit frequency {page 23}.
• A=B button
Press to copy the data in the currently selected VFO
over to the other VFO {page 30}.
• A/B button
Press to select either VFO A or VFO B {page 13}.
Also, in menu mode, press to select either Menu A
or Menu B {page 16}.
• CLEAR button
Press to reset the RIT/XIT frequency offset to zero
{pages 30, 32}.
• RIT button
Press to switch ON or OFF the Receive Incremental
Tuning function {page 30}.
• XIT button
Press to switch ON or OFF the Transmit
Incremental Tuning function {page 32}.
1 1 1 1 1 SCAN button
Press to start and stop Scan functions {pages 46, 47}.
1 1 1 1 1 M>VFO button
Press to transfer data from a memory channel to a VFO
{page 42}.
7 7 7 7 7 M.IN button
Writes data into a memory channel {page 39} or selects
Memory Scroll mode {page 41}.
7 7 7 7 7 Quick Memory buttons
Controls the Quick Memory function {page 44}.
• M.IN button
Press to write data into Quick Memory {page 44}.
• MR button
Press to recall data from Quick Memory {page 45}.
7 7 7 7 7 FILTER button
Press to select the receive filter bandwidth in SSB, CW,
FSK, or AM mode {pages 36, 38}, or press to select
either narrow-band or wide-band transmit deviation in
FM mode {page 22}.
Note: Selecting the narrow filter bandwidth in SSB mode requires
the optional YK-88SN-1 filter {page 36}.
7 7 7 7 7 CW TUNE button
Press to activate the automatic zero-beat function for
CW mode {page 21}.
7 7 7 7 7 B.C. button
Press to switch ON or OFF the DSP Beat Cancel
function {page 38}.
7 7 7 7 7 N.R. button
Press to toggle between Noise Reduction 1, Noise
Reduction 2, and OFF {page 38}.
PF
ATT PRE-AMP
VOX PROC
SEND
CH1
MIC
CW
FSK
LSB
USB
FM
AM
AT TUNE
POWER
HF TRANSCEIVER TS-570D
PHONES
1
CH2
2
CH3
3
ANT
4
REC
5
FINE
6
NB
7
AGC/TONE
8
REV
9
CLR
F.LOCK
0 ENT
MIC
PWR
KEY
DELAY MENU 1MHz
SPLIT
M/V
DOWN
UP
MR
TF-SET
A=B
SCAN M>VFO M.IN
M.IN
FILTER
CW TUNE
B.C.
N.R.
A/B
CLEAR
RIT
XIT
RIT/XIT
IF SHIFT SQL CH
4 6
0 10
2 8
AF RF
L
O
W
C
U
T
H
IG
H
C
U
T
HIGH
DSP SLOPE
LOW
4 6
0 10
2 8
+ –
1 1
7
1 7
7 7 7 7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
9
3 GETTING ACQUAINTED
7 7 7 7 7 DSP SLOPE (HIGH) control
In SSB or AM mode, turn to change the high cut-off
frequency of the receive pass band. Use the control to
improve readability of the desired signal when higher
frequency interference is present {page 37}.
7 7 7 7 7 DSP SLOPE (LOW) control
In SSB or AM mode, turn to change the low cut-off
frequency of the receive pass band. Use the control to
improve readability of the desired signal when lower
frequency interference is present {page 37}.
7 7 7 7 7 RIT/XIT control
After switching ON the RIT or XIT function, turn to
select the desired frequency offset {pages 30, 32}.
7 7 7 7 7 AF control
Turn to adjust the audio frequency gain {page 13}.
º º º º º RF control
Turn to adjust the radio frequency gain {page 13}.
º º º º º IF SHIFT control
Turn to slide the receive pass band either lower or
higher in frequency when interference is present
{page 36}.
º º º º º SQL control
Used for muting (“squelching”) the speaker output when
no receive signal is present {page 14}.
º º º º º MULTI/CH control
In VFO mode, turn to step the operating frequency up
or down {page 29}. In memory channel mode, turn to
select a memory channel {page 40}. Also used for
selecting Menu numbers when accessing the Menu
mode {page 16}, and as a selector to choose settings
for various functions activated by front panel buttons.
MICROPHONE
· ·· ·· UP/DWN buttons
Use these buttons to step up or down the VFO
frequency, memory channels, or Menu selections.
Press and hold down to continuously change the
settings.
´ ´´ ´´ PTT (Push-to-Talk) switch
The transceiver is placed in transmit mode when this
non-locking switch is held down. Releasing the switch
returns the transceiver to receive mode.
PTT
DWN UP
·
´
PF
ATT PRE-AMP
VOX PROC
SEND
CH1
MIC
CW
FSK
LSB
USB
FM
AM
AT TUNE
POWER
HF TRANSCEIVER TS-570D
PHONES
1
CH2
2
CH3
3
ANT
4
REC
5
FINE
6
NB
7
AGC/TONE
8
REV
9
CLR
F.LOCK
0 ENT
MIC
PWR
KEY
DELAY MENU 1MHz
SPLIT
M/V
DOWN
UP
MR
TF-SET
A=B
SCAN M>VFO M.IN
M.IN
FILTER
CW TUNE
B.C.
N.R.
A/B
CLEAR
RIT
XIT
RIT/XIT
IF SHIFT SQL CH
4 6
0 10
2 8
AF RF
L
O
W
C
U
T
H
IG
H
C
U
T
HIGH
DSP SLOPE
LOW
4 6
0 10
2 8
+ –
º
7
7
7
º
7
º
º
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
10
3 GETTING ACQUAINTED
REAR PANEL
· ·· ·· ANT 1 and ANT 2 connectors
Connect the feed lines from your antennas to these
connectors. Refer to pages 1 and 48 for details.
´ ´´ ´´ AT connector
Mates with the connector on the cable supplied with the
external antenna tuner. Refer to the instruction manual
supplied with this tuner for more information.
DC 13.8 V power input connector
Connect a 13.8 V DC power source {page 2}. Use the
supplied cable with a regulated DC power supply.
¹ ¹¹ ¹¹ GND post
Connect a heavy gauge wire or copper strap between
the ground post and the nearest earth ground {page 2}.
' '' '' COM connector
Mates with a 9-pin female RS-232C connector for
connecting a computer via one of its serial
communication ports {page 60}. Also used with the
Quick Data Transfer function {page 60}.
' '' '' KEY and PADDLE jacks
The PADDLE jack mates with a 6.0 mm (1/4")
3-conductor plug for connecting a keyer paddle to the
internal electronic keyer. The KEY jack mates with a
3.5 mm (1/8") 2-conductor plug for connecting an
external key for CW operation. Read “Keys and
Keyboards for CW Operation” {page 3} before
connecting to these jacks.
¹ ¹¹ ¹¹ ACC 2 connector
Mates with a 13-pin male DIN connector for connecting
various accessory equipment {pages 61, 62}.
· ·· ·· EXT SP jack
Mates with a 3.5 mm (1/8"), 2-conductor (mono) plug for
connecting an external speaker {page 3}. Connecting
an external speaker cuts off the audio automatically to
the internal speaker.
' '' '' REMOTE connector
Mates with a 7-pin male DIN connector for connecting a
linear amplifier {page 61}.
European versions only: Before connecting to the ACC 2 and
COM connectors, remove the protective covers.
ANT 2
AT
DC 13.8V
GND
EXT.SP
8Ω REMOTE
ANT 1
KEY
COM
PADDLE ACC 2
'
´
¹
'
' ¹ ·
·
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
11
3 GETTING ACQUAINTED
DISPLAY
1 1 1 1 1 FAST
Appears when a fast time constant is selected for the
Automatic Gain Control function {page 30}.
1 1 1 1 1 RIT
Appears when Receive Incremental Tuning is ON
{page 30}.
1 1 1 1 1 XIT
Appears when Transmit Incremental Tuning is ON
{page 32}.
1 1 1 1 1 TX EQ.
Appears when the TX Equalizer function is ON
{page 33}.
1 1 1 1 1
Either “N.R. 1” or “N.R. 2” appears depending on
whether Noise Reduction 1 or Noise Reduction 2 is
selected {page 38}.
1 1 1 1 1
Appears when Beat Cancel is ON {page 38}.
1 1 1 1 1 MENU
Appears while Menu mode is being accessed
{page 16}.
1 1 1 1 1 M.CH
Appears while Memory Recall or Memory Scroll is
being used {page 40}.
7 7 7 7 7
Shows 2-digit information such as a menu number or a
memory channel number.
· ·· ·· METER
While receiving, serves as an S-meter to measure and
display the received signal strength. While transmitting,
serves as a calibrated power meter plus an ALC meter,
an SWR meter, or a Speech Processor compression
meter. The Peak Hold function holds each reading for
about 2.5 seconds.
´ ´´ ´´
Appears while the transceiver is in the transmit mode.

Appears while the squelch is open in the receive mode.
¹ ¹¹ ¹¹
Appears while the internal antenna tuner {page 52} or an
external antenna tuner is in-line.
' '' ''
Either “ANT 1” or “ANT 2” appears depending on
whether the Antenna 1 connector or the Antenna 2
connector is selected {page 48}.
' '' '' ATT
Appears when the receive attenuator is ON {page 37}.
¹ ¹¹ ¹¹ PRE -AMP
Appears when the receive preamplifier is ON {page 37}.
· ·· ·· VOX
Appears when the Voice-Operated Transmit function is
ON {page 31}. For CW operation, appears when the
Break-in function is ON {page 34}.
' '' '' PROC
Appears when Speech Processor is ON {page 32}.
1 1 1 1 1 NB
Appears when Noise Blanker is ON {page 36}.
1 1 1 1 1 SPLIT
Appears when the transmit frequency differs from the
receive frequency {page 23}.
' · ´¹ ' ' ¹ ·
1
1 1
1
1 1 1 1
1 7
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
12
3 GETTING ACQUAINTED
º º º º º R
Appears while the sideband is being reversed for CW
{page 21}. Also appears while the mark and space
frequency relationship is being reversed for FSK
{page 26}.
º º º º º FSK
Appears when in Frequency Shift Keying mode
{page 26} or when you select one of the digital operation
filters via Menu No. 32 in SSB mode {page 27}.
º º º º º FM
Appears when in FM mode {page 14}.
º º º º º AM
Appears when in AM mode {page 14}.
º º º º º F.LOCK
Appears when the Frequency Lock function is ON
{page 48}.
º º º º º FINE
Appears when the Fine function is ON {page 29}.
º º º º º 1MHz
Appears when the 1 MHz Step function is ON {page 29}.
º º º º º T
Appears when the Subtone function is ON {page 24}.
º º º º º CTCSS
Appears when CTCSS is ON {page 25}.
º º º º º CTRL
Appears while Quick Data Transfer {page 50} or
Computer Control {page 51} is being used.
7 7 7 7 7
Shows the current operating frequency. Also shows
Menu selections while in Menu mode.
7 7 7 7 7
“tA” or “As” appears while VFO A is being selected
{page 13}. “A” appears while Menu A is being
accessed {page 16}.
7 7 7 7 7
“tB” or “Bs” appears while VFO B is being selected
{page 13}. “B” appears while Menu B is being
accessed {page 16}.
7 7 7 7 7
“tM” or “Ms” appears while a simplex memory
channel is being selected {page 40}. “tMs” appears
while a split-frequency memory channel is being
selected {page 40}.
7 7 7 7 7
Shows menu information while Menu A or B is being
accessed. Also shows the transmit frequency during
split-frequency operation, and the RIT/XIT offset
frequency when these functions are ON.
7 7 7 7 7 M.SCR
Appears while Memory Scroll is being used {page 41}.
7 7 7 7 7 LSB
Appears when in Lower Sideband mode {page 14}.
7 7 7 7 7 USB
Appears when in Upper Sideband mode {page 14}.
7 7 7 7 7 CW
Appears when in CW mode {page 14}.
º 7 7 7 7 º º º
7
º º º º
º
7 7
º
7 7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
13
OPERATING BASICS
SWITCHING POWER ON/OFF
Switch ON the DC power supply, then press and hold
down [POWER] until “HELLO” appears on the display.
Release [POWER] when you see “HELLO”.
• After the “HELLO” message, the frequency and
other indicators appear.
To switch OFF the transceiver, press [POWER].
• After the transceiver has been switched ON, it can
then be switched OFF or ON by using only the
power switch on the DC power supply.
ADJUSTING VOLUME
AUDIO FREQUENCY (AF) GAIN
Turn the AF control clockwise to increase the audio
level and counterclockwise to decrease the level.
Note: The position of the AF control does not affect the volume of
“beeps” caused by pressing buttons nor the CW transmit sidetone.
Also, the audio level for Packet operation is independent of the AF
control setting.
RADIO FREQUENCY (RF) GAIN
Usually, set the RF control fully clockwise. If you are
having trouble hearing the desired signal due to
excessive atmospheric noise or interference from other
stations, it may help to reduce the RF gain.
To do this, take note of the peak S-meter reading of the
desired signal. Turn the RF control counterclockwise
until the S-meter reads the peak value that you noted.
Signals that are weaker than this level will be
attenuated. Reception of the station will be easier.
Depending on the type and gain of your antenna, and
the condition of the band, you may prefer leaving the RF
control turned counterclockwise by some amount
instead of turning it fully clockwise. When in FM mode,
always set the RF gain control fully clockwise.
SELECTING VFO A OR VFO B
VFO A and VFO B are modes that allow any desired
frequency to be selected within the frequency range of
the transceiver. VFO A and VFO B function
independently so that different or the same frequencies
can be selected for each VFO.
Press [A/B] to toggle between VFO A and VFO B.
• “tA” or “tB” appears and shows which VFO is
selected.
SELECTING A BAND
1 If “1MHz” is visible on the display, first press [1MHz]
to exit from the 1MHz Step mode.
• “1MHz” should disappear.
2 Press [UP] or [DOWN].
• Holding down either button consecutively steps
the transceiver to each band.
QUICK MEMO
AF RF
4 6
0 10
2 8
QUICK MEMO CW
FSK
LSB
USB
FM
AM
MENU 1MHz
SPLIT
M/V
DOWN
UP
TF-SET
A=B
PF
ATT PRE-AMP
POWER
QUICK MEMO
SPLIT
M/V
TF-SET
A=B
A/B
CLEAR
RIT
XIT
QUICK MEMO
AF RF
4 6
0 10
2 8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
14
4 OPERATING BASICS
SELECTING A MODE
Depending on which operating mode you want to select,
press the [LSB/USB], [CW/FSK], or [FM/AM] button.
The second function on each button is accessed by
again pressing the same button. For example,
repeatedly pressing [LSB/USB] toggles between LSB
and USB modes.
In SSB mode, the transceiver automatically selects LSB
for frequencies lower than 9.5 MHz, and selects USB for
9.5 MHz or higher frequencies if the Tuning control, the
MULTI/CH control, or Mic [UP]/[DWN] is used to cross
the frequency of 9.5 MHz. This is also true if using the
front panel [UP] or [DOWN] button when the 1 MHz
Step mode is used.
ADJUSTING SQUELCH
The purpose of squelch is to silence audio output from
the speaker when no signal is present. When squelch
is set correctly, you will hear sound only while a station
is actually being received. The point at which ambient
noise on a frequency just disappears, called the squelch
threshold, depends on the frequency.
Turn the SQL control clockwise to just eliminate the
background noise when no signal is present. Many
operators prefer leaving the squelch control fully
counterclockwise unless operating full-carrier modes
such as FM or AM.
SELECTING A FREQUENCY
There are two simple methods to select a frequency.
A Manual Tuning
Turn the Tuning control or press Mic [UP]/[DWN] to
select the exact frequency.
B Direct Frequency Entry (Keypad)
Press [ENT], then directly enter the desired
frequency using the numeric keypad. For details,
refer to “Direct Frequency Entry” {page 29}.
FRONT PANEL METER
The multifunction meter measures the parameters in the
table below. The appropriate meters automatically
become functional according to which state the
transceiver is in. Peak readings for the S-meter, ALC,
SWR, COMP, and PWR functions are held for a brief
moment.
CW
FSK
LSB
USB
FM
AM
QUICK MEMO
IF SHIFT SQL
4 6
0 10
2 8
QUICK MEMO
S
PWR
ALC
SWR
COMP
Received signal strength
Transmit output power
Automatic level control
status
Antenna system standing
wave ratio
Speech compression level
when using the Speech
Processor {page 32}
Receive
Transmit
Transmit
Transmit

Transmit plus
SSB/AM/FM mode
plus [PROC] ON
Display
Scale
Functional State
Note:
x The COMP meter functions only when the Speech Processor is
ON while using SSB, FM, or AM mode. When the COMP meter
appears, the SWR meter disappears.
x Peak Hold readings cannot be deactivated on this transceiver.
CH1
1
CH2
2
CH3
3
ANT
4
REC
5
FINE
6
NB
7
AGC/TONE
8
REV
9
CLR
F.LOCK
0 ENT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
15
4 OPERATING BASICS
TRANSMITTING
Methods for transmitting include the following:
• Press [SEND].
• Press and hold down Mic [PTT].
• Connect a key or keyer paddle, select the CW mode,
press [VOX] to switch ON the Break-in function, and
close the key or keyer paddle.
For a detailed explanation on transmitting, refer to
sections in “BASIC COMMUNICATING” beginning on
page 20.
Note: When CW, FSK, or AM is selected, the transmit carrier level is
automatically adjusted according to the selected mode.
SELECTING TRANSMIT POWER
It’s wise, and required by law, to select the lowest
transmit power that allows reliable communication.
Reducing power lowers the risk of interfering with others
on the band. On this transceiver, it is possible to
change output power while transmitting.
1 Press [PWR].
• The current transmit power appears.
2 Turn the MULTI/CH control counterclockwise to
reduce power and clockwise to increase power.
• The displayed transmit power changes.
• SSB/CW/FSK/FM: Transmit power can be
changed from 5 W to 100 W in steps of 5 W.
• AM: Transmit power can be changed from 5 W to
25 W in steps of 5 W.
3 Press [PWR] again to complete the setting.
Note: The transmit power can be separately selected for the AM
mode independent of the other modes.
MICROPHONE GAIN
The microphone gain is finely adjustable in the SSB or
AM mode. A different level can be selected between
when the Speech Processor {page 32} is ON and when
the Speech Processor is OFF.
1 Press [MIC].
• The current microphone gain level appears. The
default is 50.
2 Press [SEND] or press and hold Mic [PTT].
• “TX” appears.
3 SSB: While speaking into the microphone, adjust
the MULTI/CH control so that the ALC meter reflects
according to your voice level.
AM: While speaking into the microphone, adjust the
MULTI/CH control so that the calibrated power meter
slightly reflects according to your voice level.
4 Press [SEND] again or release Mic [PTT].
• “TX” disappears.
5 Press [MIC] again.
For the FM mode, set the microphone gain by
accessing Menu No. 17 {page 17} and selecting either
“L” (low) or “H” (high).
Note:
x When using the optional MC-90 microphone in FM mode, select
high microphone gain. The microphone sensitivity is low in FM
mode and this may cause insufficient modulation.
x When using a microphone that has an amplifier, be careful that
the output of the amplifier is not too large.
PF
ATT PRE-AMP
POWER
VOX PROC
SEND AT TUNE
MIC
PWR
KEY
DELAY
QUICK MEMO
CH
MIC
PWR
KEY
DELAY
QUICK MEMO
CH
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
16
MENU SETUP
WHAT IS A MENU?
Many functions on this transceiver are selected or
configured via a software-controlled Menu instead of
physical controls on the transceiver. Once familiar with
the Menu system, you will appreciate the versatility it
offers. No longer is the number and complexity of
features restricted by the physical controls and
switches on the front panel.
MENU A/ MENU B
The transceiver has two menus. These menus are
called Menu A and Menu B. The menus contain
identical functions; however, each menu can be
configured independently.
For example, you may enjoy two different kinds of
operating activities but you like to configure the
transceiver differently for each activity. Menu A could
be configured with one set of transmit signal
characteristics, DSP settings, programmable buttons,
frequency steps, etc. Menu B could be configured
completely differently. By switching from Menu A to
Menu B, you could instantly change Menu
configuration and button assignment to suit your
current operating style. Or, two operators may share a
single transceiver. By dedicating one Menu per
operator, each would always enjoy the best
configuration.
Note: The COM communication parameter setting in Menu No. 35
is shared by Menu A and Menu B.
MENU ACCESS
The following procedure explains how to check or
change any of the Menu items.
1 Press [MENU].
• “MENU” appears.
2 Press [A/B] to toggle Menu A or Menu B.
• “A” or “B” appears to show which Menu is
selected.
3 Turn the MULTI/CH control to select the desired
Menu No.
• Each time you change the Menu No. , you will
see a scrolling message that briefly describes the
current Menu No.
4 Press [UP], [DOWN], Mic [UP], or Mic [DWN] to
change the current selection for this Menu item.
5 Press [MENU] or [CLR] to exit Menu mode.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
19
5 MENU SETUP
p u o r G
u n e M
. o N
n o i t c n u F s n o i t c e l e S t l u a f e D
e g a P
. f e R
d e c n a h n E
7 4
e m u l o v r o t i n o m l a n g i s - d e t t i m s n a r T
m u m i x a m : 9 , m u m i n i m : 1
9 o t 1 , F F O F F O 3 3
8 4 T I R h t i w t a e b - o r e z o t u A F F O / N O F F O 1 2
9 4 e g n a h c t h g i e w - d e k c o l r e y e K 1 : 0 . 4 o t 1 : 5 . 2 1 : 0 . 3 5 3
0 5
r e z i l a u q e X R
, s s a p t n a m r o f : P F , t s o o b h g i h : b H , t a l f : F F O
l a n o i t n e v n o c : c , t s o o b s s a b : b b
c / b b / P F / b H / F F O
y l t n e r r u c t o n : U (
) e l b a l i a v a
F F O 0 3
1 5 e g n a h c l e v e l 1 n o i t c u d e r e s i o N 9 o t 1 , o t u A o t u A 8 3
Function
Menu
No.
AMPLIFIER
Linear amplifier relay
ANTENNA TUNER (AT)
RX enable/ disable
BEEP FUNCTIONS
Beep level
CW
Auto weighting
Auto weighting reversed
Keying priority over playback
RX pitch
Semi-automatic key (“Bug”) function
TX sidetone frequency
TX sidetone volume
DATA TRANSFER
Transfer enable
Transfer method
DIGITAL OPERATION
AF input (MCP/TNC TX)
AF output (MCP/TNC RX)
Filter bandwidth
DISPLAY
Brightness
DRU-3A DIGITAL RECORDING SYSTEM (DRS)
Playback repeat
Playback repeat interval
Playback volume
DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING
NR2 time constant
FM
Microphone gain
Subtone frequency
Subtone type
39

11

01
26
27
28
20
22
20
21

36
37

33
34
32

00

23
24
25

12

17
18
19
Function
Menu
No.
03
04
06
05
02
30
29
31

07
08

41
42
43
44
45

46

35

09
10
15

13
14
38

40
16
FREQUENCY STEPS
MULTI/CH control (SSB, CW, FSK, AM)
MULTI/CH control (FM)
MULTI/CH control (AM and AM broadcast only)
MULTI/CH control (rounds off frequencies)
[UP]/[DOWN] buttons
FSK
Polarity (space/mark)
Shift
Tone
MEMORY CHANNELS
Memory-VFO split operation
Tunable/fixed frequency
PROGRAMMABLE BUTTONS
[PF] button
Mic [PF1] button
Mic [PF2] button
Mic [PF3] button
Mic [PF4] button
RECEIVE
IF filter bandwidth
REAR PANEL
COM communication parameters
SCAN
Hold (Program Scan)
Resume (Time or Carrier)
SPEECH PROCESSOR
Compression level
TRANSMIT
Bandwidth (SSB or AM)
Equalizer
Inhibit
TRANSVERTER
Enable/disable
VOICE-OPERATED TRANSMIT (VOX)
Gain
CROSS REFERENCE FOR MENU
FUNCTIONS
Use this table arranged by subject to help you locate the
function that you are interested in checking or changing.
Consult “MENU CONFIGURATION” {page 17} for more
detail on each function.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
20
BASIC COMMUNICATING
SSB TRANSMISSION
SSB is now the most commonly-used mode on the HF
Amateur bands. Compared with other voice modes,
SSB requires a narrow bandwidth for communications.
SSB also allows long distance communication with
minimum transmit power. These reasons, combined
with the fact that modern Amateur transceivers deliver
reasonably good audio quality, make SSB the mode
that most prefer on HF.
Refer, if necessary, to “OPERATING BASICS”
beginning on page 13 for receiving details.
1 Select the operating frequency.
2 Press [LSB/USB] to select either upper or lower
sideband mode.
• “LSB” or “USB” appears to show which sideband
is selected.
3 Press [MIC] to activate the Microphone Gain Setting
function.
• The current gain level appears
4 Press and hold down Mic [PTT], or press [SEND].
• “RX” disappears and “TX” appears.
• Refer to “VOX” {page 31} for information on
automatic TX/RX switching.
5 Speak into the microphone and adjust the
MULTI/CH control so that the ALC meter reflects
according to your voice level.
• Speak in a normal tone and level of voice.
Speaking too close to the microphone, or too
loudly, may increase distortion and reduce
intelligibility.
• You may want to use the Speech Processor.
Refer to “SPEECH PROCESSOR” {page 32} for
details.
6 Release Mic [PTT], or press [SEND] again, to return
to the receive mode.
• “TX” disappears and “RX” appears.
7 Press [MIC] again to quit the Microphone Gain
Setting function.
Refer to “COMMUNICATING AIDS” beginning on
page 29 for information about additional useful functions
for operating.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
21
6 BASIC COMMUNICATING
CW TRANSMISSION
CW operators know that this mode is a reliable method
of communicating under the worst conditions. Although
it’s true that newer digital modes rival CW as being
equally as useful in poor conditions, these modes do not
have the long history of service yet nor the simplicity
that CW can have.
This transceiver has a built-in electronic keyer that
supports a variety of functions. For details on using
these functions, refer to “ELECTRONIC KEYER”
{page 34}.
Refer, if necessary, to “OPERATING BASICS”
beginning on page 13 for receiving details.
1 Select the operating frequency.
2 Press [CW/FSK] to select CW mode.
• “CW” appears.
• To tune in another station so your transceiver is
precisely on their frequency, use Auto Zero-beat.
Refer to “AUTO ZERO-BEAT”.
• If you wish, you can press [REV] to switch
receive from the default upper sideband to the
lower sideband. “R” will appear.
3 Press [SEND].
• “RX” disappears and “TX” appears.
• No transmit carrier level adjustment is necessary.
• Refer to “CW BREAK-IN” {page 34} for
information on automatic TX/RX switching.
4 Begin sending.
• As you transmit, you should be hearing a
sidetone that lets you monitor your own sending.
Refer to “TX SIDETONE/ RX PITCH
FREQUENCY”.
5 Press [SEND] again to return to the receive mode.
• “TX” disappears and “RX” appears.
Note: Auto Zero-beating may fail if there are other interfering signals
on frequency.
Refer to “COMMUNICATING AIDS” beginning on
page 29 for information about additional useful functions
for operating.
AUTO ZERO-BEAT
Use Auto Zero-beat before transmitting whenever you
need to tune in a CW station. Auto Zero-beat
automatically and exactly matches your transmit
frequency with the station that you are receiving.
Neglecting to do this will reduce your chances for being
heard by the other station.
1 Press [CW TUNE] to start Auto Zero-beat.
• “CW TUNE” appears.
• Your transmit frequency is automatically changed
so that the pitch of the received signal exactly
matches the TX sidetone/ RX pitch frequency
that you have set in your transceiver Menu
configuration. Refer to “TX SIDETONE/ RX
PITCH FREQUENCY” below for further
information on that frequency.
• When matching is completed, “CW TUNE”
disappears.
• If matching is unsuccessful, the previous
frequency is restored.
2 To interrupt Auto Zero-beat, press [CW TUNE] or
[CLR].
Note:
x If using RIT {page 30}, you may access Menu No. 48 and switch
the function ON. Auto Zero-beat then will match the RIT-offset
frequency with the station that you are receiving. When this
function is OFF, Auto Zero-beat changes the transmit frequency.
x You cannot start Auto Zero-beat if you have selected 1.0 kHz or
2.0 kHz for the DSP filter bandwidth.
x When using Auto Zero-beat, the matching error is within ±50 Hz
in most cases.
x Auto Zero-beat may fail if the keying speed of the target station is
too slow.
TX SIDETONE/ RX PITCH FREQUENCY
The transmit sidetone is the monitor tone you hear from
your transceiver as you send CW. It is necessary so
you can hear what you are transmitting. It is also useful
for checking that your key contacts are closing, the
keyer is functioning, or for sending practice without
putting a signal on the air.
Receive pitch refers to the frequency of the CW note
that you hear after tuning your receiver for maximum
receive signal strength.
On this transceiver, the frequency of the sidetone and
receive pitch are equal and selectable. Use Menu No.
20 to select the frequency that is most comfortable for
you.
To change the volume of the TX sidetone, use Menu
No. 21. The selections include OFF and 1 to 9. The
default is 4.
Note: The position of the AF control does not affect the volume of
the TX sidetone.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
22
6 BASIC COMMUNICATING
FM TRANSMISSION
FM operation on HF frequencies solves the problem of
how to have long distance voice communication with
the finest audio quality. When combined with the full-
quieting aspect of FM signals that suppress background
noise on the frequency, FM can be the best method for
maintaining regular schedules with friends.
Refer, if necessary, to “OPERATING BASICS”
beginning on page 13 for receiving details.
1 Select the operating frequency.
2 Press [FM/AM] to select FM mode.
• “FM” appears.
3 Press and hold down Mic [PTT], or press [SEND].
• “RX” disappears and “TX” appears.
• Refer to “VOX” {page 31} for information on
automatic TX/RX switching.
4 Speak into the microphone in a normal tone and
level of voice.
• Speaking too close to the microphone, or too
loudly, may increase distortion and reduce
intelligibility.
• Microphone gain can be switched between low
and high for FM using Menu No. 17. Low is
usually appropriate; however, select high if
reports from other stations indicate that your
audio is weak. The MULTI/CH control has no
effect in FM mode.
TX DEVIATION SELECTION
Select wide band or narrow band TX deviation
depending on whether the other station is using wide
band or narrow band RX deviation. This selection is
crucial to avoid audio distortion or insufficient
intelligibility that the other station will encounter.
1 Press [FM/AM] to select FM mode.
2 Press [FILTER].
• The current filter selection appears.
3 Turn the MULTI/CH control to select Wide
(“FM-WID”) or Narrow (“FM-NAR”).
4 Press [FILTER] to complete the setting.
Refer to “COMMUNICATING AIDS” beginning on
page 29 for additional information about useful functions
for operating.
AM TRANSMISSION
Each mode used on the HF Amateur bands has its own
advantages. Although long distance DX contacts may
be less common while using AM, the superior audio
quality characteristic of AM operation is one reason why
some prefer this mode.
When looking for others using AM, check the following
frequencies first:
• 3885, 7290, 14286, 21390, and 29000~29200 kHz
Refer, if necessary, to “OPERATING BASICS”
beginning on page 13 for receiving details.
1 Select the operating frequency.
2 Press [FM/AM] to select AM mode.
• “AM” appears.
3 Press [MIC] to activate the Microphone Gain Setting
function.
• The current gain level appears.
4 Press and hold down Mic [PTT], or press [SEND].
• “RX” disappears and “TX” appears.
• No transmit carrier level adjustment is necessary.
• Refer to “VOX” {page 31} for information on
automatic TX/RX switching.
5 Speak into the microphone and adjust the
MULTI/CH control so that the calibrated power meter
slightly reflects according to your voice level.
• Speak in a normal tone and level of voice.
Speaking too close to the microphone, or too
loudly, may increase distortion and reduce
intelligibility.
• You may want to use the Speech Processor.
Refer to “SPEECH PROCESSOR” {page 32} for
details.
6 Release Mic [PTT], or press [SEND] again, to return
to the receive mode.
• “TX” disappears and “RX” appears.
7 Press [MIC] to quit the Microphone Gain Setting
function.
Refer to “COMMUNICATING AIDS” beginning on
page 29 for information about additional useful functions
for operating.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
23
SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATING
SPLIT-FREQUENCY OPERATION
Usually you can communicate with other stations using
the same frequency for receiving and transmitting. In
this case, you select only one frequency on either VFO
A or VFO B. However, there are cases where you must
select one frequency for receiving and another
frequency for transmitting. To do this requires two
VFOs. This is referred to as “split-frequency operation”.
One typical case that requires this type of operation is
described below.
When a rare or desirable DX station is heard, he or she
may immediately get many responses, all at the same
time. Often such a station is lost under the noise and
confusion of many calling stations. If you find that you
are suddenly being called as that rare or desirable
station, it is your responsibility to control the situation.
You may announce that you will be “listening up 5 (kHz,
from your present transmit frequency)”, or “listening
down between 5 and 10 (kHz)”.
1 Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.
• “tA” or “tB” appears to show which VFO is
selected.
2 Select the operating frequency.
• The frequency selected here will be used for
transmitting.
3 Press [A/B] to select the other VFO.
4 Select the operating frequency.
• The frequency selected on this VFO will be used
for receiving.
5 Press [SPLIT].
• “SPLIT” appears.
• Pressing [A/B] reverses the receive frequency
and the transmit frequency.
6 Press [SPLIT] to quit split-frequency operation.
• “SPLIT” disappears.
If you access Menu No. 07 and select ON, you can
recall a memory channel to use for either receiving or
transmitting. For more information, refer to “Memory-
VFO Split Operation” {page 41} under “MEMORY
FEATURES”.
Note: If you configure split frequencies using two different bands to
perform CW operation, select Semi Break-in.
TF-SET (TRANSMIT FREQUENCY SET)
TF-SET allows you to temporarily switch your transmit
frequency and receive frequency. Canceling this
function immediately restores the original transmit and
receive frequencies. By activating TF-SET, you can
listen on your transmit frequency, and change it while
listening. This allows you to check if the newly selected
transmit frequency is free of interference.
1 Activate split-frequency operation as explained in the
previous section.
2 Press and hold [TF-SET]. While holding down
[TF-SET], change the operating frequency by
turning the Tuning control or pressing Mic
[UP]/[DWN].
• The transceiver receives on the frequency that
you select, but the frequency shown on the sub-
display stays unchanged.
3 Release [TF-SET].
• You are now receiving again on your original
receive frequency.
Successfully contacting a DX station in a pileup often
depends on making a well-timed call on a clear
frequency. The best way to know if your intended
transmit frequency is clear is to use TF-SET. Switch
your receive frequency and transmit frequency by using
TF-SET and listen. You soon will learn the rhythm of
the DX station and the pileup.
Use the information to select a relatively clear transmit
frequency and to transmit at the exact instant when the
DX station is listening but the majority of the group
aren’t transmitting. The more proficient you become at
using this function, the more DX you will contact.
Note:
x If you press [F.LOCK] before using TF-SET, pressing an
incorrect button by mistake will not change the original receive
frequency.
x TF-SET is disabled while transmitting.
x If you recalled a memory channel (excluding CH 90 to 99), you
must set Menu No. 08 to ON to use TF-SET to change the
frequency of the memory channel.
x An RIT frequency shift is not added; however, an XIT frequency
shift is added to the transmit frequency.
x TF-SET is also enabled while operating with the same TX/RX
frequency (non-split).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
24
7 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATING
FM REPEATER OPERATION
Most Amateur radio voice repeaters use a separate
receive and transmit frequency. The transmit frequency
may be higher or lower than the receive frequency. In
addition, some repeaters may require the transceiver to
transmit a subtone before the repeater can be used.
Compared to simplex communication, you can usually
transmit over much greater distances by using a
repeater. Repeaters are typically located on a mountain
top or other elevated location. Often they operate at
higher ERP (Effective Radiated Power) than a typical
station. This combination of elevation and high ERP
allows communications over considerable distances.
HF repeaters operate only in the 29 MHz FM sub-band.
This special service combines the advantages of FM
operation, good fidelity with noise and interference
immunity, with the excitement of HF DX (long distance)
communications. Even on a quiet day, 10 meter FM
provides reliable around-town communications with the
potential for sudden DX from across the country or
around the world.
<<< DISPLAY (18L) >>>
ARRL 10-METER BAND PLAN
1 Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.
• “tA” or “tB” appears to show which VFO is
selected.
2 Select the operating frequency.
• The frequency selected here will be used for
transmitting.
3 Press [FM/AM] to select FM mode.
• “FM” appears.
4 Press [A/B] to select the other VFO.
• To copy the frequency that you select in step 2 to
another VFO, press [A=B] before pressing [A/B].
5 Select the operating frequency.
• The frequency selected on this VFO will be used
for receiving.
6 Press [FM/AM] to select FM mode.
7 Press [SPLIT].
• “SPLIT” appears.
• Pressing [A/B] reverses the receive frequency
and the transmit frequency.
8 Select the subtone frequency via Menu Nos.
18 and 19.
• See “SELECTING SUBTONE FREQUENCY”
and “CONTINUOUS OR BURST SUBTONES?”
for more details on the subtone.
9 Press [AGC/TONE] to activate the Subtone function.
• “T” appears.
• To quit the Subtone function, press [AGC/TONE]
twice.
10 Press [SPLIT] to quit split-frequency operation.
• “SPLIT” disappears.
If you access Menu No. 07 and select ON, you can
recall a memory channel to use for either receiving or
transmitting. For more information, refer to “Memory-
VFO Split Operation” {page 41} under “MEMORY
FEATURES”.
The data that you select in steps 1 to 9 except for
subtone duration can be stored in memory. Refer to
“Split-Frequency Channels” {page 40}.
Note:
x When operating through a repeater, over deviation caused by
speaking too loudly into the microphone can cause your signal to
“talk-off” (break up) through the repeater.
x To check the subtone frequency stored in a memory channel,
recall the desired memory channel, and access Menu No. 18.
CW
RTTY
Packet
Beacons
Phone
(AM)
Satellite downlinks
Repeater inputs
FM simplex calling
Repeater outputs
28000~28070
28070~28150
28120~28189
28190~28300
28300~29300
(29000~29200)
29300~29510
29510~29590
29600
29610~29700
Frequency Range (kHz)
Mode/Activity
1
1
1
Repeater frequency pairs (input/output):
29520/29620, 29540/29640, 29560/29660,
29580/29680
29.520 MHz
88.5 Hz
29.520 MHz
88.5 Hz
29.620 MHz
29.620 MHz
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
25
7 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATING
SELECTING SUBTONE FREQUENCY
Some 10-meter FM repeaters require the transceiver to
transmit a subtone, to prevent other repeaters on the
same frequency from locking each other up. The
required subtone frequency depends on the repeater
you are accessing. In Europe, a 1750 Hz tone is
generally used to access repeaters.
Select the subtone frequency you require via Menu
No. 18. The default is 88.5 Hz. The available choices
are shown in the table below.
Note: Use Nos. 01 to 39 shown in the table above when selecting
subtone frequencies via Computer Control {page 51}.
CONTINUOUS OR BURST SUBTONES?
In addition to selecting the frequency of the subtone,
you must choose the correct subtone duration. The
Continuous selection continuously sends the subtone
as long as the transceiver is transmitting. The Burst
selection sends a 500 ms subtone burst each time the
transceiver begins transmitting.
Select either Continuous or Burst via Menu No. 19. The
default is Continuous except on some European
versions.
FM CTCSS OPERATION
CTCSS is the abbreviation for Continuous Tone Coded
Squelch System. CTCSS uses subaudible tone
frequencies. While you are transmitting, a subtone that
you select is superimposed on your transmit signal.
Suppose that only stations “A”, “B”, and “C” are
programmed with the same subtone frequency. When
“A” calls, the squelch on only “B” and “C” opens. So
you can choose which stations will receive your
transmissions.
1 Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.
• “tA” or “tB” appears to show which VFO is
selected.
2 Select the desired subtone frequency via Menu
No. 18.
3 Select the operating frequency.
4 Press [FM/AM] to select FM mode.
• “FM” appears.
5 Turn the SQL control to adjust squelch.
6 Repeatedly press [AGC/TONE] until “CTCSS”
appears.
• To quit CTCSS, press [AGC/TONE] again.
7 When you are called:
The squelch in your transceiver opens only when the
selected subtone is received.
When you make a call:
Press and hold Mic [PTT], or press [SEND].
• The selected subtone is superimposed on your
transmitted signal.
Note:
x When using split-frequency operation, select FM mode on both
VFOs to use CTCSS.
x While selecting 1750 Hz subtone, you cannot switch ON the
CTCSS.
x Input to the microphone is muted while transmitting a 1750 Hz
subtone.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
67.0
71.9
74.4
77.0
79.7
82.5
85.4
88.5
91.5
94.8
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
97.4
100.0
103.5
107.2
110.9
114.8
118.8
123.0
127.3
131.8
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
136.5
141.3
146.2
151.4
156.7
162.2
167.9
173.8
179.9
186.2
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
192.8
203.5
210.7
218.1
225.7
233.6
241.8
250.3
1750
Freq.
(Hz)
No. No. No. No.
Freq.
(Hz)
Freq.
(Hz)
Freq.
(Hz)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
26
7 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATING
DIGITAL OPERATION
Since Multimode Communications Processors (MCP)
have become popular, many Amateurs enjoy operating
using a number of digital modes. The power and
variety of Amateur radio increased greatly with the
development of MCP that can use your transceiver as
the communications link.
For example, it’s possible to take advantage of the
camaraderie found on RTTY, then move to Packet to
access an RBBS (Radio Bulletin Board System) to
download a recent shareware program you’ve heard
about, and then move again to AMTOR or PacTOR to
deposit mail in a regional mailbox for forwarding. After
that, you may switch to G-TOR
TM
or Clover for a
lightning fast file transfer with a friend.
RTTY (FREQUENCY SHIFT KEYING)
Radioteletype operation uses frequency shift keying
(FSK) and the 5-bit Baudot code or the 7-bit ASCII code
to transmit information.
Consult “RTTY” {page 61} under “CONNECTING
PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT” if you need installation
information.
1 Select the FSK shift via Menu No. 29.
• FSK shift is the difference in frequencies between
mark and space.
• The 170 Hz default is used on the Amateur
bands.
2 Access Menu No. 30, and select either “ON” (space)
or “OFF” (mark) to be transmitted when keying
down.
• The default is “OFF” (mark).
3 Access Menu No. 31, and select high tone (2125 Hz)
or low tone (1275 Hz) for mark.
• The high tone (default) is commonly used
nowadays.
4 Select the operating frequency.
5 Press [CW/FSK] to select FSK.
• “FSK” appears.
6 If necessary to be compatible with the station you
want to contact, press [REV] to reverse the
transceiver to the upper sideband.
• “R” appears beside “FSK”.
• Traditionally, the lower sideband is used for FSK
operation.
• Press [REV] again if you want to return to the
lower sideband.
7 Following the instructions provided with your MCP or
RTTY equipment, enter the key sequence at your
RTTY keyboard to select the transmit mode.
• “RX” disappears and “TX” appears.
• You may instead press [SEND] to manually
select the transmit mode.
8 Begin sending data from the keyboard.
• No transmit carrier or AF input level adjustment is
necessary.
• Use Menu No. 34 to select the appropriate AF
output level. The AF control cannot be used for
this adjustment.
9 When finished transmitting, enter the key sequence
from the keyboard to return to the receive mode.
• “TX” disappears and “RX” appears.
• If you pressed [SEND] in step 7, press [SEND]
again.
RTTY FREQUENCIES
IARU Region 1
(Europe/Africa)
Frequency (kHz)
U. S. A. /Canada
Frequency (kHz)
1838~1842
3580~3620
7035~7045
10140~10150
14080~14099.5
18101~18109
21080~21120
24920~24929
28050~28150
1800~1840
3605~3645
(DX: 3590)
7080~7100
(DX: 7040)
10140~10150
14070~14099.5
18100~18110
21070~21100
24920~24930
28070~28150
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
27
7 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATING
AMTOR/ PACKET/ PACTOR/ G-TOR
TM
/ CLOVER
Due to their error-handling capability and speed of
transmission, these modes are more efficient than
earlier forms of digital communication by machine. In
the case of G-TOR
TM
, it was developed specifically to
handle the adverse conditions of communicating across
the solar system with spacecraft during their missions.
On most HF bands, audio frequency shift keying
(AFSK) is used. This method of modulation uses audio
tones therefore either the LSB or USB mode should be
selected. Traditionally, LSB is used similar to RTTY with
the exception of AMTOR which is normally operated
using USB.
In some countries, the licensing authorities permit F2
operation on some frequencies in the 10 meter band.
For this type of operation, select the FM mode.
Consult “MCP AND TNC” {page 62} under
“CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT” if you
need installation information.
Note:
x For digital operation using the SSB or FM mode, switch the
Speech Processor OFF. When using the SSB mode, also select
a fast AGC setting.
x When selecting one of the filters (not OFF) in Menu No. 32, do
not activate the RX Equalizer via Menu No. 50; the default for
Menu No. 50 is OFF.
x Set Menu No. 32 to OFF for voice operation since the filters
available are too narrow for voice.
1 Select the appropriate filter bandwidth via Menu
No. 32.
• The default is OFF.
2 Select the operating frequency.
3 Press [LSB/USB] to select LSB or USB.
• For F2 operation, select FM by pressing
[FM/AM].
• If you selected one of the filters in step 1 (not
OFF), “FSK” appears with “LSB”, “USB”, or “FM”.
4 Following the instructions provided with your TNC or
MCP, enter the calibrate mode so you can generate
a mark condition.
• “RX” disappears and “TX” appears.
5 Use Menu No. 33 to select the appropriate AF input
level.
• Select a low input level so long as the ALC meter
reflects.
6 Exit the calibrate mode.
• “TX” disappears and “RX” appears.
7 Use Menu No. 34 to select the appropriate AF output
level.
• The AF control cannot be used for this
adjustment.
8 Send commands and data.
• The transceiver will briefly transmit each time it
sends your commands and data, or when it
acknowledges transmissions from other stations.
The data rates and types of modulation used for HF
Packet operation are shown below.
Note: In some countries, F2 modulation at 1200 bps may be used
on the 10-meter band. Consult your national Amateur radio
organization to obtain band plans that specify where in each band
various modes are used.
PACKET FREQUENCIES
AMTOR activity can be found on or near 14075 and
3637.5 kHz. These would also be good starting places
when searching for PacTOR, G-TOR
TM
, or Clover
stations.
AMTOR
Packet
PacTOR
G-TOR
Clover
AMateur Teleprinting Over Radio
Packetized data used per AX.25 protocol
Packet Teleprinting Over Radio
Golay-coded Teleprinting Over Radio
Characteristic shape of an accurately
tuned signal as viewed on a monitor.
Meaning
Mode
TM
Mode
USB & LSB
USB & LSB
FM
300 bps
(AFSK)
1200 bps
(PSK)
1200 bps
(AFSK)
F1
F1
F2
Data Rate Modulation Type
1800~1830
3620~3635
7080~7100
10140~10150
14095~14099.5
18105~18110
21090~21100

28120~28189
50600~50780

3590~3600
Digital band
Digital band
14089~14099, 14101~14112
Digital band
21100~21120
Digital band
28120~28150, 29200~29300

U. S. A. /Canada
Frequency (kHz)
IARU Region 1
(Europe/Africa)
Frequency (kHz)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
28
7 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATING
SLOW SCAN TV/ FACSIMILE
SSTV is now increasing in popularity as a result of the
capability of computers. Using this technique, you can
transmit and receive still monochrome or full-color
images. Instead of trying to describe your station, just
showing it is much faster. To do this, you require a scan
converter to translate your video images into audio
signals that can be fed into your transceiver. Or, to
begin more simply, you can use only your computer with
readily available software to perform this task. A TV set
and a video camera that you may already own will also
be useful tools.
SSTV FREQUENCIES
The high resolution that is possible using facsimile (fax)
can allow you to exchange more detailed graphics than
SSTV allows. Due to the longer transmission times
required for fax, it’s best to use this mode when band
conditions are stable with strong signals.
Popular fax frequencies include the following:
• 7245, 14245, 21345 (Intern. Net), 28945 kHz
Operation on SSTV or fax mainly involves learning the
functionality of your computer application or accessory
hardware that supports these modes. Consult the
documentation that comes with your software or
accessory equipment.
Note: When operating either SSTV or fax, use a fast AGC setting
and switch OFF your Speech Processor for best results.
IARU Region 1
(Europe/Africa)
Frequency (kHz)
U. S. A. /Canada
Frequency (kHz)
3730~3740
7035~7045
14225~14235
21335~21345
28675~28685
3845
7171
14230
21340
28680
SATELLITE OPERATION
Though not as common as VHF/UHF satellite operation,
HF satellite operation is possible depending on which
satellites are currently in orbit around the Earth. When
HF propagation is poor, satellite operation can provide
an incentive to get back on the air. Since this
communications mode is so reliable, you may discover
you actually prefer satellite operation over the hunt-and-
miss method of communicating via the ionosphere.
An example of a Mode K satellite that uses uplink and
downlink HF frequencies is the Radio Sputnik 12
(RS-12). Launched in the early 1990s, this satellite is in
a low Earth orbit and provides brief windows of
opportunity for use as it passes quickly over your
location. The satellite accepts SSB or CW signals on
the 15 meter band and outputs them on 10 meters.
This transceiver can also be used with Mode A
satellites, if you have an SSB/CW VHF transceiver.
Mode A satellites use a VHF uplink and an HF downlink.
If you’re interested in pursuing satellite operation,
contact AMSAT (Radio Amateur Satellite Corporation)
directly or via their internet Home page. This group of
satellite operators, located all over the world, support
the construction and operation of satellites. AMSAT can
provide you with the latest information regarding Mode
K and Mode A satellites that are currently in orbit.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
29
COMMUNICATING AIDS
RECEIVING
SELECTING YOUR FREQUENCY
In addition to turning the Tuning control or pressing Mic
[UP]/[DWN], there are several other ways to select your
frequency. This section describes additional methods of
frequency selection that may save you effort and time.
s Direct Frequency Entry
When the desired frequency is far removed from the
current frequency, directly entering a frequency from
the numeric keypad can be the fastest method.
1 Press [ENT].
• “- - . - - - . - -” appears.
2 Press numeric buttons [0] to [9] to enter the
frequency you desire.
• Pressing [ENT] fills the remaining un-entered
digits with 0 and completes entry.
• To select 1.85 MHz for example, press [0] for
the 10 MHz digit (first digit), because you can
also select 18.5 MHz on this transceiver.
• Pressing [CLR] cancels entry and restores
the previous frequency.
Note:
x Some digits cannot be entered for the 10 MHz digit (first
digit). Pressing one of those digits will cause that digit to be
entered in the 1 MHz position.
x When the 10 Hz digit (last digit) is entered, the digit 0 is
entered automatically for the 1 Hz digit, and frequency entry
is completed. The 1 Hz digit is not displayed.
x Attempting to enter a frequency that is outside the selectable
frequency range causes an alarm to be generated. The
entered frequency is rejected.
x When an entered frequency is accepted, RIT and XIT are
switched OFF, but the RIT or XIT frequency is not changed.
x After recalling memory channels 90 to 99 that have Start and
End frequencies stored, the receive frequency can be
changed by using Direct Frequency Entry within the
programmed range.
s Using 1 MHz Steps
Pressing [UP]/[DOWN] on the front panel changes
Amateur bands. You can also use [UP]/[DOWN] to
change operating frequencies in steps of 1 MHz.
1 Press [1MHz].
• “1MHz” appears.
2 Press [UP] or [DOWN].
• Holding down either button causes the
function to repeat.
3 To restore the original function, press [1MHz]
again.
• “1MHz” disappears.
If you prefer 100 kHz or 500 kHz steps instead of
1 MHz, use Menu No. 02. The default is 1 MHz.
s Quick Changes
To move up or down in frequency quickly, use the
MULTI/CH control. Turning this control changes the
operating frequency in 10 kHz steps.
• If you want to change the frequency step size,
use Menu Nos. 03 and 04. Select 1 kHz, 5 kHz,
10 kHz, 12.5 kHz, 20 kHz, or 25 kHz for FM, and
select 1 kHz, 5 kHz, or 10 kHz for the other
modes. The default for both Menu numbers is
10 kHz.
• When changing the operating frequency by using
the MULTI/CH control, frequencies are rounded
such that new frequencies are multiples of the
frequency step size. To cancel this function,
access Menu No. 05 and select OFF.
• Within the AM broadcast band, the step size
automatically defaults to 9 kHz (U.S.A./Canada
versions: 10 kHz) for AM mode. This step size
can be switched between 9 kHz and 10 kHz via
Menu No. 06.
s Fine Tuning
Usually, turning the Tuning control changes the
frequency in steps of 10 Hz for SSB, CW, and FSK
modes, and 100 Hz for FM and AM modes.
However, you can also change the step size to 1 Hz
for SSB, CW, and FSK modes, and to 10 Hz for FM
and AM modes.
1 Press [FINE].
• “FINE” appears.
2 Turn the Tuning control to select the exact
frequency.
3 To cancel the function, press [FINE] again.
• “FINE” disappears.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
30
8 COMMUNICATING AIDS
s Equalizing VFO Frequencies (A=B)
This function allows you to copy the frequency and
modulation mode of the active VFO to the inactive
VFO.
1 Select the frequency and mode on VFO A or
VFO B.
2 Press [A=B].
• The frequency and mode selected in step 1 are
copied to the inactive VFO.
3 Press [A/B] if you want to confirm that the
frequency was copied.
RIT (RECEIVE INCREMENTAL TUNING)
RIT provides the ability to change your receive frequency
by ±9.99 kHz in steps of 10 Hz without changing your
transmit frequency. If the Fine Tuning ([FINE]) function is
ON, the step size is 1 Hz. RIT works equally well with all
modulation modes and while using VFO mode or
Memory Recall mode.
1 Press [RIT].
• “RIT” and the RIT offset appear.
2 If required, press [CLEAR] to reset the RIT offset to 0.
3 Turn the RIT/XIT control to change your receive
frequency.
4 To cancel RIT, press [RIT].
• The receive frequency is returned to the frequency
that was selected prior to step 1.
Note:
x When using Memory Recall, RIT only functions with a memory that
contains stored data.
x The frequency shift set by the RIT/XIT control is also used by the
XIT function. Therefore, changing or clearing the RIT offset also
affects the XIT offset.
AGC (AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL)
When using modes other than FM, AGC selects the time
constant for the automatic gain control circuit.
Selecting a slow time constant will cause the receiver
gain and S-meter readings to react slowly to large input
changes. A fast time constant causes the receiver gain
and the S-meter to react quickly to changes in the input
signal. A fast AGC setting is particularly useful in the
following situations:
• Tuning rapidly
• Receiving weak signals
• Receiving high-speed CW
The default time constant is slow for SSB, fast for CW,
fast for FSK, and slow for AM.
1 Assume that USB is currently selected.
2 Press [AGC/TONE].
• “FAST” appears and shows that a fast time
constant is selected.
3 To select a slow time constant, press [AGC/TONE]
again.
RX EQUALIZER
RX Equalizer changes the receive frequency
characteristics so that you can listen to received signals
with the most comfort. Use Menu No. 50 to select from
five different receive profiles including the default flat
response. Selecting any of the following items from the
Menu causes “ ” to appear beside the Menu No.
• High boost (Hb):
Emphasizes higher audio frequencies; effective for a
bassy voice.
• Formant pass (FP):
Improves clarity by suppressing audio frequencies
outside the normal voice frequency range.
• Bass boost (bb):
Emphasizes lower audio frequencies; effective for a
voice with more high frequency components.
• Conventional (c):
Emphasizes by 3 dB frequencies at 600 Hz and
higher.
Note:
x “U” selectable in Menu No. 50 is not currently available. The
menu includes this selection because of a possible future
enhancement.
x The figure above is given for your better comprehension. The
actual profiles will be affected by factors such as the receive IF
filters.
0.7 2.2
Amplitude
Audio
frequency
(kHz)
Bass boost
High boost
Off
Conventional
Formant pass
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
31
8 COMMUNICATING AIDS
TRANSMITTING
VOX (VOICE-OPERATED TRANSMIT)
VOX eliminates the necessity of manually switching to
the transmit mode each time you want to transmit. The
transceiver automatically switches to transmit when the
VOX circuitry senses that you have begun speaking into
the microphone.
When using VOX, develop the habit of pausing between
thoughts to let the transceiver drop back to receive
briefly. You will then hear if anybody wants to interrupt,
plus you will have a short period to gather your thoughts
before speaking again. Your listener will appreciate
your consideration as well as respect your more
articulate conversation.
VOX can be switched ON and OFF independently for
CW and the other modes excluding FSK.
Press [VOX] to toggle VOX between ON and OFF.
• “VOX” appears when the function is ON.
s Microphone Input Level
To enjoy the VOX function, take time to set the gain
of the VOX circuit to the correct level. This level
controls the capability of the VOX circuit to detect the
presence or absence of your voice. When using CW
mode, this level cannot be adjusted.
1 Select SSB, FM, or AM mode.
2 Switch the VOX function ON.
3 Access Menu No. 16.
4 While speaking into your microphone using your
normal level of voice, select different settings
(default is 4) until the transceiver reliably switches
to transmit each time you speak.
• The selectable range is 0 to 9.
• The final selection should not allow
background noises near your operating
position to falsely switch the transceiver from
receive to transmit.
Note: Menu No. 16 is configurable even if VOX is OFF or while
you are transmitting.
s Delay Time
If the transceiver immediately returns to receive too
quickly after you stop speaking, your final word may
not be transmitted. To avoid this, select the
appropriate delay time that allows all of your words
to be transmitted without an overly long delay after
you stop speaking.
1 Select SSB, FM, or AM mode.
2 Switch the VOX function ON.
3 Press [DELAY].
• The current setting appears. The default is 50.
4 While speaking into your microphone using your
normal level of voice, adjust the MULTI/CH
control such that the transceiver switches to
receive a brief time after you stop talking.
• The selectable range is 5 to 100 (150 ms to
3000 ms) in steps of 5, and OFF.
5 Press [DELAY] again.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
32
8 COMMUNICATING AIDS
XIT (TRANSMIT INCREMENTAL TUNING)
Similar to RIT, XIT provides the ability to change your
transmit frequency by ±9.99 kHz in steps of 10 Hz
without changing your receive frequency. If the Fine
Tuning ([FINE]) function is ON, the step size is 1 Hz.
1 Press [XIT].
• “XIT” and the XIT offset appear.
2 If required, press [CLEAR] to reset the XIT offset
to 0.
3 Turn the RIT/XIT control to change your transmit
frequency.
4 To cancel XIT, press [XIT].
• The transmit frequency is returned to the
frequency that was selected prior to step 1.
Note: The frequency shift set by the RIT/XIT control is also used by
the RIT function. Therefore, changing or clearing the XIT offset also
affects the RIT offset.
SPEECH PROCESSOR
The Speech Processor levels large fluctuations in your
voice while you speak. When using SSB, FM, or AM
mode, this leveling action effectively raises the average
transmit output power, resulting in a more
understandable signal. The amount of voice
compression is fully adjustable. You will notice that
using the Speech Processor makes it easier to be heard
by distant stations.
1 Select SSB, FM, or AM mode.
2 Press [PROC] to switch the Speech Processor ON.
• “PROC” appears. The SWR meter disappears,
and the COMP meter appears.
3 Access Menu No. 15 and select the desired level of
compression.
• Selectable range is 0 dB to 25 dB in steps of 5
dB. The recommended selection and default is
10 dB.
• Using higher compression will not improve your
signal clarity or apparent signal strength.
Excessively compressed signals are more
difficult to understand due to distortion and are
less pleasant to hear than signals with less
compression.
4 To switch the Speech Processor OFF, press [PROC]
again.
• “PROC” disappears. The COMP meter
disappears, and the SWR meter appears.
Transmit power
Transmit power
Time
Time
Speech
Processor
OFF
Speech
Processor
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
33
8 COMMUNICATING AIDS
MONITORING TRANSMITTED SIGNALS
While operating in the SSB, FM, or AM mode,
monitoring your transmitted signals is a good method for
judging intelligibility by other stations. You may use this
function, for example, while selecting an optimum TX
equalizer profile.
Use Menu No. 47 to select 1 to 9. The larger the
number, the greater the monitor volume. The default is
OFF.
Note:
x When the monitor volume is high or the Speech Processor is ON,
speaker output audio may be picked up by your microphone,
resulting in a howling phenomenon. Use headphones if this
happens.
x Audio picked up before the modulation is output from the
speaker. So the quality of this audio slightly differs from the
quality of audio which other stations will hear.
x This function is not available in the CW or FSK mode.
x The position of the AF control does not affect the monitor volume.
TRANSMIT INHIBIT
Transmit Inhibit prevents the transceiver from being
placed in the transmit mode. No signals can be
transmitted if this function is ON.
• TX Inhibit OFF: Transmissions are possible.
• TX Inhibit ON: Transmissions are not possible.
Switch the function ON or OFF via Menu No. 38. The
default is OFF.
CHANGING FREQUENCY WHILE TRANSMITTING
Moving your frequency while transmitting is usually an
unwise practice due to the risk of interference to other
stations. However, if necessary, by using the Tuning
control you can change the operating frequency while
transmitting. You also can change the XIT offset
frequency in the transmit mode.
While transmitting, if you select a frequency outside the
transmit frequency range, the transceiver is
automatically forced to receive mode. If you selected
transmit mode by pressing [SEND], transmission will
not resume until you select a frequency inside the
transmit frequency range, and you press [SEND] again.
CUSTOMIZING TRANSMIT SIGNAL
CHARACTERISTICS
The quality of your transmitted signal is important
regardless of which on-the-air activity you pursue.
However, it’s easy to be casual and overlook this fact
since you don’t listen to your own signal. The following
sub-sections provide information that will help you tailor
your transmitted signal.
s Changing Transmit Bandwidth (SSB/AM)
Use Menu No. 13 to change the transmit bandwidth
between 2.4 kHz (normal) and 2.0 kHz (narrow).
The default is 2.4 kHz.
s Equalizing Transmit Audio (SSB/FM/AM)
Use Menu No. 14 to change the transmit frequency
characteristics of your signal. You can select from
five different transmit profiles including the default flat
response . Selecting any of the following items from
the Menu causes “TX EQ.” to appear on the display.
• High boost (Hb):
Emphasizes higher audio frequencies; effective
for a bassy voice.
• Formant pass (FP):
Improves clarity by suppressing audio
frequencies outside the normal voice frequency
range.
• Bass boost (bb):
Emphasizes lower audio frequencies; effective
for a voice with more high frequency
components.
• Conventional (c):
Emphasizes by 3 dB frequencies at 600 Hz and
higher.
Note:
x “U” selectable in Menu No. 14 is not currently available. The
menu includes this selection because of a possible future
enhancement.
x The figure above is given for your better comprehension. The
actual profiles will be affected by factors such as the transmit IF
filters.
0.7 2.2
Amplitude
Audio
frequency
(kHz)
Bass boost
High boost
Off
Conventional
Formant pass
2.4 kHz (Normal)
2.0 kHz (Narrow)
300 Hz
500 Hz
2.7 kHz
2.5 kHz
Higher Cut-off
Frequency
Bandwidth
Lower Cut-off
Frequency
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
34
8 COMMUNICATING AIDS
CW BREAK-IN
Break-in allows you to transmit CW without manually
switching between transmit and receive modes. Two
types of Break-in are available, Semi Break-in and Full
Break-in.
Semi Break-in:
When the key contacts open, the transceiver
automatically waits for the passage of the time period
that you have selected. The transceiver then returns to
the receive mode.
Full Break-in:
As soon as the key contacts open, the transceiver
returns to the receive mode.
USING SEMI BREAK-IN OR FULL BREAK-IN
1 Press [CW/FSK] to select CW mode.
• “CW” appears.
2 Press [VOX].
• “VOX” appears.
3 Press [DELAY].
• The current setting (Full or delay time) appears.
The default is Full (“FBk”).
4 Turn the MULTI/CH control to select Full Break-in or
a delay time for Semi Break-in.
• Available delay times are from 5 to 100 (50 ms to
1000 ms) in steps of 5.
5 Begin sending.
• The transceiver automatically switches to the
transmit mode.
• When Full is selected: The transceiver
immediately switches to the receive mode when
the key opens.
• When a delay time is selected: The transceiver
switches to the receive mode after the delay time
that you have selected has passed.
6 Press [DELAY] again.
Note: Full Break-in cannot be used with the TL-922/922A amplifier.
ELECTRONIC KEYER
This transceiver has a built-in electronic keyer that can
be used by connecting a keyer paddle to the
transceiver’s rear panel. Consult “Keys and Keyboards
for CW Operation” {page 3} for details regarding this
connection. This built-in keyer supports lambic
operation.
CHANGING KEYING SPEED
The keying speed of the electronic keyer is fully
adjustable. Selecting the appropriate speed is
important in order to send error-free CW that other
operators can copy solidly. Selecting a speed that is
beyond your keying ability will only result in mistakes. If
you select a speed that is close to the speed used by
the other station, you will obtain the best results.
1 Press [CW/FSK] to select CW mode.
• “CW” appears.
2 Press [KEY].
• The current keying speed appears. The default
is 20.
3 While keying the paddle and listening to the transmit
sidetone, turn the MULTI/CH control to select the
appropriate speed.
• The selectable range is 0 to 100 in steps of 2.
The larger the number, the faster the speed.
4 Press [KEY] again to complete the setting.
Note: When using the semi-automatic “Bug” function, the selected
speed applies only to the rate that dots are sent.
AUTO WEIGHTING
The electronic keyer can automatically change the dot/
dash weighting. Weighting is the ratio of dash length to
dot length. The weighting changes with your keying
speed thus making your keying easier for other
operators to copy.
Use Menu No. 26 to switch Auto Weighting ON or OFF.
The default is ON. When Auto Weighting is OFF, the
weighting is locked at 3:1.
s Reversible Auto Weighting
Auto Weighting increases the weighting as you
increase your keying speed. However, the electronic
keyer also can decrease the weighting as you
increase your keying speed.
To switch this function ON, access Menu No. 27, and
select ON. The default is OFF.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
35
8 COMMUNICATING AIDS
CHANGING LOCKED-WEIGHT
Switching Auto Weighting OFF locks the dash/dot
weighting to 3:1. It is also possible to change this default
locked-weight. Use Menu No. 49 to select from
16 ratios, in the range from 2.5:1 to 4.0:1. “2.7”, visible
while making selections, for example, designates 2.7:1.
Note: When the Auto Weighting or Bug Key function is ON, the
selection made in Menu No. 49 is invalid.
BUG KEY FUNCTION
The built-in electronic keyer also can be used as a semi-
automatic key. Semi-automatic keys are also known as
“Bugs”. When this function is ON, dots are generated in
the normal manner by the electronic keyer. Dashes,
however, are manually generated by the operator by
holding the keyer paddle closed for the appropriate
length of time for each dash.
To switch this function ON, access Menu No. 22, and
select ON. The default is OFF.
Note: When the Bug Key function is ON, CW Message Memory (see
below) cannot be used.
CW MESSAGE MEMORY
This transceiver has three memory channels for storing
CW messages. Each memory channel can store
approximately 50 characters. These memory channels
are ideal for storing contest exchanges that you want to
send repeatedly. Stored messages can be played back
to check message content or for transmitting.
The electronic keyer has a function that allows you to
interrupt playback and manually inject your own keying.
To switch this function ON, access Menu No. 28, and
select ON. The default is OFF.
The electronic keyer also can repeatedly play back the
message that you stored. To switch this function ON,
access Menu No. 23 and select ON. The default is OFF.
For repetitive message playback, you can change the
interval between each series of messages. Use Menu
No. 24, and select the time in the range of 0 to 60
seconds.
Note:
x This function cannot be used when the Bug Key function is ON.
x Operating the keyer paddle with Menu No. 28 OFF cancels
message playback. Even If message playback does not stop
because of your keying start timing, you can cancel playback by
pressing [CLR].
s Storing CW Messages
1 Press [CW/FSK] to select CW mode.
• “CW” appears.
2 If “VOX” is visible, press [VOX].
• “VOX” disappears.
3 Press [REC].
4 Press [CH 1], [CH 2], or [CH 3] to select a
memory channel.
5 Begin sending using the keyer paddle.
• The message you send is stored in memory.
6 To complete the message storage, press [REC]
or [CLR].
• When the memory becomes full, recording
automatically stops.
Note: While not operating the keyer paddle after pressing a
memory channel button, a pause is stored in the channel.
s Checking CW Messages without Transmitting
1 Press [CW/FSK] to select CW mode.
• “CW” appears.
2 If “VOX” is visible, press [VOX].
• “VOX” disappears.
3 Press [CH 1], [CH 2], or [CH 3] to select the
channel that has the desired message stored.
• The message plays.
• To play back the messages stored in the other
channels in sequence, press the
corresponding channel buttons during
playback. Up to three channels can be
queued at the same time.
• To interrupt playback, press [CLR].
s Transmitting CW Messages
Messages can be transmitted using Semi Break-in/
Full Break-in or manual TX/RX switching.
1 Press [CW/FSK] to select CW mode.
• “CW” appears.
2 To use Semi Break-in/Full Break-in, press [VOX];
otherwise, press [SEND].
3 Press [CH 1], [CH 2], or [CH 3] to select the
channel that stores the desired message.
• The message is transmitted.
• To transmit the messages stored in the other
channels in sequence, press the
corresponding channel buttons during
playback. Up to three channels can be
queued at the same time.
• To interrupt transmission, press [CLR].
4 If [SEND] was pressed in step 2, press [SEND]
again to return to receive mode.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
36
IF FILTER
The IF filters are designed for selecting the exact range
of intermediate frequencies that are sent to the next
stage in the receive circuit. Interference adjacent to the
desired signal can be reduced by selecting a narrow
bandwidth filter and/or shifting the center frequency of
the filter.
To more effectively remove interference, use the IF
filters with the DSP filters described on pages 37
and 38.
CHANGING IF FILTER BANDWIDTH
When adjacent frequency interference is present at both
sides of the desired signal, a narrow IF filter bandwidth
may be the best way to remove the interference.
Changing the filter bandwidth will not effect the current
receive frequency.
To use a narrow filter in SSB, CW, or FSK mode, install
the appropriate optional filter {page 58}, and select the
appropriate setting in Menu No. 46.
When in CW or FSK mode, the wide filter or the narrow
filter is automatically selected, depending on the
bandwidth of the DSP filter that you select. Refer to
“CHANGING RECEIVE BANDWIDTH” {page 37}. The
default in SSB or AM mode is wide bandwidth. In FM
mode, you cannot change the filter bandwidth.
Note: When you use Menu B, make sure to select the appropriate
filter bandwidth via Menu No. 46 in Menu B.
1 Select SSB or AM mode.
2 Press [FILTER].
• The current filter selection appears.
3 Turn the MULTI/CH control to select Wide
(“FIL-WID”) or Narrow (“FIL-NAR”).
4 Press [FILTER] to complete the setting.
REJECTING INTERFERENCE
IF SHIFT
For SSB, CW, or FSK mode, shifting the center
frequency of the filter pass band is an additional method
of fighting adjacent frequency interference. Shifting this
center frequency does not change the current receive
frequency.
To remove interference that is higher in frequency than
the desired signal, turn the IF SHIFT control
counterclockwise. To remove interference that is lower
in frequency than the desired signal, turn the IF SHIFT
control clockwise.
NOISE BLANKER
Noise Blanker was designed to reduce pulse noise such
as that generated by automobile ignitions. Noise
Blanker does not function in FM mode.
Press [NB] to toggle Noise Blanker ON or OFF.
• “NB” appears when the function is ON.
Interfering
signal
Desired
signal
Interfering
signal
Desired
signal
Interfering
signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
37
9 REJECTING INTERFERENCE
ATTENUATOR
Attenuator reduces the level of received signals. This
function is useful when interference from adjacent
frequencies is strong.
Press [ATT] to toggle Attenuator ON or OFF.
• “ATT” appears when the function is ON.
The ON/OFF setting will automatically be stored in the
current band. Each time you select the same band, the
same setting will automatically be selected.
The frequency range of each band is shown below.
PREAMPLIFIER
Switching Preamplifier OFF also may help to reduce
interference from adjacent frequencies.
Press [PRE-AMP] to toggle ON or OFF.
• “PRE-AMP” appears when the function is ON.
The ON/OFF setting will automatically be stored in the
current band. Each time you select the same band, the
same setting will automatically be selected.
The frequency range of each band is the same as for
the Attenuator. The default of Preamplifier is OFF for
the bands from 30 kHz to 7.5 MHz, and ON for the
bands from 7.5 MHz to 60.0 MHz (TS-570D: 30.0 MHz).
Note: Switching Preamplifier OFF has the same effect as activating
the AIP function on other KENWOOD transceivers.
DSP TOOLS
KENWOOD digital signal processing (DSP) technology
is used for the functions described in this section.
CHANGING RECEIVE BANDWIDTH
For improving the interference reduction capability, this
transceiver also provides audio frequency (AF) filters
designed using DSP technology. When in SSB, FM, or
AM mode, you can change the filter bandwidth by
altering its low cut-off frequency and/or high cut-off
frequency. For CW and FSK modes, you can change
the filter bandwidth by directly specifying a bandwidth.
Changing the filter bandwidth does not affect the current
receive frequency.
You can also monitor signals trimmed off by the above
DSP filters. Consult “PROGRAM FUNCTION
BUTTON” {page 49} and assign the DSP Filter Monitor
function (No. 53) to any [PF] button. Press and hold the
[PF] button to monitor the trimmed signals; the DSP
filters will restore the default bandwidths. Release the
button to quit the function. You may use this function to
check how adjacent frequencies are in use.
s SSB/ FM/ AM Modes
1 Select SSB, FM, or AM mode.
2 Turn the DSP SLOPE (LOW) control clockwise to
raise the low cut-off frequency, or
counterclockwise to lower the low cut-off
frequency.
Turn the DSP SLOPE (HIGH) control clockwise
to raise the high cut-off frequency, or
counterclockwise to lower the high cut-off
frequency.
The default cut-off frequencies depend on the
current positions of the DSP SLOPE controls.
14.50 ~ 18.50
18.50 ~ 21.50
21.50 ~ 25.50
25.50 ~ 30.00
30.00 ~ 60.00 (TS-570S)
0.03 ~ 2.50
2.50 ~ 4.10
4.10 ~ 7.50
7.50 ~ 10.50
10.50 ~ 14.50
Frequency range (MHz)
Frequency range (MHz)
f
f
USB pass band
USB pass band
f
f
USB pass band
USB pass band
DSP SLOPE
(LOW) control
DSP SLOPE
(HIGH) control
Frequency Selections Adjust
10, 50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350,
400, 450, 500, 550, 600, 650, 700,
750, 800, 850, 900, 950, 1000 Hz
1.0, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7,
1.8, 2.0, 2.2, 2.4, 2.6, 2.8, 3.0, 3.2,
3.4, 3.6, 4.0, 4.4, 5.0 kHz
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
38
9 REJECTING INTERFERENCE
Press [B.C.] to toggle Beat Cancel ON or OFF.
• “BEAT CANCEL” appears when the function is ON.
Note: While receiving intermittent CW signals, the transceiver
sounds clicks. This does not indicate a malfunction.
If attenuation is not satisfactory, press [B.C.] for
1 second or longer to enhance the attenuation effect; a
beep sounds, but no change occurs on the display.
Pressing [B.C.] for 1 second or longer again restores
the original attenuation level.
Note:
x The Enhanced Beat Cancel setting is cleared when the power to
the transceiver is turned OFF.
x Enhanced Beat Cancel may adversely affect desired signals
slightly because of its stronger effect.
NOISE REDUCTION
This transceiver provides two types of Noise Reduction
functions, 1 and 2, for reducing random noise which
interferes with the desired signal. Just trying them both
is the easiest way to judge which function works more
effectively under the current condition. Normally select
Noise Reduction 1 in SSB mode and select Noise
Reduction 2 in CW mode.
Note: Using Noise Reduction 2 in SSB mode may lower the clarity
of signals or induce pulse noise depending on conditions.
Press [N.R.] to toggle between Noise Reduction 1,
Noise Reduction 2, and OFF.
• “N. R. 1” or “N.R. 2” appears depending on which
function is selected.
Note: A different selection can be made between two groups of
modes; one group includes SSB, FM, and AM, and the other group
includes CW and FSK. So you need not change the selection each
time you switch modes between the two groups.
s Changing NR1 Performance
Use Menu No. 51 to change the effect of Noise
Reduction 1. Switch Noise Reduction 1 ON, then
select level 1 to 9 in this menu while receiving
signals. The default is “Auto”; this selection provides
an optimum effect according to the strength of the
received signal.
Note:
x Using a high NR1 level and Beat Cancel simultaneously may
cause noise to stand out; this does not indicate a malfunction.
x When changing the NR1 level in the menu, you will hear
sound momentarily caused by an internal operation change;
this does not indicate a malfunction.
s Setting NR2 Time Constant
You can change the correlation time for Noise
Reduction 2. When in SSB, select the correlation
time that allows you to hear signals with more clarity.
When receiving CW, it is best to select the longest
correlation time that allows reliable reception. The
longer the correlation time, the better S/N.
Access Menu No. 12 and select 7.5 ms or 20 ms.
The default is 20 ms.
s CW/ FSK Modes
1 Select CW or FSK mode.
2 Press [FILTER].
• The current filter selection appears.
3 Turn the MULTI/CH control clockwise to widen
the bandwidth, or counterclockwise to narrow the
bandwidth.
4 Press [FILTER] to complete the setting.
Depending on which bandwidth you select for the
DSP filter and which type of optional filter you install,
the wide IF filter or the narrow IF filter will
automatically be selected.
BEAT CANCEL
Beat Cancel uses an adaptive filter and attenuates more
than one cyclic interference within the receive pass
band. The adaptive filter changes its characteristics
according to the nature of the signal being received at a
given moment. You can use Beat Cancel when in SSB,
FM, or AM mode.
Interfering
tones
Receive pass band
Desired
signal
Before
After
Interfering
signal
Desired
signal
Interfering
signal
e d o M ) z H ( s n o i t c e l e S h t d i w d n a B
t l u a f e D
) z H (
W C
, 0 0 3 , 0 0 2 , 0 5 1 , 0 0 1 , 0 8 , 0 5
k 0 . 2 , k 0 . 1 , 0 0 6 , 0 0 5 , 0 0 4
0 0 6
K S F k 5 . 1 , k 0 . 1 , 0 0 5 , 0 5 2 k 5 . 1
l a n o i t p O
r e t l i F
e d o M h t d i w d n a B r e t l i F P S D
r e t l i F F I
h t d i w d n a B
1 - N S 8 8 - K Y
B S S
) z H k 8 . 1 (
W C
z H k 0 . 2 e d i W
r e w o l r o z H k 0 . 1 w o r r a N
K S F
z H k 5 . 1 e d i W
, z H 0 0 5 , z H 0 5 2
z H k 0 . 1
w o r r a N
1 - C 8 8 - K Y
W C
) z H 0 0 5 (
W C
z H k 0 . 2 , z H k 0 . 1 e d i W
r e w o l r o z H 0 0 6 w o r r a N
K S F
z H k 5 . 1 , z H k 0 . 1 e d i W
z H 0 0 5 , z H 0 5 2 w o r r a N
1 - N C 8 8 - K Y
W C
) z H 0 7 2 (
W C
r e h g i h r o z H 0 0 3 e d i W
, z H 0 0 1 , z H 0 5
z H 0 0 2
w o r r a N
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
39
MEMORY FEATURES
MICROPROCESSOR MEMORY BACKUP
This transceiver uses a lithium battery to retain the user-
specified memory items. Switching OFF the power will
not erase the Menu setups or memory channels. The
lithium battery life is approximately 5 years.
If you find the transceiver powers-up with default
settings, and VFO and memory channel data is lost,
have the lithium battery replaced. Contact an authorized
KENWOOD service facility or dealer.
CONVENTIONAL MEMORY
Conventional memory is used for storing data that you
want to recall many times in the future. For example,
you may store the frequency where you regularly meet
your club members.
This transceiver provides 100 Conventional memory
channels, in total, numbered 00 to 99. Channels 90 to
99 are designed for programming VFO tuning ranges
and scan ranges. The data that you can store is listed
below:
STORING DATA IN MEMORY
There are 2 methods for storing transmit/receive
frequencies and associated data in memory channels
00 to 89. Use either method depending on the
relationship of the receive and transmit frequencies that
you store:
• Simplex channels:
RX frequency = TX frequency
• Split-frequency channels:
RX frequency ≠ TX frequency
Memory channels 90 to 99 can also be used as simplex
channels.
Note: When RIT or XIT is ON, the frequency that includes the RIT
or XIT offset will be stored.
s Simplex Channels
1 Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.
• “t A” or “t B” appears to show which VFO is
selected.
2 Select the frequency, mode, etc. to be stored.
3 Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.
• To exit Memory Scroll mode and abort the
storage process, press [CLR].
4 Turn the MULTI/CH control, or press Mic [UP] or
[DWN] to select a memory channel.
• Entering a 2-digit number such as 05 using
the numeric keys can also be used to select a
channel.
5 Press [M.IN] again to store the data.
• The previous data stored in the channel is
overwritten.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Parameter
Channel
90 ~ 99
Channel
00 ~ 89
RX frequency
TX frequency
Mode for RX
Mode for TX
Start/end frequencies
Subtone frequency
Tone ON/OFF
CTCSS ON/OFF
Memory Channel Lockout
ON/OFF
Yes
(simplex)
Yes
(simplex)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1
1
1
1
1
Changing the data after recalling a memory channel
overwrites the contents of the channel.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
40
10 MEMORY FEATURES
MEMORY RECALL AND SCROLL
There are two modes that allow you to retrieve
frequencies and associated data that you stored in a
memory channel: Memory Recall and Memory Scroll.
Memory Recall:
In this mode, the transceiver receives and transmits
using a frequency that you retrieve. You can
temporarily change the frequency and associated data
without overwriting the contents of the memory channel.
Memory Scroll:
Use this mode to check the contents of memory
channels without changing the current receive
frequency. In this mode, frequencies that you retrieve
are not used for receiving and transmitting.
s Memory Recall
1 Press [M/V] to enter Memory Recall mode.
• The memory channel that was last selected
appears.
2 Turn the MULTI/CH control, or press Mic [UP] or
[DWN] to select a memory channel.
• Continuously holding down Mic [UP] or
[DWN] steps the transceiver through the
memory channels until the button is released.
• The memory channels that contain no data
are skipped.
• You cannot change memory channels while
transmitting.
3 To exit Memory Recall mode, press [M/V].
Note: Memory channels can also be changed while using the
TF-SET function.
s Split-Frequency Channels
1 Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.
• “tA” or “tB” appears to show which VFO is
selected.
2 Select the frequency, mode, etc. to be stored.
• The frequency and mode selected here will be
used for transmitting.
3 Press [A/B] to select the other VFO.
4 Select the receive frequency and mode.
5 Press [SPLIT].
• “SPLIT” appears.
6 Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.
• To exit Memory Scroll mode and abort the
storage process, press [CLR].
7 Turn the MULTI/CH control, or press Mic [UP] or
[DWN] to select a memory channel.
• Entering a 2-digit number such as 05 using
the numeric keys can also be used to select a
channel.
8 Press [M.IN] again to store the data.
• The previous data stored in the channel is
overwritten.
Note: When subtone frequencies differ between TX and RX
while performing memory-VFO split operation, the subtone
frequency for RX will be stored in the memory channel.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
41
10 MEMORY FEATURES
s Memory-VFO Split Operation
Under “SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATING”
{page 23}, you learned split-frequency operation
using two VFOs. Recalling a split-frequency channel
is another way to do split-frequency operation. If you
access Menu No. 07 and select ON, you can also
use a memory channel and a VFO together for this
operation, as follows:
• RX: Memory channel
TX: VFO A or VFO B
• RX: VFO A or VFO B
TX: Memory channel
To use a memory channel for receiving:
1 Press [A/B] to select the VFO that you will use
for transmitting.
• “tA” or “tB” appears to show which VFO is
selected.
2 Select the frequency for transmitting.
3 Recall a memory channel.
4 Press [SPLIT] to start split-frequency operation.
• If you selected VFO B in step 1, press
[SPLIT] once again.
5 Press [M/V] to quit split-frequency operation.
To use a memory channel for transmitting:
1 Recall a memory channel.
2 Press [M/V].
3 Press [A/B] to select the VFO that you will use
for receiving.
4 Select the frequency for receiving.
5 Press [SPLIT] to start split-frequency operation.
6 Press [SPLIT] again to use the memory channel
that you recalled in step 1.
7 Press [SPLIT] once again to quit split-frequency
operation.
s Memory Scroll
1 Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.
• The memory channel that was last selected
appears.
2 Turn the MULTI/CH control, or press Mic [UP] or
[DWN] to step through the memory channels.
• Entering a 2-digit number such as 05 using
the numeric keys can also be used to change
channels.
3 To exit Memory Scroll mode, press [CLR].
• The transceiver re-displays the memory
channel or VFO frequency that was selected
before you activated Memory Scroll.
s Temporary Frequency Changes
After retrieving frequencies and associated data in
Memory Recall mode, you can temporarily change
the data without overwriting the contents of the
memory channel.
1 Access Menu No. 08 and select ON.
• Skip this step when changing only the
associated data.
2 Recall a memory channel.
3 Change the frequencies and associated data.
• Use only the Tuning control to select a
frequency.
4 If necessary for future use, store the changed
data in another memory channel. Refer to
“Channel ¬ Channel Transfer” {page 42}.
Note: Memory channel data can also be changed while using
the TF-SET function.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
42
10 MEMORY FEATURES
MEMORY TRANSFER
s Memory ¬ VFO Transfer
After retrieving frequencies and associated data in
Memory Recall mode, you can copy this data to the
VFO. This function is useful, for example, when the
frequency you want to monitor is near the frequency
stored in a memory channel.
1 Recall the desired memory channel.
2 Press [M>VFO].
• When a simplex channel is recalled, the data
is copied to VFO A or VFO B, depending on
which VFO was used to recall the channel.
• When a split channel is recalled, the RX data
is copied to VFO A and the TX data is copied
to VFO B.
Note:
x The Memory Channel Lockout status and the subtone
frequency are not copied.
x Pressing [M>VFO] after temporarily changing the retrieved
data copies the new data to the VFO.
s Channel ¬ Channel Transfer
You can also copy the contents of one memory
channel to another memory channel. This function is
useful when storing frequencies and associated data
that you temporarily change in Memory Recall mode.
1 Recall the desired memory channel.
2 Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.
• To exit Memory Scroll mode, press [CLR].
3 Select the memory channel to which you would
like this data copied.
4 Press [M.IN] again.
The tables below illustrate how data is transferred
between memory channels:
Channel 00 ~ 89
¬
¬
¬
¬
¬
¬
¬

¬
Channel 00 ~ 89 ¬
RX frequency
TX frequency
Mode for RX
Mode for TX
Subtone frequency
Tone ON/OFF
CTCSS ON/OFF
Memory Channel
Lockout OFF
RX frequency
TX frequency
Mode for RX
Mode for TX
Subtone frequency
Tone ON/OFF
CTCSS ON/OFF
Memory Channel
Lockout ON/OFF
Channel 90 ~ 99
¬

¬
¬
¬
¬
¬
¬

¬
Channel 00 ~ 89 ¬
TX/RX frequency
Start frequency
End frequency
Mode for TX/RX

Subtone frequency
Tone ON/OFF
CTCSS ON/OFF
Memory Channel
Lockout OFF
RX frequency
TX frequency
Mode for RX
Mode for TX
Subtone frequency
Tone ON/OFF
CTCSS ON/OFF
Memory Channel
Lockout ON/OFF
Channel 90 ~ 99
¬
¬
¬
¬
¬
¬
¬

¬

Channel 90 ~ 99 ¬
TX/RX frequency
Mode for TX/RX
Start frequency
End frequency
Subtone frequency
Tone ON/OFF
CTCSS ON/OFF
Memory Channel
Lockout ON/OFF
TX/RX frequency
Mode for TX/RX
Start frequency
End frequency
Subtone frequency
Tone ON/OFF
CTCSS ON/OFF
Memory Channel
Lockout OFF
Channel 00 ~ 89
¬

¬

¬
¬
¬

¬

Channel 90 ~ 99 ¬
RX frequency
TX frequency
Mode for RX
Mode for TX
Subtone frequency
Tone ON/OFF
CTCSS ON/OFF
Memory Channel
Lockout OFF
TX/RX frequency
Mode for TX/RX
Subtone frequency
Tone ON/OFF
CTCSS ON/OFF
Memory Channel
Lockout ON/OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
43
10 MEMORY FEATURES
STORING FREQUENCY RANGES
Memory channels 90 to 99 allow you to store frequency
ranges for VFO tuning and Program Scan. Program
Scan is described in the next chapter. To tune or scan
frequencies in a desired range only, store start and end
frequencies for that range in advance.
1 Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.
• “tA” or “tB” appears to show which VFO is
selected.
2 Select the end frequency and mode.
3 Press [A/B] to select the other VFO.
4 Select the start frequency.
5 Press [SPLIT].
• “SPLIT” appears.
6 Press [M.IN] to select Memory Scroll mode.
• To exit Memory Scroll mode and abort the
storage process, press [CLR].
7 Turn the MULTI/CH control, or press Mic [UP] or
[DWN] to select a memory channel in the range from
90 to 99.
• Entering a 2-digit number such as 90 using the
numeric keys can also be used to select a
channel.
8 Press [M.IN] again to store the data.
• The previous data stored in the channel is
overwritten.
s Confirming Start/End Frequencies
Use this procedure to check the start and end
frequencies that you stored in channels 90 to 99.
1 Press [M/V] to enter Memory Recall mode.
2 Turn the MULTI/CH control, or press Mic [UP] or
[DWN] to select a memory channel.
3 Press [DOWN] to check the start frequency and
press [UP] to check the end frequency.
s Programmable VFO
Using the start and end frequencies that you stored
in channels 90 to 99, Programmable VFO restricts
the frequency range that you can tune with the
Tuning control. One application of this function is to
help you operate within the authorized frequency
limits of your license.
1 Press [M/V] to enter Memory Recall mode.
2 Turn the MULTI/CH control, or press Mic [UP] or
[DWN] to select a memory channel.
Now you can only tune from the start frequency to
the end frequency
ERASING MEMORY CHANNELS
If there are memory channels that you will not recall in
the future, you may prefer erasing the contents of those
channels.
1 Press [M/V] to enter Memory Recall mode.
2 Turn the MULTI/CH control, or press Mic [UP] or
[DWN] to select a memory channel.
3 Press [CLR] for approximately two seconds.
• A beep sounds to confirm that the channel data is
erased.
s Full Reset
Do Full Reset if you want to erase all data in all
memory channels. Note that this function resets all
settings, that you customized, to the factory defaults,
i.e. menu settings, quick memory, etc.
To do Full Reset, press [A=B]+ POWER ON.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
44
10 MEMORY FEATURES
s Memory Channel Lockout
You can lock out Conventional memory channels
that you prefer not to monitor during Memory Scan.
Memory Scan is described in the next chapter.
1 Press [M/V] to enter Memory Recall mode.
2 Turn the MULTI/CH control, or press Mic [UP] or
[DWN] to select a memory channel.
3 Press [CLR].
• Release [CLR] immediately. Pressing it for
more than approximately 2 seconds erases
the contents of the memory channel.
• A dot appears beside the right-most digit of
the memory channel number to indicate the
channel has been locked out.
• Repeatedly pressing [CLR] adds and
removes the channel from the scan list.
QUICK MEMORY
Quick memory is designed for quickly and temporarily
saving data without specifying a particular memory
channel. Use Quick memory to store data that you will
not need during future operating sessions. For
example, as you tune across the band looking for DX, it
is convenient to store stations that you want to contact.
You can quickly jump between several different
memory channels as you monitor them.
This transceiver provides five Quick memory channels
that can store the following data:
STORING INTO QUICK MEMORY
Each time you store a new frequency, all previously
stored frequencies are bumped to their next respective
Quick memory channel. When all five memory
channels contain frequencies, storing one more
frequency bumps the contents of memory channel 5 off
the stack (data lost).
You can store data in Quick memory only when using
VFO frequencies for both transmitting and receiving.
1 Select the frequency, mode, etc.
2 Press QUICK MEMO [M.IN].
• Each time [M.IN] is pressed, the current VFO
data is written to Quick memory.
Note: When RIT or XIT is ON, this ON status and the offset also
will be stored.
TX frequency
Mode for TX
Microphone gain
Keying speed
Break-in delay time
VOX ON/OFF
Noise Blanker ON/OFF
CTCSS ON/OFF
Fine Tuning ON/OFF
XIT ON/OFF
RX frequency
Mode for RX
RIT/XIT offset
Transmit power
VOX delay time
Receive filter bandwidth
1
Speech Processor ON/OFF
Subtone ON/OFF
1 MHz Step ON/OFF
RIT ON/OFF
1
DSP SLOPE control settings are not stored.
24.911 14.235 18.111 7.082 3.545
21.200 24.911 14.235 18.111 7.082
10.103
Memory 1 Memory 2 Memory 3 Memory 4 Memory 5
Memory 1 Memory 2 Memory 3 Memory 4 Memory 5
Memory 1 Memory 2 Memory 3 Memory 4 Memory 5
21.200 24.911 14.235 18.111
® ® ® ®
® ® ® ®
® ® ® ®
§
§
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
45
10 MEMORY FEATURES
RECALLING QUICK MEMORY
You can recall a Quick memory channel, only when
using VFO frequencies for both transmitting and
receiving.
1 Press QUICK MEMO [MR].
• The current memory channel number appears.
• If there is no data stored in any Quick memory
channel, then this step will not access Quick
memory.
2 Turn the MULTI/CH control to select a Quick
memory channel (1 to 5).
• You cannot change memory channels while
transmitting.
3 To exit, press QUICK MEMO [MR] again.
Note: Memory channels cannot be changed while using the TF-SET
function.
TEMPORARY FREQUENCY CHANGES
After recalling a Quick memory channel, you can
temporarily change the data without overwriting the
contents of the channel. You can change the frequency
even when you select OFF in Menu No. 08.
1 Press QUICK MEMO [MR].
2 Turn the MULTI/CH control to select a Quick
memory channel (1 to 5).
3 Change the frequencies and associated data.
4 To store the changed data in Quick memory, press
QUICK MEMO [M.IN].
• This action stores the new data in the current
channel and bumps the old frequency to the next
higher Quick memory channel.
5 To exit, press QUICK MEMO [MR] again.
Note: Memory channel data can also be changed while using the
TF-SET function.
QUICK MEMORY ¬ VFO TRANSFER
This function copies the contents of the memory
channel that you recalled, to the VFO.
1 Recall a Quick memory channel.
2 Press [M>VFO].
Note: Pressing [M>VFO] after temporarily changing the recalled
data copies the new data to the VFO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
46
SCAN
Scan is a useful function for hands-off monitoring of
your favorite frequencies. By becoming comfortable
with how to use all types of Scan, the monitoring
flexibility gained will increase your operating efficiency.
The transceiver provides the following types of Scan:
PROGRAM SCAN
Program Scan monitors the range between the start
frequency and the end frequency that you store in
Conventional memory channels 90 to 99. For a
refresher on how to store Program Scan limits, refer to
“STORING FREQUENCY RANGES” {page 43}.
You can select a maximum of 10 memory channels and
sequentially scan the ranges that you previously stored
in those channels. Program Scan starts with the
smallest channel number and repeats the sequence as
shown below.
1 Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.
2 Press and hold down [SCAN], then using the
numeric keys enter the second digit of each memory
channel you desire to scan, i.e. 3 for
Ch 93, 357 for Ch 93/Ch 95/Ch 97, etc.
3 Release [SCAN] to start Program Scan.
• Releasing [SCAN] before entering channel
numbers selects the channels that you selected
last time for Program Scan.
• To jump to the desired frequency while scanning,
turn the Tuning control or MULTI/CH control, or
press Mic [UP]/[DWN].
• When in a mode other than FM, turning the
RIT/XIT control clockwise decreases the scan
speed, and counterclockwise increases the
speed. “P1” to “P9” on the display show the
current speed (P1: maximum, P9: minimum).
• When in FM mode, Scan automatically stops on
a channel in which a signal is present. The
transceiver remains on the same channel for
either a short time (Time-operated mode) or until
the signal drops (Carrier-operated mode),
depending on which one you select via Menu
No. 10. Refer to “MEMORY SCAN” for further
information.
4 To stop Scan, press [SCAN] or [CLR].
Note:
x If you have turned the SQL control clockwise far beyond the
squelch threshold when in FM mode, Scan may fail to stop at a
channel in which a signal is present. If this happens, turn the
SQL control slightly counterclockwise.
x If you press [SCAN] before storing any frequency range, then the
lower and upper frequency limits of the transceiver are stored in
memory channel 90, and Program Scan is activated using this
channel.
x When the current receive frequency is within one of the ranges
that you select by channel numbers, Scan starts with the current
frequency. The operating mode stored in the channel with that
range is used.
x When the current receive frequency is outside all the ranges that
you select by channel numbers, Scan starts with the start
frequency stored in the smallest channel number.
x Operating mode can be changed during scanning, but the
memory channel is overwritten with the changed mode.
x When the current Scan range is smaller than a single step of the
MULTI/CH control, turning this control clockwise causes Scan to
jump to the start frequency, and counterclockwise to the end
frequency.
x Starting Program Scan switches OFF the RIT and XIT functions.
x When in FM mode, Program Scan monitors rounded off
frequencies regardless of the Menu No. 05 selection.
SCAN HOLD
This function stops Program Scan for approximately five
seconds and then resumes Scan when you jump to the
desired frequency by turning the Tuning control or
MULTI/CH control, or pressing Mic [UP]/[DWN].
To use this function, access Menu No. 09, and select
ON. The default is OFF.
Monitors frequencies in
the range that you select.
Monitors all RX frequencies
that you store in the
Conventional memory channels.
Monitors all RX frequencies
stored in the Conventional
memory channels of the
desired group.
All-channel
Scan
Memory
Scan
Program Scan
Scan Type Purpose
Group Scan
14.150 (Start freq.) 14.300 (End freq.)
Ch 93
7.030 (End freq.)
7.070 (Start freq.)
21.200 (Start freq.) 21.350 (End freq.)
Ch 95
Ch 97
Ch 93
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
47
11 SCAN
MEMORY SCAN
Memory Scan monitors all memory channels in which
you stored frequencies (All-channel Scan) or only a
desired group of memory channels (Group Scan).
Scan automatically stops at a channel in which a signal
is present. The transceiver remains on the same
channel for either a short time (Time-operated mode) or
until the signal drops (Carrier-operated mode). Use
Menu No. 10 to select either mode. The default is
Time-operated.
Time-operated mode:
After stopping on a busy channel and waiting
approximately three seconds, Scan checks the channel
again. If the channel is still busy, Scan waits another
three seconds then restarts. If the channel is not busy
three seconds after stopping, Scan restarts immediately.
Carrier-operated mode:
Scan restarts approximately two seconds after the
signal drops.
You can lock out the memory channels that you prefer
not to monitor while scanning. To do this refer to
“Memory Channel Lockout” {page 44}.
ALL-CHANNEL SCAN
Use the following procedure to monitor all memory
channels that contain frequency data.
1 Select Time-operated or Carrier-operated via Menu
No. 10.
2 Press [M/V] to enter Memory Recall mode.
3 Turn the SQL control to adjust the squelch to
threshold.
4 Press [SCAN] to start All-channel Scan.
• Scan starts with the current channel and ascends
up through the channel numbers (this direction
cannot be changed).
• To jump to the desired channel while scanning,
turn the MULTI/CH control, or press Mic [UP]/
[DWN].
5 To stop Scan, press [SCAN] or [CLR].
Note:
x If you have turned the SQL control clockwise far beyond the
squelch threshold, Scan may fail to stop at a channel in which a
signal is present. If this happens, turn the SQL control slightly
counterclockwise.
x Starting Memory Scan switches OFF the RIT and XIT functions.
GROUP SCAN
For the purpose of Group Scan, the 100 Conventional
memory channels are divided into 10 groups, with each
group containing 10 channels. The channels are
grouped as follows:
You can select a maximum of 10 groups and
sequentially scan the channels that belong to those
groups. Group Scan starts with the smallest group
number and repeats the sequence, for example,
group 3 © group 5 © group 7 © group 3.
1 Select Time-operated or Carrier-operated via Menu
No. 10.
2 Press [MR] to enter Memory Recall mode.
3 Turn the SQL control to adjust the squelch to the
threshold.
4 Press and hold down [SCAN] then, using the
numeric keys, enter the group numbers you desire to
scan, i.e. 3 for group 3, 35 for groups 3 and 5, etc.
5 Release [SCAN] to start Group Scan.
• Scan ascends up through the channel numbers
(this direction cannot be changed).
• To jump to the desired channel while scanning,
turn the MULTI/CH control, or press Mic
[UP]/[DWN].
6 To stop Scan, press [SCAN] or [CLR].
After using Group Scan, enter all group numbers in step
4 or do Full Reset {page 48} to use All-channel Scan
(factory default). Note that doing Full Reset returns all
settings, that you customized, to the factory defaults.
Note:
x If you have turned the SQL control clockwise far beyond the
squelch threshold, Scan may fail to stop at a channel in which a
signal is present. If this happens, turn the SQL control slightly
counterclockwise.
x When the current channel is within one of the groups that you
select by group number, Scan starts with the current channel.
x When the current channel is outside all the groups that you select
by group number, Scan starts with the group number that is
larger than and closest to the group number of the current
channel.
x Starting Memory Scan switches OFF the RIT and XIT functions.
Ch 00, Ch 01, Ch 02, • • • • Ch 09
Ch 10, Ch 11, Ch 12, • • • • Ch 19
Ch 20, Ch 21, Ch 22, • • • • Ch 29
• • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • •
Ch 90, Ch 91, Ch 92, • • • • Ch 99
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 9



1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
48
OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
MICROPROCESSOR RESET
If your transceiver seems to be malfunctioning, resetting
the microprocessor default settings may resolve the
problem.
INITIAL SETTINGS
For each VFO, the factory defaults for operating
frequency and mode are as follows:
• VFO A: 14.000.000 MHz/ USB
• VFO B: 14.000.000 MHz/ USB
The Conventional and Quick memory channels have no
data stored.
PARTIAL RESET
Do Partial Reset if a button or control does not function
according to the instructions in this manual. The
following are not erased by Partial Reset.
• Memory channel data
• Menu settings
• Antenna tuner preset data
• ANT 1/ANT 2 data.
To do Partial Reset, press [A/B]+ POWER ON.
• “HELLO” appears on the display.
FULL RESET
Do Full Reset if you want to erase all data in all memory
channels. In addition, this function resets all settings,
that you customized, to the factory defaults, i.e. menu
settings, antenna tuner preset data, etc.
To do Full Reset, press [A=B]+ POWER ON.
• “HELLO” appears on the display.
Note: The IF filter selection in Menu No. 46 will not be reset.
SWITCHING ANT 1/ ANT 2
After connecting antenna feed line to the ANT 1
connector and/or ANT 2 connector on the rear panel,
select ANT 1 or ANT 2, depending on which antenna is
used for transmitting and receiving.
Press [ANT] to select ANT 1 or ANT 2.
• “ANT 1” or “ANT 2” appears to show which antenna
is selected.
The ANT 1/ANT 2 setting will automatically be stored in
the current band. Each time you select the same band,
the same setting will automatically be selected.
The frequency range of each band is shown below.
Note: Connect an external antenna tuner to the ANT 1 connector
only. After connecting this tuner correctly and selecting ANT 1, the
internal tuner will always be bypassed.
FREQUENCY LOCK FUNCTION
Frequency Lock disables some buttons and controls to
prevent you from accidentally activating a function or
disturbing current settings.
Press [F.LOCK] to toggle Frequency Lock ON or OFF.
• “F.LOCK” appears when the function is ON.
The following buttons and controls are disabled by
Frequency Lock:
• Tuning control • MULTI/CH control
• QUICK MEMO [MR] • QUICK MEMO [M.IN]
• [FINE] • [REV] • [CLR]
• [ENT] • [LSB/USB] • [CW/FSK]
• [FM/AM] • [1MHz] • [UP]/[DOWN]
• [SPLIT] • [A/B] • [M/V]
• [A=B] • [SCAN] • [M>VFO]
• [M.IN]
Note:
x After activating Frequency Lock, the MULTI/CH control and
[UP]/[DOWN] are still available in Menu mode.
x After activating Frequency Lock, you can still change the transmit
frequency with the Tuning control while using the TF-SET
function.
x After activating Frequency Lock, the MULTI/CH control is still
available for selections other than frequency and memory
channel changes.
x After activating Frequency Lock, [CLR] is still available in some
situations.
Frequency Range
(MHz)
Frequency Range
(MHz)
14.50 ~ 18.50
18.50 ~ 21.50
21.50 ~ 25.50
25.50 ~ 30.00
30.00 ~ 60.00 (TS-570S)
0.03 ~ 2.50
2.50 ~ 4.10
4.10 ~ 7.50
7.50 ~ 10.50
10.50 ~ 14.50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
49
12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
Consult the following table to select a function.
Selecting OFF assigns no function to the button.
1 Press [MENU].
2 Press [A/B] to select Menu A or Menu B.
3 Turn the MULTI/CH control to select Menu No. 41,
42, 43, 44, or 45.
4 Press [UP], [DOWN], Mic [UP], or Mic [DWN] to
select a function number.
• Consult the above table to select a function.
5 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.
The default values are as follows:
• Front panel [PF]: Voice 1
• Mic [PF1]: [A/B] • Mic [PF2]: [SPLIT]
• Mic [PF3]: [M/V] • Mic [PF4]: Monitor
Note:
x Full Reset returns the functions of the PF buttons to default
settings.
x Function No. 84 accessible in step 4 is not currently available.
Pressing the PF button with Function No. 84 assigned will
simply cause the transceiver to display a string of error codes.
BEEP FUNCTION
The purpose of the Beep function is to provide an audible
signal that conveys information. There are three types of
signals:
• To confirm that a button has been pressed.
• To report an error condition; Morse codes are used for
some errors.
• To confirm that the selection was completed by
pressing [MIC], [PWR], [KEY], [DELAY], or [FILTER]
again.
When selecting an operating mode, a Morse code
abbreviation for that mode is heard.
You can change the volume of the beep output via Menu
No. 01.
DISPLAY DIMMER
The Display illumination can be switched between 5 levels
via Menu No. 00.
PROGRAM FUNCTION BUTTON
The transceiver allows you to customize the function of the
front panel [PF] button. When using the optional MC-47
microphone, you can also customize the functions of the
Mic [PF1], [PF2], [PF3], and [PF4] buttons. You can
assign the following types of functions to these buttons via
Menu No. 41 to 45:
• Directly select Menu No. 00 to 40, 48 to 51. No need to
press [MENU] and turn the MULTI/CH control.
• Activate a function that is supported by no other front
panel buttons.
• Activate the same function as one of the front panel
buttons.
LSB
USB
CW
CW –R
FSK
FSK –R
AM
FM
· – · · (L)
· · – (U)
– · – · (C)
– · – · · – · (CR)
· – · (R)
· – · · – · (RR)
· – (A)
· · – · (F)
Morse Code Output Mode
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
00 to 40
80 to 83
Function
Number
Function
Function
Number
Function
[SCAN]
[M>VFO]
[M.IN]
[CW TUNE]
[CH 1]
[CH 2]
[CH 3]
[FINE]
[F. LOCK]
[CLR]
Selects Menu
No. 00 to 40.
See “MENU
CONFIGURATION”.
50
51
52
53
60
61
62
63
64
Monitor
Voice 1
Voice 2
DSP Filter
Monitor
QUICK
MEMO [MR]
QUICK
MEMO [M.IN]
[SPLIT]
[TF-SET]
[A/B]
65 [M/V]
66 [A=B] OFF 99
Selects
Menu No.
48 to 51.
Ex: 82
selects
Menu No.
50.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
50
12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
s Transferring Data
The TS-570 transceiver works as the Master
sending data to the Slave transceiver.
1 Switch ON the Transfer function on each
transceiver.
• On the TS-570, access Menu No. 36 and
select ON. For the compatible transceiver,
check the instruction manual that came with
the transceiver.
2 On the Master, while in VFO mode, select an
operating frequency and mode.
3 On the Master, press QUICK MEMO [M.IN].
• When using another TS-570 as the Slave,
“CTRL” appears on the Slave.
• The displayed data is stored in Quick memory
channel 1 on the Master and transferred to
the Slave.
Note: If the Master has RIT switched ON, the offset frequency
is added to the receive frequency to be transferred.
s Receiving Data
The TS-570 transceiver works as the Slave,
receiving data from the Master transceiver. The
Slave can receive data using either Quick memory
channel 1 or the VFO.
1 Switch ON the Transfer function on each
transceiver.
• On the TS-570, access Menu No. 36 and
select ON. For the compatible transceiver,
check the instruction manual that came with
the transceiver.
2 On the Slave, access Menu No. 37 and select
either OFF (Quick memory channel 1) or ON
(the VFO).
• The default is Quick memory.
3 On the Master, perform the appropriate operation
to send data.
• For the correct method, check the instruction
manual that came with the transceiver.
Note:
x If you always use the TS-570 just to receive, activate TX
Inhibit via Menu No. 38 to avoid unintentional transmission.
x When the Slave receives data using the VFO programmed
with a simplex frequency, the received data replaces the data
on both VFOs. On the Slave, both RIT and XIT are set to
OFF.
x When the Slave receives data using the VFOs programmed
with split frequencies, the received data replaces the data
only on the TX side of the VFO. On the Slave, XIT is set to
OFF but RIT is not changed.
QUICK DATA TRANSFER
This transceiver has the capability to quickly and
conveniently transfer the receive frequency and mode to
another compatible transceiver. Compatible
transceivers include:
• TS-570S/570D • TS-850S
• TS-870S • TS-690S
• TS-950SDX • TS-450S
Data Transfer could be useful while contesting. A
spotting station that is searching for new contest
multipliers can quickly transfer a frequency over to the
running (main) station.
SETTING UP
s Equipment Needed
In addition to a compatible transceiver, the following
equipment is required:
Transfer to TS-570 or TS-870S:
• One cross-wired cable
This cable must have a 9-pin RS-232C female
connector at both ends.
Transfer to a transceiver other than TS-570 and
TS-870S:
• KENWOOD IF-232C interface unit
• One cross-wired cable
This cable must have a 9-pin RS-232C female
connector at one end and a 25-pin RS-232C
female connector at the other end.
• One straight cable
This cable must have a 6-pin DIN male connector
at both ends.
s Connections
For diagrams on how to connect the two
transceivers, see “CONNECTING PERIPHERAL
EQUIPMENT ” {page 60}.
USING QUICK TRANSFER
When connecting with another TS-570 or the TS-870S,
use the same COM connector baud rate on each
transceiver. If transferring to or from other KENWOOD
transceivers, select 4800 bps and 2 stop bits on the
TS-570. Use Menu No. 35 to select these parameters.
Note: While transferring data, other functions may work slowly.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
51
12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
COMPUTER CONTROL
By connecting this transceiver to a computer, you can
change the computer into an electronic console from
which you can remotely control functions of the
transceiver. This capability makes possible remote
operation of your transceiver from across the room,
from another room, or, when coupled with other
commercially available products and where lawful, from
another city, state, or country via a telephone
connection.
Note:
x You can use the front panel controls while using computer
control. Settings done from the front panel are effective
immediately.
x After the computer is disconnected or turned off, all values and
settings on the front panel are restored.
SETTING UP
s Equipment Needed
• Computer equipped with an RS-232C serial port.
• One straight cable
This cable must have a 9-pin RS-232C female
connector at one end, and at the other end a 9-
pin or a 25-pin RS-232C female connector that
mates with the RS-232C port of your computer.
• Transceiver control application
To design your programs consult “APPENDIX”
{page 70} for the necessary information.
s Connections
Connecting the transceiver to the computer is easy.
See the diagram given in “CONNECTING
PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT” {page 60}.
Note: Before connecting this transceiver to the computer,
switch OFF the power to the transceiver and the computer.
COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS
In order to control the transceiver by computer, you
must first choose the communication parameters.
1 On the computer, configure your transceiver control
application for 8 data bits and no parity.
2 On the transceiver, select the appropriate transfer
rate and number of stop bits via Menu No. 35.
• The defaults are 9600 bps and 1 stop bit.
Note: To reliably use the 38400 or 57600 bps transfer rates, the
RS-232C port of the computer must support these high-speed
communications parameters.
1200
2400
4800
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
12 – 1
24 – 1
48 – 1
48 – 2
96 – 1
192 – 1
384 – 1
576 – 1
Menu Setting
Transfer Rate
(bps)
Stop Bits
USING A TRANSVERTER
If you have a transverter that converts HF frequencies
to VHF/UHF frequencies, and vice versa, you can use
this HF transceiver as a VHF or UHF transceiver. For
more information, consult the instruction manual that
came with the transverter.
1 Connect the transverter to the ANT 1 or ANT 2
connector of this transceiver.
2 Select the operating frequency.
• The transverter will use this frequency as the
reference for converting frequencies.
• Normally set 1 kHz and lower digits to 0
(“0.00” on the display).
3 Access Menu No. 40, and select 50 MHz, 144 MHz
or 430 MHz, depending on which band you will use.
The default is OFF.
• Changing from the default (OFF) will
automatically set the transmit power to
approximately 5 W.
• The transceiver displays a frequency down to the
10 Hz digit for 50 MHz, or down to the
100 Hz digit for 144 MHz and 430 MHz.
Note:
x When using a transverter, not all the functions of this transceiver
are available.
x When using the optional VS-3 unit, the selected VHF or UHF
frequencies are not announced.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
52
12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER
As explained in “ANTENNA CONNECTION” {page 1},
matching the impedance of the coaxial cable and
antenna is very important. To do this, you have the
choice of using the internal or an external tuner. This
section describes how to use the internal tuner. For the
external tuner, consult the instruction manual that comes
with the tuner.
1 Select the transmit frequency.
2 Press [ANT] to select ANT 1 or ANT 2.
• With an external tuner connected to the ANT 1
connector, you cannot select ANT 1 here.
Selecting ANT 1 in this situation always causes
the internal tuner to be bypassed.
3 Press [AT TUNE] and release it immediately.
• “AT” appears to show that the internal tuner is in-
line (not bypassed).
4 Press [AT TUNE] for more than one second.
• CW mode is automatically selected and tuning
starts.
• “AT” blinks, and “TX” and “CW” appear.
• To cancel tuning for any reason, press
[AT TUNE] again.
• If the SWR of the antenna system is extremely
high, an alarm, Morse code “SWR”, is output and
the internal tuner is bypassed. Before retrying
tuning, adjust the antenna system to lower the
SWR.
5 See the display and check that tuning has
successfully finished.
• After successful tuning, “AT” stops blinking, and
“TX” and “CW” disappear.
• If tuning does not finish within about 20 seconds,
an alarm sounds. Press [AT TUNE] to stop the
alarm and tuning.
If you access Menu No. 11 and select ON, received
signals will also pass through the internal tuner. This
may reduce interference to the receive frequency.
Note:
x The internal tuner will not tune outside the authorized transmit
limits of Amateur bands.
x Pressing [AT TUNE] for more than one second while transmitting
interrupts transmitting and starts tuning.
x While using a different antenna tuner band for transmitting and
receiving with Menu No. 11 ON, received signals bypass the
internal tuner.
x While using CW Full Break-in, the internal tuner will be in-line for
both transmitting and receiving.
x Tuning will automatically turn off after approximately 60 seconds.
In addition, “AT” will disappear and the error beeps will stop.
x Tuning still may continue when the SWR meter indicates 1:1.
This happens because of the tuning algorithm, and does not
indicate a malfunction.
x Even though the SWR meter shows more than one segment, the
internal tuner may not function for retuning. This does not
indicate a malfunction. It happens because of an unavoidable
SWR calculation algorithm error between 10 W (approx.) transmit
power for tuning and 100 W transmit power.
x If tuning does not finish although the SWR meter indicates
smaller than 3:1, adjust the antenna system to lower the SWR,
then retry tuning.
x Tuning may not lower the SWR to 1:1 depending on conditions.
PRESETTING
After each successful tuning session, the Preset
function stores the position of the tuning capacitor in
memory. The position of the capacitor is stored for each
of the antenna tuner bands (see table below) and for
each antenna connector (ANT 1 and ANT 2).
Press [AT TUNE] and release it immediately.
• “AT” will appear to show that the internal tuner is in-
line (not bypassed).
• Each time you go across the antenna tuner band,
the Preset function automatically positions the tuning
capacitor without need for retuning. If no Preset
data exists for a particular band/antenna
combination, then the default data for 50 Ω is used.
Note: Tuning may restart to obtain the optimum matching condition
although the current antenna tuner band has the preset data. This
does not indicate a malfunction.
14.10 ~ 14.50
14.50 ~ 18.50
18.50 ~ 21.15
21.15 ~ 21.50
21.50 ~ 25.50
25.50 ~ 29.00
29.00 ~ 30.00
30.00 ~ 51.00
51.00 ~ 52.00
52.00 ~ 53.00
53.00 ~ 60.00
0.03 ~ 1.85
1.85 ~ 2.50
2.50 ~ 3.525
3.525 ~ 3.575
3.575 ~ 3.725
3.725 ~ 4.10
4.10 ~ 7.03
7.03 ~ 7.10
7.10 ~ 7.50
7.50 ~ 10.50
10.50 ~ 14.10
Frequency Range
(MHz)
Frequency Range
(MHz)
1
1
1
1
1
TS-570S only
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
53
12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
6 To record a message in another channel, start with
step 3.
Note:
x To erase a message, press and hold the desired channel button,
and press [CLR].
x Pressing the [POWER] switch cancels recording in progress and
clears the memory channel.
MESSAGE PLAYBACK
You can play back the message in channel 1, 2, or 3 to
check or to send. It is also possible to make a longer
linked message, by consecutively playing back the
messages of more than one channel.
You can even send a longer linked message repeatedly
by using the Repeat function. To switch this function
ON, access Menu No. 23 and select ON. The default is
OFF.
Note:
x Pressing the [POWER] switch cancels playback in progress.
x The settings in Menu No. 23 and No. 24 are shared with CW
Message Playback described in “CW MESSAGE MEMORY”
{page 35}.
s Checking Messages
1 Select SSB, FM, or AM.
• Use the same mode for transmitting and
receiving.
2 If VOX is ON, press [VOX] to switch the function
OFF.
3 Press [CH 1], [CH 2], or [CH 3], depending on
which channel you want to check.
• For example, “AP 1– –” appears while
playing back the message in channel 1.
• To interrupt playback, press [CLR].
4 To play back another message in sequence,
press the corresponding [CH 1], [CH 2], or
[CH 3] while playing back the first message.
• Up to three channels can be queued at the
same time.
DRU-3A DIGITAL RECORDING UNIT
(OPTIONAL)
The optional DRU-3A unit allows you to record a voice
message on up to 3 channels. After recording a
message via your transceiver microphone, you can then
send that message.
The maximum recording time for each channel is as
follows:
Channel 1: Approx. 30 sec
Channel 2: Approx. 15 sec
Channel 3: Approx. 15 sec
The DRU-3A is useful in many situations:
• DX chasing or contest operation where repeated
calls are necessary for extended periods of time
• Checking interference complaints to other equipment
(lets you be in two places at one time)
• Checking or adjusting your transmit signal or your
antenna(s) if it’s not convenient to be sitting in front
of your microphone
• Helping a friend adjust his antenna or receive when
he needs repeated test transmissions from you
For information on how to install the DRU-3A unit, refer
to “INSTALLING OPTIONS” {page 57}.
RECORDING MESSAGES
This section explains how to record a single message.
1 Select SSB, FM, or AM.
• Use the same mode for transmitting and
receiving.
2 If VOX is ON, press [VOX] to switch the function
OFF.
3 Press [REC] to enter the Record Standby mode.
• “AP –” appears.
• To exit the Record Standby mode and quit
recording your message, press [CLR].
4 Press and hold down [CH 1], [CH 2], or [CH 3] and
begin speaking into your microphone.
• There are three channels for recording
messages. Press the button that corresponds to
the channel that you want to use.
5 Release the button pressed in step 4 when you have
finished recording your message.
• Also when the maximum recording time passes,
recording stops.
• The content of the channel is overwritten with the
new message.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
54
12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
s Sending Messages
1 Select SSB, FM, or AM.
• Use the same mode for transmitting and
receiving.
2 Press [VOX] to switch VOX ON or OFF.
• Depending on this selection, the subsequent
procedures differ.
3 If you switch OFF VOX in step 2, press [SEND],
or press and hold Mic [PTT].
4 Press [CH 1], [CH 2], or [CH 3], depending on
which channel you want to use.
• For example, “AP 1– –” appears while
playing back the message in channel 1.
• To interrupt playback, press [CLR].
5 To play back another message in sequence,
press the corresponding [CH 1], [CH 2], or
[CH 3] while playing back the first message.
• Up to three channels can be queued at the
same time.
6 If you press [SEND] or Mic [PTT] in step 3, press
[SEND] again or release Mic [PTT].
s Changing Inter-message Interval
For repetitive message playback, you can change
the interval between each series of messages. Use
Menu No. 24, and select the time in the range of 0 to
60 seconds.
s Changing Volume
Turning the AF control does not change the volume
for playback. To change the volume, use Menu
No. 25.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
55
12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
VS-3 VOICE SYNTHESIZER (OPTIONAL)
Install the optional VS-3 unit to use this function. Each
time you change the transceiver mode such as VFO A/B
or Memory Recall, the transceiver automatically
announces the new mode. In addition, you can
program the front panel [PF] button so that pressing
[PF] makes the transceiver announce the displayed
information. If you have the optional MC-47
microphone, you can program one of the Mic [PF]
buttons for this function.
For an explanation on how to install the VS-3 unit, refer
to “INSTALLING OPTIONS” {page 57}.
The table below shows what the transceiver
automatically announces when it enters a new mode.
1
When you change the channel or menu number in
this mode, the transceiver announces the new
number.
2
When you enter a number using the numeric keys in
Entry mode or Memory Scroll mode, the transceiver
announces the entered number.
For the [PF] button, the transceiver will announce
different information depending on whether Voice 1 or
Voice 2 is selected.
Voice 1:
• VFO or memory channel frequencies are announced
beginning with the 10 MHz digit and continuing
through to the 10 Hz digit. If the memory channel
has no data stored, “open” is announced. For the
MHz decimal point, “point” is announced. For the
kHz decimal point, a short pause (200 ms) is made.
A 200 ms pause also is made between the channel
number and the frequency.
• Menu numbers and their settings are announced
with a short pause (200 ms) between the menu
number and the setting.
Note: If operating a button or a control changes the contents of the
display while an announcement is in progress, the announcement is
interrupted.
Voice 2:
• Peak readings for the S-meter are announced, for
example, “S5” or “20dB”.
Steps:
1 Assign Voice 1 or Voice 2 to the front panel [PF]
button or, if you use the optional MC-47 microphone,
one of the Mic [PF] buttons. For this method, refer
to “PROGRAM FUNCTION BUTTON” {page 49}.
2 Press the [PF] button that you programmed.
• Announcement is made based on Voice 1 or
Voice 2 selection.
• To interrupt the announcement, press the [PF]
button again.
[A/B]

[M/V]
QUICK MEMO
[MR]
[MENU]
[ENT]
VFO A
VFO B
Memory Recall
Quick Memory
Recall
Menu
Entry
Key Pressed New Mode
Announcement
1
1
2
VFO A frequency
VFO B frequency
Channel number
and frequency
“Q”, channel number
and frequency
“MENU”, menu number
and menu selection
“enter”
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
56
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
PS-53
Regulated DC Power
Supply (22.5 A)
MC-43S
Hand Microphone
MC-60A
Deluxe Desktop
Microphone
MC-47
Multi-function Microphone
HS-6
Small Headphones
SP-23
External Speaker
SP-50B
Mobile Speaker
MB-430
Mobile Mounting Bracket
HS-5
Deluxe Headphones
MC-85
Multi-function Desktop
Microphone
MC-90
DSP-compatible Desktop
Microphone
MC-80
Desktop Microphone
PC-1A
Phone Patch Controller
SO-2
Temperature-
compensated Crystal
Oscillator (TCXO)
DRU-3A
Digital Recording Unit
VS-3
Voice Synthesizer Unit
YK-88CN-1
CW Filter (270 Hz)
IF-232C
Interface Unit
LF-30A
Low-pass Filter
YK-88C-1
CW Filter (500 Hz)
MA-5
Mobile 5-band Antenna
YK-88SN-1
SSB Filter (1.8 kHz)
PG-2Z
DC Cable
Using PC-1A with the transceiver
does not comply with the European
EMC standard.
Microphone sensitivity is low in
FM mode.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
57
The following equipment is required for installing the
optional units.
• Large Philips screwdriver
• Small Philips screwdriver
• 25 W pencil soldering iron (for the SO-2 unit only)
REMOVING THE BOTTOM CASE
When installing the optional DRU-3A, VS-3, or SO-2
unit, remove the bottom case first.
1 Remove the 8 screws.
2 Lift off the bottom case.
DRU-3A DIGITAL RECORDING UNIT
CAUTION: SWITCH OFF THE POWER AND UNPLUG THE DC
POWER CABLE BEFORE BEGINNING INSTALLATION.
1 Remove the bottom case (8 screws).
2 Remove the flat cable from the CN15 connector.
3 Peel off the paper backing from the cushion installed
on the transceiver PC board.
INSTALLING OPTIONS
Cushion
CN15
CN17
4 Plug the DRU-3A connector (CN901) into the CN17
connector.
• The large IC on the DRU-3A must closely contact
the cushion on the PC board.
5 Reconnect the flat cable to the CN15 connector.
6 Replace the bottom case (8 screws).
DRU-3A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
58
VS-3 VOICE SYNTHESIZER UNIT
CAUTION: SWITCH OFF THE POWER AND UNPLUG THE DC
POWER CABLE BEFORE BEGINNING INSTALLATION.
1 Remove the bottom case (8 screws).
2 Hold the VS-3 unit with the component side facing
inward, and insert the VS-3 connector into the
transceiver CN16 connector.
3 Replace the bottom case (8 screws).
Note: The VR8 allows you to adjust the volume for voice
announcement. Use only when the volume level is too low or too
high.
YK-88C-1/ YK-88CN-1/ YK-88SN-1
FILTERS
CAUTION: SWITCH OFF THE POWER AND UNPLUG THE DC
POWER CABLE BEFORE BEGINNING INSTALLATION.
1 Remove the 2 screws from the bottom cover of the
transceiver.
2 Remove the bottom cover.
14 INSTALLING OPTIONS
3 Remove the 2 screws from the OPTION FILTER
section of the transceiver PC board.
4 Align the pins of the transceiver CN8 and CN9
connectors with the two connectors on the filter.
• Take care to properly align the pins.
5 While holding the filter, carefully push down until the
filter snaps into place.
6 Re-install the 2 screws that you removed in step 3.
7 Replace the bottom cover (2 screws).
Note: After installing the filter, be sure to select the appropriate
setting in Menu No. 46; otherwise the filter will not function.
VR8
Bottom cover
CN9
CN8
Filter
CN16
Component side VS-3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
59
SO-2 TEMPERATURE-COMPENSATED
CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR (TCXO)
CAUTION: SWITCH OFF THE POWER AND UNPLUG THE DC
POWER CABLE BEFORE BEGINNING INSTALLATION.
1 Remove the bottom case (8 screws).
2 Remove the protective cover installed on the PC
board (6 screws).
3 Remove the 13 screws that fasten the PC board to
the chassis.
4 Remove the clamp that fastens the heat sink to the
chassis.
5 Remove the cable from the CN1 connector.
6 Take the CN1 connector cable off the cable holder.
7 Cut the leads of the R503 and R504 resistors.
8 Insert the SO-2 unit into the specified position on the
PC board.
9 Turn the PC board over.
• Be careful not to damage the flat cables
connected to the PC board, and not to drop the
SO-2 unit.
10 Solder the five pins of the SO-2 unit to the PC board,
then cut off the SO-2 pins extruding from the PC
board.
11 Re-position the PC board.
12 Re-install the 13 screws on the PC board.
13 Re-install the protective cover on the PC board
(6 screws).
14 Re-position the clamp.
• Be careful with the orientation of the clamp. See
the drawing in step 4.
15 Reconnect the cable to the CN1 connector.
16 Pull the CN1 connector cable, and lock it using the
cable holder.
17 Replace the bottom case (8 screws).
14 INSTALLING OPTIONS
1
2
SO-2
Clamp
Heat sink
Cut here
CN1
R504
R503
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
60
COMPUTER
The COM connector allows you to directly connect a computer or dumb terminal by using an RS-232C cable
terminated with a female 9-pin connector.
No external hardware interface is required between your computer and the transceiver. See “APPENDIX” on page 70
for information related to this connector.
COMPATIBLE TRANSCEIVER
When transferring data to or from another TS-570 or the TS-870S, directly connect the two transceivers using the COM
connectors.
When transferring data to other KENWOOD transceivers, use the optional IF-232C interface unit. Connect the
IF-232C to the ACC 1 connector located on the compatible transceiver. 6-pin DIN plugs (E07-0654-XX) are available
as options. Contact your dealer or a KENWOOD Service Center.
CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
COM connector
Personal computer/
dumb terminal
RS-232C
serial port
TS-570
Straight cable
Pin Name
1
2
3
4
5
6
GND
TXD
RXD
CTS
RTS
NC
Pin
No.
ACC 1
TS-570
TS-570/870S
TS-570
Cross-wired cable
Cross-wired cable
See IF-232C manual.
IF-232C
Straight cable
COM Connector
cable
TS-450S/690S/850S/950SDX
ANT
DIN(6P)
RS-232C(25P)
DIN(6P)
Rear panel view on
TS-450S/690S/850S/
950SDX
ACC 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
61
15 CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
RTTY EQUIPMENT
Use the ACC 2 connector to connect to the RTTY equipment. Connect the RTTY key output line to pin 2 of the ACC 2
connector. Connect the demodulation input line of the RTTY equipment to pin 3 of the ACC 2 connector.
Note: Do not share a single power supply between the transceiver and the RTTY equipment. Keep as wide a separation as possible between the
transceiver and the RTTY equipment as practical to reduce noise-pickup by the transceiver.
LINEAR AMPLIFIER
Connect an external transmit power amplifier to the REMOTE connector. Before using the external amplifier, switch
ON the linear amplifier control relay via Menu No. 39.
The TX/RX relay response time is 10 ms when you have selected CW Full Break-in and 25 ms when you have
selected CW Semi Break-in.
Note: The TX/RX control method differs depending on external amplifier models. Some amplifiers enter the TX mode when the control terminal is
grounded. For those amplifiers, connect pin 2 of the REMOTE connector to the GND terminal of the amplifier and connect pin 4 of the connector to
the control terminal of the amplifier.
ANTENNA TUNER
Use the ANT 1 connector and the AT connector to connect an external antenna tuner. If you connect the external tuner
to the ANT 2 connector, the external tuner will not function.
Note: While using an external antenna tuner with the TS-570S, you cannot use the 6 m band to transmit. Connect your 6 m band antenna to the
ANT 2 connector.
Speaker output
Common terminal
Standby; when grounded, the
transceiver enters TX mode.
When connected with the common
terminal, the amplifier enters TX mode.
When connected with the common
terminal, the amplifier enters RX mode.
1
2
3
4
5
ALC input from amplifier
Approx. +12 V DC is output when in
TX mode (10 mA max.).
6
7
Pin
No.
Function
REMOTE connector
MCP
power
supply
TS-570
ACC 2
MCP
Personal computer/
dumb terminal
TS-570
External antenna tuner
2
4
1
6 7
3
5
TS-570
AC LINE
RF OUTPUT
Linear
amplifier
Control relay
R
T
GND
REMOTE Connector
(Rear panel view)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
62
15 CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
MCP AND TNC
Use the ACC 2 connector to connect the input/output lines from a Terminal Node Controller (TNC) for Packet operation,
a Multimode Communications Processor (MCP) for operation on Packet, PacTOR, AMTOR, G-TOR
TM
, or FAX, or from
a Clover interface. Also use the ACC 2 connector to connect SSTV and phone patch equipment.
• Connect the TNC or MCP to the ACC 2 connector using a cable equipped with a 13-pin DIN plug.
• Connecting the TNC or MCP to a personal computer or dumb terminal requires an RS-232C cable.
Note:
x Do not share a single power supply between the transceiver and the TNC or MCP. Keep as wide a separation as possible between the
transceiver and the computer as practical to reduce noise-pickup by the transceiver.
x The output voltage of Pin No. 6 (SMET) is not 0 V even when no signal is present. In addition, the output voltage differs between FM
(approx. 2.8 ~ 3.8 V) and other modes (approx. 0.5 ~ 3.8 V). When connecting this pin to peripheral equipment such as a personal computer,
the input impedance of that equipment must be higher than 1 MΩ. If you connect to equipment having lower impedance, the S-meter will not
give accurate readings.
TNC/MCP
TS-570
PS-53
13
9 10 11 12
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
TNC/MCP
power
supply
Personal computer
dumb terminal
Black
Red
ACC 2 Connector
(Rear panel view)
1
2
3

4
5

6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
NC
RTK
ANO

GND
PSQ

SMET
NC
GND
PKS
NC
PKD
GND
SS
Pin
Name
Pin No.
Not connected
RTTY key input
AF output from receiver
• Connect to TNC or MCP receive data pin for digital operation.
• AF output level is independent of AF control setting.
• AF output level can be changed via Menu No. 34.
• Output impedance: 4.7 kΩ
Shield for pin 3
Squelch control
• Connect to TNC or MCP squelch control pin for digital operation.
• Prevents the TNC from transmitting while the receiver squelch is open.
• Squelch open: Low impedance
• Squelch closed: High impedance
S-meter output
Not connected
Chassis ground
Transceiver PTT line control
• Connect to TNC or MCP transmit/receive switching pin for digital operation.
• Microphone audio input is muted when the transceiver is switched to the transmit mode.
Not connected
Microphone audio input
• Connect to TNC or MCP transmit data pin for digital operation.
Shield for pin 11
PTT control (in parallel with MIC jack) for connecting a footswitch or other external controller
Function
63
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
MAINTENANCE
SERVICE NOTE
Dear YL/OM,
If you desire to correspond on a technical or operational
problem, please make your note short, complete, and to
the point. Help us help you by providing the following:
1 Model and serial number of equipment
2 Question or problem you are having
3 Other equipment in your station pertaining to the
problem
4 Meter readings
5 Other related information (Menu setup, mode,
frequency, button sequence to induce
malfunction, etc.)
CAUTION: DO NOT PACK THE EQUIPMENT IN CRUSHED
NEWSPAPERS FOR SHIPMENT! EXTENSIVE DAMAGE MAY
RESULT DURING ROUGH HANDLING OR SHIPPING.
Note:
x Record the date of purchase, serial number and dealer from
whom the transceiver was purchased.
x For your own information, retain a written record of any
maintenance performed on the transceiver.
x When claiming warranty service, please include a photocopy of
the bill of sale, or other proof-of-purchase showing the date of
sale.
CLEANING
The buttons, controls and case of the transceiver are
likely to become soiled after extended use. Remove the
controls from the transceiver and clean them with a
neutral detergent and warm water. Use a neutral
detergent (no strong chemicals) and a damp cloth to
clean the case.
GENERAL INFORMATION
Your transceiver has been factory aligned and tested to
specification before shipment. Under normal
circumstances, the transceiver will operate in
accordance with these operating instructions. All
adjustable trimmers, coils and resistors in the
transceiver were preset at the factory. They should only
be readjusted by a qualified technician who is familiar
with this transceiver and has the necessary test
equipment. Attempting service or alignment without
factory authorization can void the transceiver warranty.
When operated properly, the transceiver will provide
years of service and enjoyment without requiring further
realignment. The information in this section gives some
general service procedures requiring little or no test
equipment.
SERVICE
If it is ever necessary to return the equipment to your
dealer or service center for repair, pack the transceiver
in its original box and packing material. Include a full
description of the problems experienced. Include both
your telephone number and fax number (if available)
along with your name and address in case the service
technician needs to call for further explanation while
investigating your problem. Don’t return accessory
items unless you feel they are directly related to the
service problem.
You may return your transceiver for service to the
authorized KENWOOD dealer from whom you
purchased it or any authorized KENWOOD service
center. A copy of the service report will be returned with
the transceiver. Please do not send subassemblies or
printed circuit boards. Send the complete transceiver.
Tag all returned items with your name and call sign for
identification. Please mention the model and serial
number of the transceiver in any communication
regarding the problem.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
64
6 Adjust the TC500 trimmer to minimize the frequency
difference between the received 800 Hz tone and
the 800 Hz sidetone.
7 Re-install the protective cover on the PC board
(6 screws).
8 Re-install the bottom case (8 screws).
ACCESSING THE INTERNAL FUSE
1 Remove the top case (8 screws) from the
transceiver.
2 Remove the 12 screws that fasten the inner cover to
the chassis.
3 Open the inner cover.
• Be careful not to damage the speaker cable
connected to the PC board.
16 MAINTENANCE
INTERNAL ADJUSTMENTS
REFERENCE FREQUENCY CALIBRATION
Note:
x The transceiver is adjusted at the factory prior to shipping.
Unless necessary, DO NOT perform this adjustment.
x If you have installed the optional SO-2 unit, you cannot perform
this adjustment.
1 Set the following on the transceiver:
• Mode: CW
• AF control: Center
• Menu No. 20 (CW RX pitch): 800 Hz
• IF SHIFT control: Center
• Receive bandwidth {page 38}: 600 Hz
• RIT function: OFF
• Break-in function (VOX): OFF
2 Remove the bottom case (8 screws) from the
transceiver.
3 Remove the protective cover installed on the PC
board (6 screws).
4 Tune in a standard frequency station such as WWV
or WWVH at, for example, 10.000 or 15.000 MHz.
• Adjust the Tuning control so that the display
reads the exact frequency of the station.
• You should hear a beat tone of approximately
800 Hz.
• For 800 Hz:
faf = (fdisplay/20.000 x ∆freference) + 800 Hz
where ∆freference is the shift from the 20 MHz
reference frequency
5 Close your CW key and you will hear a transmit
sidetone of approximately 800 Hz.
• This sidetone produces a double beat tone when
it combines with the received signal.
• Adjust the AF control to hear the double beat
clearly.
• For 800 Hz:
fsidetone = 800 Hz ±50 ppm (= 800 ±0.04 Hz)
where ∆freference is the shift from the 20 MHz
reference frequency
TC500
Fuse (4A)
65
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1 Switch ON the DC power supply.
2 Inspect the power cable. Confirm
polarities are correct.
Red: positive (+); Black: negative (–)
3 Confirm the connections to the DC
power supply are secure.
4 Look for the cause of the blown fuse.
After inspecting and correcting any
problems, install a new fuse of the
specified rating.
1 Correct the input voltage or use a 12
to 16 V battery.
2 Review “MICROPROCESSOR
RESET”. After understanding what
data will be lost, do a Partial Reset.
If the problem remains, do a Full
Reset.
Have a new battery installed by your
dealer or at a KENWOOD Service
Center.
1 Review “WRITING CONVENTIONS
FOLLOWED”.
2 Press [F.LOCK] to switch OFF
function.
3 Review “MICROPROCESSOR
RESET”. After understanding what
data will be lost, do a Partial Reset.
If the problem remains, do a Full
Reset.
4 Stop operating the Tuning control,
then press the appropriate buttons.
Press [F.LOCK] to switch OFF function.
1 Change Menu No. 32 to OFF.
2 Turn the DSP SLOPE (LOW) control
counterclockwise and the DSP
SLOPE (HIGH) control clockwise.
3 Press [N.R.] to switch OFF function.
4 Press [B.C.] to switch OFF function.
16 MAINTENANCE
TROUBLESHOOTING
The problems described in this table are commonly encountered operational malfunctions. These types of difficulties
are usually caused by improper hook-up, accidental incorrect control settings, or operator error due to incomplete
programming. These problems are usually not caused by circuit failure. Please review this table, and the appropriate
section(s) of this instruction manual, before assuming your transceiver is defective.
Note:
x Due to frequency relationships of some circuits in this transceiver, beat tones may be heard on the following frequencies: 10.000 MHz,
20.000 MHz and 30.000 MHz. This is not a fault.
x Placing a powered handy transceiver near this transceiver may cause noise in this transceiver.
The transceiver will
not power up after
connecting a
13.8 V DC power
supply and pressing
[POWER]. Nothing
appears on the
display, and no
receiver noise is
heard.
After switching ON the
power, the transceiver
does not function
normally. For
example, no digits or
incorrect digits appear
on the display.
After switching ON the
transceiver,
“14.000.00 MHz USB”
appears and all data
is lost; without doing
Full Reset.
The transceiver does
not respond correctly
after pressing button
or key combinations,
or turning controls per
instructions in this
manual.
Page
Ref.
13
2
2
2
2
48
39
i
48
48
7
48
Problem Probable Cause Corrective Action
1 DC power supply is OFF.
2 Faulty power cable
3 The power cable is not connected
securely.
4 Power cable fuse is open.
1 The input voltage is outside 13.8 V
DC ±15% (11.7 to 15.8 V DC).
2 The microprocessor has
malfunctioned.
The backup lithium battery voltage is
too low.
1 Procedures are not being followed
precisely.
2 The Frequency Lock function is
ON.
3 The microprocessor and its
memory need resetting.
4 The buttons on the transceiver are
unavailable while operating the
Tuning control.
The Frequency Lock function is ON.
1 The filter for digital operation is
selected.
2 The DSP SLOPE (LOW) control or
DSP SLOPE (HIGH) control was
incorrectly set.
3 Noise Reduction 1 or 2 is ON.
4 Beat Cancel is ON.
The frequency
cannot be changed.
SSB audio quality is
very poor; the high
or low audio
frequencies are
absent.
18
37
38
38
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
66
16 MAINTENANCE
1 The SQL control is fully clockwise.
2 The Attenuator function is ON.
3 [SEND] was pressed, and the
transceiver is now in transmit
mode.
4 Mic [PTT] is pressed.
5 The receive bandwidth was
incorrectly set.
6 The wrong antenna connector
(ANT 1/ANT 2) was selected.
7 The receive preamplifier is OFF.
The RF control was set too low.
The wrong modulation mode was
selected.
1 The SQL control was not set
correctly.
2 Less than two memory channels
were unlocked.
3 Less than two memory channels
were programmed.
With Group Scan selected, the
channel you want to scan is in a
different group.
The start and end frequencies are
identical.
The impedance of the coaxial cable
and antenna was not matched.
• Tuning does not successfully finish
depending on conditions although
the SWR meter indicates smaller
than 3:1.
The SWR of the antenna system is too
high.
1 The microphone plug was not
inserted completely into the MIC
connector.
2 The Transmit Inhibit function is ON.
3 CW or FSK was selected instead of
a voice mode.
4 The filter for digital operation was
selected.
5 The wrong antenna connector
(ANT 1/ANT 2) was selected.
No signals are
received or receive
sensitivity seems
poor.
No signals are
received or receive
sensitivity seems
poor; S-meter is
reading full scale.
Received signals are
totally unintelligible.
Memory Scan will not
start scanning.
Memory Scan will not
scan one of the
stored channels; the
desired channel is
NOT locked out.
Program Scan will
not start scanning.
Tuning does not
finish successfully.
The internal tuner is
bypassed
immediately after
tuning is started.
You cannot transmit
even though you
press Mic [PTT] or
transmissions result
in no contacts.
1 Turn the SQL control
counterclockwise.
2 Press [ATT] to switch OFF function.
3 Press [SEND] to return to receive
mode.
4 Release Mic [PTT].
5 Review sections “IF FILTER” and
“CHANGING RECEIVE
BANDWIDTH”, and set the controls
accordingly.
6 Press [ANT] to select the other
antenna connector.
7 Press [PRE-AMP] to switch ON
function.
Turn the RF control fully clockwise.
Press [LSB/USB], [CW/FSK], or
[FM/AM] to select the correct
modulation mode.
1 Adjust the SQL control to just
eliminate background noise.
2 Unlock at least two memory
channels.
3 Store data in at least two memory
channels.
Select the group that contains the
memory channel you want to scan.
Store different start and end
frequencies.
Adjust the antenna system to lower the
SWR.
Adjust the antenna system to lower the
SWR.
1 Turn OFF the power, ensure the MIC
connector has no foreign objects in
it, then plug in the connector.
Secure the connector with the
locking ring.
2 Change Menu No. 38 to OFF.
3 Press [LSB/USB] or [FM/AM] to
select a voice mode.
4 Change Menu No. 32 to OFF.
5 Press [ANT] to select the other
antenna connector.
14
37
15
15
36,37
48
37
13
14
14
44
39
47
43
1
52
3
18
14
18
48
67
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
16 MAINTENANCE
Attempting to
transmit results in the
“HELLO” message
appearing and the
receive mode being
restored.
The transceiver has
low transmit power.
VOX does not
operate.
Linear amplifier does
not operate.
You cannot access
and use 10 meter
band repeaters.
Digital operation
results in few or no
connects or contacts
with other stations.
Attempts at
controlling the
transceiver by
computer have failed.
1
1
2
2
15
1
17
18
61
24
24
62
23,30,
32
18


60
51

1 Check the antenna connection.
Correct as necessary.
2 Reduce the SWR of the antenna
system.
3 Correct the input voltage or use a
12 to 16 V battery.
4 Use the provided or an optional DC
power cable.
1 When in SSB or AM mode,
increase the microphone gain.
2 Check antenna connections.
Confirm that the antenna tuner is
reporting a low SWR.
Increase the gain via Menu No. 16.
1 Change Menu No. 39 to ON.
2 Inspect the REMOTE connector
wiring and correct as necessary.
1 Review “FM REPEATER
OPERATION” and select the
correct frequency and type of
subtone.
2 You must transmit on the
repeater’s input frequency and
receive on the repeater’s output
frequency. Refer to “FM
REPEATER OPERATION”.
1 Re-check all connections using this
manual, your TNC/MCP manual,
and your computer hardware
manual as references.
2 Confirm that the RIT and XIT
functions are switched OFF.
Confirm that you are NOT
operating split frequency.
3 Adjust TX and RX levels using
Menu Nos. 33 and 34, and level
controls on your TNC/MCP.
4 Reorient/relocate your antenna or
increase your antenna gain.
5 Set the TNC/MCP TX delay time to
more than 300 ms.
1 Check the cable and cable
connections.
2 Use the same parameters in the
terminal program and the
transceiver. Refer to
“COMMUNICATION
PARAMETERS”.
3 Disconnect the computer from the
transceiver, and run a utility
program to test the computer serial
port.
1 The antenna was not connected
correctly.
2 The impedances of the antenna
and transceiver are not properly
matched.
3 The input voltage is outside 13.8 V
DC ±15% (11.7 to 15.8 V DC).
4 An inappropriate DC power cable is
being used.
1 The microphone gain was set too
low.
2 Poor antenna system connections
are causing high SWR.
The VOX gain was set too low.
1 The linear amplifier control relay is
OFF.
2 The REMOTE connector wiring is
wrong or faulty.
1 The repeater requires a subtone
frequency for access.
2 You are not operating split
frequency.
1 Physical connections between the
transceiver, computer, and TNC or
MCP are incorrect, or software
settings in the TNC or MCP are
wrong.
2 Different transmit and receive
frequencies are being used.
3 The levels between the transceiver
and the TNC/MCP are incorrect.
4 Your transmitted signal or the
incoming receive signal is too
weak.
5 The TX delay time parameter in
your TNC/MCP was incorrectly set.
1 Problem with the RS-232C cable
that connects the computer to the
transceiver.
2 Communication parameters set in
your terminal program do not match
transceiver parameters.
3 The serial port on your computer is
not functioning correctly.
68
SPECIFICATIONS
T
R
A
N
S
M
I
T
T
E
R
G
E
N
E
R
A
L
Mode
Number of memory channels
Antenna impedance
Supply voltage
Grounding method
Current
Usable temperature range
Frequency stability (–10°C ~ 50°C)
Frequency accuracy (at room temperature)
Dimensions [W x H x D]
(Projections included)
Weight
Frequency range
Output power
Modulation
J3E (LSB, USB), A1A (CW), A3E (AM),
F3E (FM), F1D (FSK)
100
50 Ω
(with Antenna Tuner 16.7 ~ 150 Ω)
DC 13.8 V ± 15%
Negative ground
20.5 A
2 A
–10°C ~ 50°C (+14°F ~ 122°F)
Within ±10 PPM
Within ±10 PPM
270 x 96 x 271 mm / 10.6 x 3.8 x 10.7 in.
(281 x 107 x 314 mm / 11.1 x 4.2 x 12.4 in.)
Approx. 6.8 kg (15 lbs)
1.8 ~ 2.0 MHz
3.5 ~ 4.0 MHz
7.0 ~ 7.3 MHz
10.1 ~ 10.15 MHz
14.0 ~ 14.35 MHz
18.068 ~ 18.168 MHz
21.0 ~ 21.45 MHz
24.89 ~ 24.99 MHz
28.0 ~ 29.7 MHz
160 m band
80 m band
40 m band
30 m band
20 m band
17 m band
15 m band
12 m band
10 m band
6 m band
Max.
Min.
Max.
Min.
SSB, CW,
FSK, FM
AM
Transmit (max.)
Receive (no signal)
SSB
FM
AM
1.8 ~ 29.7 MHz
50 ~ 54 MHz
Unwanted sideband suppression
(modulation frequency 1.0 kHz)
40 dB or more
±5 kHz or less
±2.5 kHz or less
±9.99 kHz
600 Ω
Wide
Narrow
1 2
3
4
5
1.81 MHz: Europe, France, Holland; 1.83 MHz: Belgium, Spain
1.85 MHz: France, Holland, Belgium, Spain
3.8 MHz: Europe, France, Holland, Belgium, Spain
7.1 MHz: Europe, France, Holland, Belgium, Spain
Belgium, Spain: 10 W fixed on 160 m band
1
2
3
4
5
TS-570D TS-570S
–60 dB or less
Carrier suppression
Spurious emissions
40 dB or more
100 W
5 W
25 W
5 W
Balanced
Reactance
Low level
–50 dB or less
Maximum frequency deviation
(FM)
XIT shift frequency range
Microphone impedance
50.0 ~ 54.0 MHz
69
SPECIFICATIONS
R
E
C
E
I
V
E
R
SSB, CW,
FSK, AM
500 kHz ~ 1.705 MHz
1.705 MHz ~ 30 MHz
50 MHz ~ 54 MHz
28 MHz ~ 30 MHz
50 MHz ~ 54 MHz
Circuit type
Frequency range
Intermediate frequency
1st: 73.05 MHz; 2nd: 8.83 MHz;
3rd: 455 kHz (FM only)
4 µV or less
0.2 µV or less
0.13 µV or less
0.13 µV or less
31.6 µV or less
2 µV or less
1.3 µV or less
1.3 µV or less
0.25 µV or less
0.25 µV or less
–6 dB: 2.2 kHz, –60 dB: 4.4 kHz
–6 dB: 4 kHz, –50 dB: 20 kHz
–6 dB: 12 kHz, –50 dB: 25 kHz
70 dB or more
70 dB or more
70 dB or more
70 dB or more
±9.99 kHz
20 µV or less
2 µV or less
2 µV or less
0.25 µV or less
0.25 µV or less
1.5 W or more
8 Ω
Specifications are subject to change without notice or obligation due to ongoing technological developments.
SSB, CW, FSK
(at 10 dB (S+N)/N)
AM
(at 10 dB (S+N)/N)
FM (at 12 dB SINAD)
500 kHz ~ 1.705 MHz
1.705 MHz ~ 24.5 MHz
24.5 MHz ~ 30 MHz
50 MHz ~ 54 MHz
500 kHz ~ 1.705 MHz
1.705 MHz ~ 24.5 MHz
24.5 MHz ~ 30 MHz
50 MHz ~ 54 MHz
28 MHz ~ 30 MHz
50 MHz ~ 54 MHz
SSB, CW, FSK
AM
FM
Double conversion superheterodyne
FM only: Triple conversion superheterodyne
Sensitivity
Selectivity
Image rejection
Squelch
sensitivity
Audio output (8 Ω, 10% distortion)
Audio output impedance
TS-570D TS-570S
500 kHz ~ 30 MHz 500 kHz ~ 60 MHz
1.8 MHz ~ 30 MHz
50 MHz ~ 54 MHz
1.8 MHz ~ 30 MHz
50 MHz ~ 54 MHz
RIT shift frequency range
1st IF rejection
FM
70
q APPENDIX
APPENDIX: COM CONNECTOR PROTOCOL
HARDWARE DESCRIPTION
This transceiver uses a full-duplex, asynchronous, serial
interface for communicating through the male 9-PIN
RS-232C COM connector. Bytes are constructed with 1
start bit, 8 data bits, and 1 stop bit (4800 bps can be
configured for 1 or 2 stop bits). No parity is used. The
pinout and the pin functions of the COM connector are
as shown below:
COM
Rear panel view
RXD: Transmit data is serial data transferred from the
transceiver to the computer.
TXD: Receive data is serial data transferred from the
computer to the transceiver.
GND: Signal ground pin
RTS: This signal is applied to the transceiver. It is used
to inhibit transmit data from the transceiver when the
computer is not ready to receive the data. Transmit
data is inhibited when the level is low.
CTS: This signal is applied from the transceiver. It is
used to inhibit transmit data from the computer when
the transceiver is not ready to receive the data.
Transmit data is stopped when the level is low.
CONTROL OPERATION
Most computers handle data in the form of “bits” and
“bytes”. A bit is the smallest piece of information that
the computer can handle. A byte is composed of eight
bits. This is the most convenient form for most
computer data. This data may be sent in the form of
either serial or parallel data strings. The parallel method
is faster but more complicated, while the serial method
is slower and requires less complicated equipment. The
serial form is, therefore, a less expensive alternative.
Serial data transmission uses time-division methods
over a single line. Using a single line also offers the
advantage of reducing the number of errors due to line
noise.
Only 3 lines are required theoretically for control of the
transceiver via the computer:
• Transmit data
• Receive data
• Ground
From a practical standpoint, it is also necessary to
incorporate some means of controlling when this data
transfer will occur. The computer and transceiver
cannot be allowed to send data at the same time! The
required control is achieved by using the RTS and CTS
lines.
For example, the transceiver is placed into the transmit
mode whenever the character string “TX;” is sent from
the computer. The character string “TX;” is called a
computer control command. It tells the transceiver what
to do. There are numerous commands available for
control of the transceiver. These commands may be
incorporated into a computer program written in any
high level language. Programming methods vary from
computer to computer; therefore, refer to the instruction
manuals provided with the terminal program and
computer.
1 2 3 4 5
9 8 7 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Transmit data
Receive data

Signal ground

Receive enable
Transmit enable


Output
Input


Input
Output

COM
Pin No.
COM Pin Name
(Ref. : Computer)
Function
(Ref. : Transceiver)
I/O
NC
RXD
TXD
NC
GND
NC
RTS
CTS
NC
71
APPENDIX q
COMPUTER CONTROL COMMANDS
A computer control command is composed of an
alphabetical command, various parameters, and the
terminator that signals the end of the control command.
EXAMPLE: Command to set VFO A to 7 MHz
Commands can be classified as shown below:
For example, note the following in the case of the FA
command (Frequency of VFO A):
• To set the frequency to 7 MHz, the following
command is sent from the computer to the
transceiver:
“FA00007000000;” (Set command)
• To read the frequency of VFO A, the following
command is sent from the computer to the
transceiver:
“FA;” (Read command)
• When the Read command above has been sent, the
following command is returned to the computer:
“FA00007000000;” (Answer command)
Note:
x Do not use the control characters 00 to 1Fh since they are either
ignored or cause a “?” answer.
x Program execution may be delayed while turning the Tuning
control rapidly.
x Receive data is not processed if the frequency is entered from
the keypad.
s Alphabetical Commands
A command consists of 2 alphabetical characters.
You may use either lower or upper case characters.
The commands available for this transceiver are
listed in the Alphabetical Command Table {page 72}.
s Parameters
Parameters are used to specify information
necessary to implement the desired command. The
parameters to be used for each command are
predetermined. The number of digits assigned to
each parameter is also predetermined. Refer to the
Parameter Table {page 73} and the Computer
Control Command Tables {page 75} to configure the
appropriate parameters.
When configuring parameters, be careful not to
make the following mistakes.
(correct parameter: “IS+1000”)
IS1000; Not enough parameters specified
(No direction given for the IF shift)
IS+100; Not enough digits
(Only three frequency digits given)
IS + 1000; Unnecessary characters between
parameters
IS+10000; Too many digits
(Five frequency digits given)
Note: If a particular parameter is not applicable to this
transceiver, the parameter digits should be filled using any
character except the ASCII control codes (00 to 1Fh) and the
terminator (;).
s Terminator
To signal the end of a command, it is necessary to
use a semicolon (;). The digit where this special
character must appear differs depending on the
command used.
s Error Messages
In addition to the Answer command, the transceiver
can send the following error messages.
FA 00007000000 ;
Alphabetical command
Parameters
Terminator
Input
command
(Input to the
transceiver)
Output
command
(From the
transceiver)
Set command
(Sets a
particular condition)
Read command
(Reads an answer)
Answer command
(Transmits a condition)
Computer
control
commands
Error
Message
Reason for Error
• Command syntax was incorrect.
• Command was not executed due to
the current status of the transceiver
(even though the command syntax
was correct).
A communication error occurred such
as an overrun or framing error during a
serial data transmission.
Receive data was sent but processing
was not completed.
?;
E;
O;
Note: Occasionally this message may not
appear due to microprocessor transients in the
transceiver.
72
q APPENDIX
s Alphabetical Command Table
Function Command
DRU or CW message playback
Sets or reads transmit power.
Sets or reads Speech Processor
(OFF/ON).
Sets or reads power (OFF/ON).
Sets or reads CW RX pitch.
Sets or reads RF ATT (attenuator).
Clears RIT frequency.
Lowers RIT frequency.
Sets or reads RF gain.
Selects a meter function or reads
meter values.
Sets or reads RIT (OFF/ON).
Raises RIT frequency.
Selects receive mode.
Sets or reads Scan (OFF/ON).
Sets or reads Semi Break-in delay time.
Sets or reads high cut-off frequency.
Sets or reads low cut-off frequency.
Reads S-meter.
Sets or reads squelch level.
Resets the transceiver.
Sets or reads subtone number (01~39).
Sets or reads Subtone (OFF/ON).
Selects transmit mode.
MIC UP function
Sets or reads VOX delay time.
Sets or reads VOX gain.
Triggers the Voice Synthesizer for
message output.
Sets VOX (OFF/ON).
Sets XIT (OFF/ON).
PB
PC
PR
PS
PT
RA
RC
RD
RG
RM
RT
RU
RX
SC
SD
SH
SL
SM
SQ
SR
TN
TO
TX
UP
VD
VG
VR
VX
XT
Function Command
Antenna Tuner THRU/IN-LINE,
and tuning START/CANCEL
Sets or reads AF gain.
Auto information
Selects antenna connector
(ANT 1/ANT 2).
Sets or reads Beat Cancel.
Reads busy signals.
Sets or reads CW Auto Zero-beat
(OFF/ON).
Sets or reads CTCSS tone number
(01~39).
Sets or reads CTCSS (OFF/ON).
MIC DOWN function
Sets or reads Menu.
Sets or reads VFO A frequency.
Sets or reads VFO B frequency.
Sets RX (VFO A/B, memory channel).
Fine function (OFF/ON)
Sets TX (VFO A/B, memory channel).
Sets or reads filter bandwidth.
Sets or reads AGC time constant.
Reads model number of the transceiver.
Reads status of the transceiver.
Sets or reads IF shift.
Sets or reads keying speed while using
the KY command or the built-in keyer.
Converts input characters into Morse
code.
Sets or reads Frequency Lock
(OFF/ON).
DRU or CW message recording
Sets or reads memory channels.
Sets or reads modulation modes.
Sets or reads MIC gain.
Reads memory.
Writes into memory.
Sets or reads Noise Blanker (OFF/ON).
Sets or reads Noise Reduction.
Sets or reads Preamplifier (OFF/ON).
AC
AG
AI
AN
BC
BY
CA
CN
CT
DN
EX
FA
FB
FR
FS
FT
FW
GT
ID
IF
IS
KS
KY
LK
LM
MC
MD
MG
MR
MW
NB
NR
PA
73
APPENDIX q
s Parameter Table
t a m r o F
. o N
e m a N
f o . o N
s t i g i D
t a m r o F
1 W S 1 : 0 F F O N O : 1
2 E D O M 1
: 0
: 1
: 2
: 3
: 4
n o i t c e l e s o N
B S L
B S U
W C
M F
M A : 5
K S F : 6
R - W C : 7
: 8 n o i t c e l e s o N
R - K S F : 9
3 N O I T C N U F 1
: 0
: 1
: 2
A O F V
B O F V
y r o m e M
4 Y C N E U Q E R F 1 1
. z H n i d e t n e s e r p e R
s i 0 0 0 0 3 2 4 1 0 0 0 : . x E
z H M 0 3 2 . 4 1
5
T I X / T I R
Y C N E U Q E R F
5
, ” – “ r o ” + “ s i t i g i d t s r i f e h T
s t i g i d r u o f g n i n i a m e r e h t d n a
. z H n i y c n e u q e r f e h t e t a c i d n i
z H k 2 3 . 5 + s i 0 2 3 5 + : . x E
7
Y R O M E M
L E N N A H C
2 . 9 9 ~ 0 0 g n i s u d e t n e s e r p e R
9
Y R O M E M
L E N N A H C
A T A D T I L P S
1
) . q e r f t r a t S ( e v i e c e R : 0
) . q e r f d n E ( t i m s n a r T : 1
) 9 9 ~ 0 9 . h C : . q e r f d n E / t r a t S (
0 1
Y R O M E M
T U O K C O L
1
: 0
: 1
t u o d e k c o l t o N
t u o d e k c o L
1 1 X R / X T 1
: 0
: 1
e v i e c e R
t i m s n a r T
4 1
E N O T
R E B M U N
2
r e b m u n e n o t e h t s t n e s e r p e R
e n o t b u s e h t e e S . ) 9 3 ~ 1 0 (
. 5 2 e g a p n o e l b a t y c n e u q e r f
6 1
L E D O M
R E B M U N
3
f o e p y t e h t s t n e s e r p e R
. r e v i e c s n a r t
8 1 0 : S 0 7 5 - S T
7 1 0 : D 0 7 5 - S T
2 2
R E T E M
E U L A V
4
8 0 0 0 ~ 0 0 0 0 : d n a m m o c M R
5 1 0 0 ~ 0 0 0 0 : d n a m m o c M S
. t u p t u o e r a s e u l a v e v i t a l e R
4 2
R E T E M
H C T I W S
1
: 0
: 1
: 2
: 3
n o i t c e l e s o N
R W S
P M O C
C L A
7 2
K C A B Y A L P
L E N N A H C
1
: 0
: 1
: 2
: 3
k c a b y a l p o N
s l e c n a c d n a m m o c t e S A
. k c a b y a l p
1 l e n n a h C
2 l e n n a h C
3 l e n n a h C
0 3
A N N E T N A
R E N U T
1
: 0
: 1
u r h t r e n u t a n n e t n A
e n i l - n i r e n u t a n n e t n A
1 3 N I A G 3
g n i s u d e t n e s e r p e R
. ) . x a m ( 5 5 2 ~ ) . n i m ( 0 0 0
0 0 1 ~ 0 0 0 : d n a m m o c G M
2 3 R E B M U N I A 1
: 0
: 1
: 2
: 3
F F O I A
s t i s t u p t u o d n a m m o c F I
d n a m m o c r e w s n A
. y l l a c i d o i r e p
, s e g n a h c r e t e m a r a p r o F
r e w s n A g n i d n o p s e r r o c e h t
. t u p t u o s i d n a m m o c
. 2 d n a 1 h t o B
3 3
A N N E T N A
R E B M U N
1
: 1
: 2
1 T N A
2 T N A
t a m r o F
. o N
e m a N
. o N
f o
s t i g i D
t a m r o F
5 3
U N E M
R E B M U N
3 . 1 5 0 ~ 0 0 0 g n i s u d e t n e s e r p e R
6 3
U N E M
N O I T C E L E S
4 . 4 7 e g a p n o e l b a t e e S
8 3
R E T L I F
H T D I W
4
g n i s u d e t n e s e r p e R
. 9 9 9 9 ~ 0 0 0 0
9 3
E M I T C G A
T N A T S N O C
3
t s a F : 2 0 0
w o l S : 4 0 0
0 4
T F I H S F I
N O I T C E R I D
1
t f i h s . q e r f d r a w p U : ” + “
) ” “ r o (
t f i h s . q e r f d r a w n w o D : ” – “
1 4
T F I H S F I
Y C N E U Q E R F
4
g n i s u z H n i d e t n e s e r p e R
. 0 0 1 1 ~ 0 0 0 0
2 4
R E Y E K
D E E P S
3
r e p s d r o w n i d e t n e s e r p e R
~ ) . n i m ( 0 1 0 g n i s u e t u n i m
. ) . x a m ( 0 6 0
3 4
R E Y E K
E G A S S E M
4 2 . e g a s s e m W C e h t s n i a t n o C
4 4
R E Y E K
R E F F U B
1
: 0
: 1
e l b a l i a v a e c a p s r e f f u B
e l b a l i a v a t o n e c a p s r e f f u B
5 4
D A O L
E G A S S E M
1
: 0
: 1
: 2
: 3
t e S A . g n i d r o c e r t o N
s l e c n a c d n a m m o c
. g n i d r o c e r
1 l e n n a h C
2 l e n n a h C
3 l e n n a h C
6 4 L E V E L 3
g n i s u d e t n e s e r p e R
. ) . x a m ( 5 5 2 ~ ) . n i m ( 0 0 0
7 4
R E W O P
L O R T N O C
3
g n i s u s t t a w n i d e t n e s e r p e R
. s p e t s W 5 , 0 0 1 ~ 5 0 0
9 4
I M E S
N I - K A E R B
E M I T Y A L E D
4
g n i s u c e s m n i d e t n e s e r p e R
. s p e t s s m 0 5 , 0 0 0 1 ~ 0 0 0 0
0 5
M E T S Y S
T E S E R
1
: 1
: 2
t e s e R l a i t r a P
( N O R E W O P + ] B / A [ )
t e s e R l l u F
( N O R E W O P + ] B = A [ )
1 5
Y A L E D X O V
E M I T
4
g n i s u c e s m n i d e t n e s e r p e R
. 0 0 0 3 ~ 0 0 0 0
2 5
X R W C
H C T I P
2
g n i s u d e t n e s e r p e R
~ ) . n i m z H 0 0 4 ( 0 0
. ) . x a m z H 0 0 0 1 ( 2 1
3 5 E P O L S P S D 2
0 2 ~ 0 0 g n i s u d e t n e s e r p e R
f f o - t u c h g i H
z H k 0 . 1 : 0 2 z H k 0 . 5 : 0 0
f f o - t u c w o L
z H 0 0 0 1 : 0 2 z H 0 1 : 0 0
4 5 N I A G X O V 3
g n i s u d e t n e s e r p e R
. ) . x a m ( 9 0 0 ~ ) . n i m ( 1 0 0
5 5
E C I O V
L L A C E R
1 : 1 1 e c i o V 2 e c i o V : 2
6 5
E S I O N
N O I T C U D E R
1
: 0
: 1
: 2
F F O n o i t c u d e R e s i o N
1 n o i t c u d e R e s i o N
2 n o i t c u d e R e s i o N
7 5
T A E B
L E C N A C
1
: 0
: 1
: 2
F F O l e c n a C t a e B
N O l e c n a C t a e B
l e c n a C t a e B d e c n a h n E
N O
74
q APPENDIX
s Menu Selection Table for “EX” Command
u n e M
. o N
m e t I u n e M
r e t e m a r a P
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 7 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 9 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 2 1 0 0
0 0 s s e n t h g i r b y a l p s i D F F O 4 d 3 d 2 d 1 d
1 0 l e v e l t u p t u o p e e B F F O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
2 0 ] N W O D [ / ] P U [ 0 0 1 0 0 5 0 0 0 1
3 0
H C / I T L U M l o r t n o c
) M A / K S F / W C / B S S (
1 5 0 1
4 0 H C / I T L U M ) M F ( l o r t n o c 1 5 0 1 5 . 2 1 0 2 5 2
5 0 H C / I T L U M ) . q e r f f f o s d n u o r ( l o r t n o c F F O N O
6 0
H C / I T L U M l o r t n o c
) d n a b t s a c d a o r b M A (
0 1 9
7 0 t i l p s O F V - y r o m e M F F O N O
8 0 . q e r f d e x i f / e l b a n u T F F O N O
9 0 d l o H n a c S m a r g o r P F F O N O
0 1 e m u s e r n a c S O T O C
1 1 e d o m X R n i r e n u t a n n e t n A F F O N O
2 1 t n a t s n o c e m i T 2 R N 5 . 7 0 2
3 1 ) M A / B S S ( r e t l i f X T 4 . 2 0 . 2
4 1 r e z i l a u q e X T F F O B H P F B B C
5 1 r o s s e c o r p h c e e p S 0 5 0 1 5 1 0 2 5 2
6 1 n i a g X O V 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
7 1 ) M F ( n i a g C I M w o L h g i H
8 1 . q e r f e n o t b u S 9 3 0 0 ~ 1 0 0 0 : 9 3 ~ 1 0 . s o N y c n e u q e r f e n o t b u S
9 1 e p y t e n o t b u S B C
0 2 e n o t e d i s X T / h c t i p X R W C 0 0 4 0 5 4 0 0 5 0 5 5 0 0 6 0 5 6 0 0 7 0 5 7 0 0 8 0 5 8 0 0 9 0 5 9 0 0 0 1
1 2 e m u l o v e n o t e d i s X T F F O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
2 2 y e k c i t a m o t u a - i m e S F F O N O
3 2 t a e p e r k c a b y a l P F F O N O
4 2 l a v r e t n i t a e p e r k c a b y a l P 0 6 0 0 ~ 0 0 0 0 : c e s 0 6 ~ 0
5 2 e m u l o v k c a b y a l P F F O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
6 2 g n i t h g i e w o t u A F F O N O
7 2 d e s r e v e r g n i t h g i e w o t u A F F O N O
8 2 k c a b y a l p r e v o y t i r o i r p g n i y e K F F O N O
9 2 t f i h s K S F 0 7 1 0 0 2 5 2 4 0 5 8
0 3 y t i r a l o p K S F F F O N O
1 3 . q e r f e n o t K S F 5 7 2 1 5 2 1 2
2 3 r e t l i f n o i t a r e p o l a t i g i D F F O 0 0 2 1 0 0 3 K S P
3 3 ) X T C N T / P C M ( l e v e l t u p n i F A 0 1 2
4 3 ) X R C N T / P C M ( l e v e l t u p t u o F A 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
5 3 M O C s r e t e m a r a p n o i t a c i n u m m o c 1 - 2 1 1 - 4 2 1 - 8 4 2 - 8 4 1 - 6 9 1 - 2 9 1 1 - 4 8 3 1 - 6 7 5
6 3 e l b a n e r e f s n a r t a t a D F F O N O
7 3 d o h t e m r e f s n a r t a t a D F F O N O
8 3 t i b i h n i X T F F O N O
9 3 y a l e r r e i f i l p m a r a e n i L F F O N O
0 4 r e t r e v s n a r T F F O 0 5 4 4 1 0 3 4
1 4 ] F P [
0 4 0 0 ~ 0 0 0 0 : 0 4 ~ 0 0 . s o N u n e M
3 8 0 0 ~ 0 8 0 0 : 1 5 ~ 8 4 . s o N u n e M
3 5 0 0 ~ 0 5 0 0 : 3 5 ~ 0 5 . s o N n o i t c n u F
6 7 0 0 ~ 0 6 0 0 : 6 7 ~ 0 6 . s o N n o i t c n u F
9 9 0 0 : F F O
2 4 c i M ] 1 F P [
3 4 c i M ] 2 F P [
4 4 c i M ] 3 F P [
5 4 c i M ] 4 F P [
6 4 r e t l i f F I F F O 0 0 8 1 0 0 5 0 7 2
7 4 e m u l o v r o t i n o m l a n g i s - d e t t i m s n a r T F F O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
8 4 T I R h t i w t a e b - o r e z o t u A F F O N O
9 4 e g n a h c t h g i e w - d e k c o l r e y e K 5 1 0 0 ~ 0 0 0 0 : 1 : 0 . 4 ~ 1 : 5 . 2
0 5 r e z i l a u q e X R F F O B H P F B B C
1 5 e g n a h c l e v e l 1 n o i t c u d e r e s i o N o t u A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
75
APPENDIX q
READING COMMAND TABLES
· Command
´ Name
Function of the command
¹ The format of the Set command is shown. When oblique lines are drawn in the 1st and 2nd columns, there is no Set
command.
' The format of the command for reading the transceiver’s current status is shown. When oblique lines are drawn in
the 1st and 2nd columns, there is no Read command.
' The format of the command output from the transceiver is shown. When oblique lines are drawn in the 1st and 2nd
columns, there is no Answer command.
¹ The number of command digits is shown.
· Corresponds to the parameter of the command format.
' Corresponds to the Format number in the Parameter Table. For the parameter formats, refer to the Parameter
Table {page 73}.
1 Indicates the function of the parameter.
COMPUTER CONTROL COMMAND TABLES
Note: Parameters that have a Parameter Function of “NOT USED” are not supported by this transceiver. Any character except the ASCII control
codes (00 to 1Fh) and the terminator (;) may be entered for those parameters.
Note:
P1 is used for Answer only.
Tuning cannot be started if P2 is in
the THRU state (If P2="0", selecting
"1" for P3 does not start tuning).
P1: RX THRU/IN
P2: TX THRU/IN
1 2
Parameter Format Parameter function
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
AC ANTENNA TUNER CONTROL
Antenna Tuner THRU/IN -LINE, and tuning
START/CANCEL
A C P2 P3
A C P1 P2 P3
A C
;
;
;
P1
P2
P3
30
30
1
TUNE THRU/IN
(Answer Only)
TUNE THRU/IN
TUNE OFF/ON
¹ · ' 1 ´
¹
'
'

·
1 2
Parameter Format Parameter function
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
AI AUTO INFORMATION
Auto information OFF/ON
A I P1
A I P1 ;
A I ;
;
P1 32 AI NUMBER
Note: For other commands,
controls whether changing a
parameter will or will not trigger the
corresponding Answer command
to be output.
Ex: For IF, the Answer command is
output if the step frequency or
RIT/XIT frequency is changed.
Switching the transceiver ON
restores "0".
Note:
P1 is used for Answer only.
Tuning cannot be started if P2 is in
the THRU state (If P2="0", selecting
"1" for P3 does not start tuning).
P1: RX THRU/IN
P2: TX THRU/IN
1 2
Parameter Format Parameter function
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
AC ANTENNA TUNER CONTROL
Antenna Tuner THRU/IN -LINE, and tuning
START/CANCEL
A C P2 P3
A C P1 P2 P3
A C
;
;
;
P1
P2
P3
30
30
1
TUNE THRU/IN
(Answer Only)
TUNE THRU/IN
TUNE OFF/ON
P1 33 ANTENNA
NUMBER
1 2
Parameter Format Parameter function
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
AN ANTENNA NUMBER
Selects antenna connector ANT 1/ ANT 2.
A N P1
A N P1 ;
A N ;
;
P1 31 AF GAIN
1 2
Parameter Format Parameter function
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
AG AF GAIN
Sets or reads AF gain.
P1 A G ;
A G ;
A G P1 ;
76
q APPENDIX
P1 1 BUSY OFF/ON
1 2
Parameter Format Parameter function
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
BY
Reads busy signals.
BUSY
B Y ;
B Y P1 ;
Parameter Format Parameter function
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Sets CW Auto Zero-Beat OFF/ON or reads status.
CA CW AUTO ZERO-BEAT
P1 1 CW AUTO ZERO-
BEAT OFF/ON
C A P1
C A P1 ;
C A ;
;
;
Parameter Format Parameter function
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Sets or reads CTCSS tone number(01~39).
CN CTCSS TONE NUMBER
P1 14 CTCSS TONE
NUMBER
C N P1
P1 C N
C N ;
;
Note:
Selecting No. 39 (1750 Hz)
switches OFF the CTCSS.
Parameter Format Parameter function
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Sets or reads CTCSS OFF/ON status.
CT CTCSS FUNCTION
P1 1 CTCSS OFF/ON
C T P1
C T P1 ;
C T ;
;
1 2
Parameter Format Parameter function
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
DN UP DOWN/UP
Microphone DOWN/UP function.
DN/UP ;
;
1 2
Parameter Format Parameter function
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Sets or reads Menu.
EX EXTENSION MENU
P1 35 MENU
NUMBER
P2 36 MENU
SELECTION
E X P1
E X ;
P1 E X ; P2
P2
1 2
Parameter Format Parameter function
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Sets or reads VFO A/ VFO B frequency.
FA FREQUENCY VFO A/ VFO B
P1 4 FREQUENCY
F P1
FB
; A/B
F A/B
F A/B P1
;
;
1 2
Parameter Format Parameter function
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Fine function OFF/ON
FS FINE STEP
P1 1 FINE OFF/ON
F S P1 ;
F S P1 ;
F S ;
1 2
Parameter Format Parameter function
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Sets RX/TX (VFO A/B, memory channel).
FR
P1 3 FUNCTION
F P1 ;
F P1 ;
F R/T ;
FT FUNCTION RX, FUNCTION TX
R/T
R/T
Note:
Using FR command always places
the transceiver to simplex-
operation status.
P1 57 BEAT CANCEL
1 2
Parameter Format Parameter function
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
BC BEAT CANCEL
Sets or reads Beat Cancel.
B C P1
B C P1 ;
B C ;
;
77
APPENDIX q
1 2
Parameter Format Parameter function
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Sets or reads keying speed while using the KY command.
KS KEYER SPEED
P1 42 KEYER SPEED
K S P1 ;
K S ;
P1 K S ;
1 2
Parameter Format Parameter function
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Sets or reads filter bandwidth.
FW FILTER WIDTH
P1 38 FILTER WIDTH
F W P1 ;
F W ;
P1 F W ;
CW
0000~0079: 50 Hz
0080~0099: 80 Hz
0100~0149: 100 Hz
0150~0199: 150 Hz
0200~0299: 200 Hz
0300~0399: 300 Hz
0400~0499: 400 Hz
0500~0599: 500 Hz
0600~0999: 600 Hz
1000~1999: 1000 Hz
2000~ : 2000 Hz
FSK
0000~0499: 250 Hz
0500~0999: 500 Hz
1000~1499: 1000 Hz
1500~ : 1500 Hz
Note:
SSB/AM/FM
0000: Narrow
0001~: Wide
1 2
Parameter Format Parameter function
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Sets Frequency Lock OFF/ON or reads status.
LK FREQUENCY LOCK
P1 1 LOCK OFF/ON
L K P1
L K P1 ;
L K ;
;
1 2
Parameter Format Parameter function
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Reads Model number of the transceiver.
ID IDENTIFICATION
P1 16 MODEL NUMBER
I D P1 ;
I D ;
1 2
Parameter Format Parameter function
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Reads status of the transceiver.
IF
INFORMATION
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
P10
P11
P12
P13
P14
P15
4

5
1
1

7
11
2
3
1
1
1
14

FREQUENCY
NOT USED
RIT/XIT FREQUENCY
RIT OFF/ON
XIT OFF/ON
NOT USED
MEMORY CHANNEL
TX/RX
MODE
FUNCTION
SCAN OFF/ON
SPLIT OFF/ON
TONE OFF/ON
TONE NUMBER
NOT USED
I F ;
I F P1
P7 P4 P3 P5
P8 P9 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
;
1 2
Parameter Format Parameter function
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
DRU or CW message recording
LM LOAD MESSAGE
P1 45 LOAD
MESSAGE
L M P1
L M P1 ;
L M ;
;
1 2
Parameter Format Parameter function
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Sets or reads IF shift.
IS IF SHIFT
Note:
If P2 is positive or zero, P1 can be
“ +” or “ ” .
P1 40 IF SHIFT
DIRECTION
I S P1 P2 ;
I S P1 P2 ;
I S ;
IF SHIFT
FREQUENCY
41 P2
Parameter Format Parameter function
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
KY
CW KEYING
P1
P2
43
44
K Y
K Y P2
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
Converts input characters into Morse code.
KEYER MESSAGE
KEYER BUFFER
;;
;
;
Note: The Set command requires
a “ ” (ASCII code 20h) in the
third byte position. Insert “ ” for
bytes that have no characters to
make a 28-byte fixed length
command.
The “ ” bytes will not send any
character.
Supported characters include:
Letters, numbers, " ' (( )) ( ) + ,–
. / : = ?
Up to 24 characters can be
converted as one sentence at one
time. The subsequent sentence
must be keyed after the current
conversion is completed.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
K Y P1
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
1 2
Parameter Format Parameter function
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Sets or reads AGC time constant.
GT AUTO GAIN CONTROL TIME CONSTANT
P1 39 AGC TIME
CONSTANT
G T P1 ;
G T ;
P1 G T ;
Note:
When in FM mode, the transceiver
returns “ ” .
78
q APPENDIX
1 2
Parameter Format Parameter function
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Sets or reads memory channels.
MC MEMORY CHANNEL
P1
_
NOT USED
M C
M C ;
M C ;
;
MEMORY
CHANNEL
7 P2
P2
P2
1 2
Parameter Format Parameter function
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Sets or reads MIC gain.
MG MIC GAIN
P1 31 MIC GAIN
M G P1 ;
M G ;
P1 M G ;
1 2
Parameter Format Parameter function
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Sets or reads modulation modes.
MD MODE
P1 2 MODE
M D P1
M D P1 ;
M D ;
;
1 2
Parameter Format Parameter function
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Writes into memory.
MW MEMORY WRITE
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
M W P1
P7 P6 P8 P5
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
;
9

7
4
2
10
1
14

SPLIT DATA
NOT USED
MEMORY CHANNEL
FREQUENCY
MODE
MEMORY LOCKOUT
TONE OFF/ON
TONE NUMBER
NOT USED
Note: All parameters must be entered.
The memory channel becomes a vacant
channel if all frequency digits are "0".
Other parameters are ignored.
P1 must be "0" to store a Start frequency
and "1" to store an End frequency.
P3 P4
1 2
Parameter Format Parameter function
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Sets Noise Reduction OFF/ON or reads status.
NR NOISE REDUCTION
P1 56 NOISE
REDUCTION
N R P1
N R P1 ;
N R ;
;
Parameter Format Parameter function
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Sets Preamplifier OFF/ON or reads status.
PA PREAMPLIFIER
P1 1 PREAMPLIFIER
OFF/ON
P A P1
P A P1 ;
P A ;
;
Parameter Format Parameter function
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
DRU or CW message playback.
PB PLAY BACK
P1 27 PLAYBACK
P B P1
P B P1 ;
P B ;
;
1 2
Parameter Format Parameter function
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Sets Noise Blanker OFF/ON or reads status.
NB NOISE BLANKER
P1 1 NOISE
BLANKER
OFF/ON
N B P1
N B P1 ;
N B ;
;
1 2
Parameter Format Parameter function
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Reads memory.
MR
MEMORY READ
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
M R ;
M R
P1
P6 P7
P4
P3
P5 P8
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
;
9

7
4
2
10
1
14

SPLIT DATA
NOT USED
MEMORY CHANNEL
FREQUENCY
MODE
MEMORY LOCKOUT
TONE OFF/ON
TONE NUMBER
NOT USED
Note: For a vacant channel, the Answer
command sends "0" for all parameters
except the memory channel number.
P1 must be "0" to read the CH 90 ~ 99
Start frequency and "1" to read the End
frequency.
P1 P3
79
APPENDIX q
Parameter Format Parameter function
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Sets or reads transmit power.
PC POWER CONTROL
P1 47 POWER
CONTROL
P C P1 ;
P C ;
P1 P C ;
Parameter Format Parameter function
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Sets Speech Processor OFF/ON or reads status.
PR SPEECH PROCESSOR
P1 1 SPEECH
PROCESSOR
OFF/ON
P R P1
P R P1 ;
P R ;
;
Parameter Format Parameter function
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Sets Power OFF/ON or reads status.
PS POWER SWITCH
P1 1 POWER
OFF/ON
P S P1
P S P1 ;
P S ;
;
Parameter Format Parameter function
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Sets or reads CW RX pitch.
PT CW RX PITCH
P1 52 CW RX PITCH
P T P1
P T
P T ;
;
P1 ;
Parameter Format Parameter function
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Sets or reads RF ATT(attenuator).
RA RF ATTENUATOR
P1 – ATTENUATOR
R A
R A ;
P1 R A ;
P1 ;
00: OFF
01: ON
Parameter Format Parameter function
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Lowers/raises RIT frequency.
RD
R ;
RIT DOWN/UP
D/U
Note:
This command also affects the XIT
frequency (same as RIT shift).
The command functions
independently from the RIT/XIT
control.
RU
Parameter Format Parameter function
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Sets RIT OFF/ON or reads status.
RT
RIT
P1 1 RIT OFF/ON
R T P1
R T P1
;
R T ;
;
Parameter Format Parameter function
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Sets the RIT frequency shift to 0.
RC
R ;
RIT CLEAR
C
Note:
This command also clears the XIT
frequency (same as RIT shift).
The command functions
independently from the RIT/XIT
control.
Parameter Format Parameter function
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Selects a meter function or reads meter values.
RM READ METER
P1 24 METER SWITCH
R M P1 ;
R M ;
P1 R M ;
P2
P2 22 METER VALUE
Parameter Format Parameter function
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Sets or reads RF gain.
RG
RF GAIN
P1 31 RF GAIN
R G P1
R G
P1 R G ;
;
;
80
q APPENDIX
;
;
Parameter Format Parameter function
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Selects receive/transmit mode.
RX TX RX, TX
RX/TX
RX/TX
Parameter Format Parameter function
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Sets Scan OFF/ON or reads status.
SC SCAN
P1 1 SCAN OFF/ON
S C P1
S C P1 ;
S C ;
;
Parameter Format Parameter function
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Sets or reads Semi Break-in delay time.
SD SEMI BREAK-IN DELAY TIME
P1 49 SEMI BREAK-IN
DELAY TIME
S D P1 ;
S D ;
P1 S D ;
Parameter Format Parameter function
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Sets or reads low cut-off frequency.
SL DSP SLOPE (LOW CUT-OFF)
P1 53
S L P1
S L P1 ;
S L ;
;
DSP SLOPE
(LOW CUT-OFF)
Parameter Format Parameter function
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
S-meter reading.
SM S-METER
P1 22 S-METER
VALUE
S M P1 ;
S M
;
Note:
In transmit mode:
power meter reading
Parameter Format Parameter function
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Sets or reads squelch level.
SQ SQUELCH LEVEL
P1 46 SQUELCH
LEVEL
S Q P1 ;
S Q ;
P1 S Q ;
Parameter Format Parameter function
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Resets the transceiver.
SR SYSTEM RESET
P1 50 SYSTEM
RESET
S R P1 ;
Parameter Format Parameter function
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Sets or reads subtone number (01~39).
TN TONE NUMBER
P1 14 TONE NUMBER
T N P1
T N P1 ;
T N ;
Note:
Selecting No. 39 (1750 Hz)
switches OFF the CTCSS.
;
Parameter Format Parameter function
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Sets Subtone OFF/ON or reads status.
TO TONE
P1 1 TONE OFF/ON
T O P1
T O P1 ;
T O ;
;
Parameter Format Parameter function
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Sets or reads high cut-off frequency.
SH DSP SLOPE (HIGH CUT-OFF)
P1 53 DSP SLOPE
(HIGH CUT-OFF)
S H P1
S H P1 ;
S H ;
;
81
APPENDIX q
Parameter Format Parameter function
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Triggers the Voice Synthesizer for message output.
VR VOICE RECALL
; V R P1
55 P1 VOICE
RECALL
Parameter Format Parameter function
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Sets or reads VOX delay time.
VD
VOX DELAY TIME
P1 51 VOX DELAY
TIME
V D P1 ;
V D ;
P1 V D ;
Parameter Format Parameter function
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Sets or reads VOX gain.
VG VOX GAIN
P1 54 VOX GAIN
V G P1
V G P1 ;
V G ;
;
Parameter Format Parameter function
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Sets XIT OFF/ON.
XT
XIT
P1 1 XIT OFF/ON
X T P1
X T P1 ;
X T ;
;
Parameter Format Parameter function
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
O
u
t
p
u
t
S
e
t
R
e
a
d
A
n
s
w
e
r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Sets VOX OFF/ON.
VX VOX FUNCTION
P1 1 VOX OFF/ON
V X P1
V X P1 ;
V X ;
;
82
INDEX
AGC............................................ 30
AM
Transmitting ........................... 22
Amplifier, Linear
Connection (REMOTE) .......... 61
AMTOR
Connection (ACC 2) ............... 62
Operation ............................... 27
Antenna
Connection............................... 1
Feed Line Loss ........................ 1
Antenna Tuner
Operation ............................... 52
Presetting............................... 52
Attenuator, RF............................. 37
Automatic Gain Control ............... 30
Auto Weighting............................ 34
Bands, Changing......................... 13
Beat Cancel ................................ 38
Beep Function ............................. 49
Break-in, Full/Semi (see CW)
Bug Key Function ........................ 35
Carrier-operated mode ................ 47
Clover
Connection (ACC 2) ............... 62
Operation ............................... 27
Computer Control
Commands ............................ 71
Communication Parameters ... 51
Connection............................. 60
Connector (COM) ................... 70
CW
Break-in, Full .......................... 34
Break-in, Semi ....................... 34
Pitch ...................................... 21
Reverse ................................. 21
Sidetone, Frequency .............. 21
Sidetone, Volume ................... 21
Transmitting ........................... 21
Zero Beating .......................... 21
Digital Recording Unit (optional)
Installation.............................. 57
Message Interval .................... 54
Playback ................................ 53
Recording .............................. 53
Display Dimmer ........................... 49
DSP
Beat Cancel ........................... 38
DSP Filter .............................. 37
Noise Reduction..................... 38
External Speaker (EXT SP) ........... 3
FAX/Facsimile
Connection (ACC 2) ............... 62
Operation ............................... 28
FM
Band Plan .............................. 24
CTCSS .................................. 25
Repeaters .............................. 24
Subtone, Frequency ............... 25
Subtone, Type ........................ 25
Transmitting ........................... 22
TX Deviation .......................... 22
Frequency
Fine Tuning ............................ 29
Keypad Entry ......................... 29
Rounding ............................... 29
Step Size ......................... 29, 30
Tuning.................................... 29
FSK (see RTTY)
Full Reset .................................... 48
Fuses, Replacing .......................... 2
Gain
AF.......................................... 13
RF ......................................... 13
G-TOR
TM
Connection (ACC 2) ............... 62
Operation ............................... 27
Headphones Jack (PHONES) ....... 3
IF Filter
Bandwidth Change ................. 36
IF Shift ................................... 36
Key Jack (PADDLE/KEY) .............. 3
Keyer, Electronic
Auto Weighting....................... 34
Bug Key Function ................... 35
Locked-weight change ........... 35
Messages, Checking .............. 35
Messages, Storing ................. 35
Messages, Transmitting.......... 35
Linear Amplifier
Connection (REMOTE) .......... 61
Lock Function.............................. 48
Lockout, Memory Channels ......... 44
LSB (see SSB)
Memory Channels
Conventional .......................... 39
Erasing .................................. 43
Lockout .................................. 44
Quick, Recalling ..................... 45
Quick, Storing ........................ 44
Quick, Transfers to VFO ......... 45
Recalling ................................ 40
Resetting ............................... 43
Scanning, All-Channel ............ 47
Scanning, Group .................... 47
Scrolling ................................. 41
Start/End Frequencies............ 43
Storing, Scan Limits ............... 43
Storing, Simplex ..................... 39
Storing, Split-Frequency ......... 40
Transfer, To Memory............... 42
Transfer, To VFOs .................. 42
Tunable.................................. 41
Memory Scan.............................. 47
Menu
Access ................................... 16
Configuration.......................... 17
Cross Reference .................... 19
Description ............................. 16
Meter .......................................... 14
Microphone
Compatible............................... 3
Connector (MIC)....................... 3
Gain ....................................... 15
Operation ................................. 9
Noise
Blanker .................................. 36
Reduction .............................. 38
Optional Accessories
Available ................................ 56
Installation.............................. 57
Packet
Connection (ACC 2) ............... 62
Operation ............................... 27
PacTOR
Connection (ACC 2) ............... 62
Operation ............................... 27
Partial Reset ............................... 48
Power
Connecting DC......................... 2
Switching ON/OFF ................. 13
Transmit Output ..................... 15
Program Scan ............................. 46
Programmable
Buttons .................................. 49
VFO....................................... 43
Quick Data Transfer
Equipment, Compatible .......... 50
Equipment, Connection .......... 60
Equipment, Needed ............... 50
Using ..................................... 50
Reset
Full ......................................... 48
Partial .................................... 48
RIT.............................................. 30
RTTY
Connection (RTTY, ACC 2) ..... 61
Operation ............................... 26
RX Equalizer ............................... 30
Satellite Operation ....................... 28
Scan
Carrier-operated..................... 47
Hold ....................................... 46
Lockout .................................. 44
Memory, All-Channel .............. 47
Memory, Group ...................... 47
Program................................. 46
Start/End Frequencies............ 43
Time-operated........................ 47
Speaker, External (EXT SP) .......... 3
Specifications .............................. 68
Speech Processor ....................... 32
Split-Frequency Operation ........... 23
Squelch....................................... 14
SSB, Transmitting ....................... 20
SSTV
Connection (ACC 2) ............... 62
Operation ............................... 28
TF-SET (Transmit Frequency Set) 23
Time-operated mode ................... 47
Transmit Inhibit ............................ 33
Transmitted-signal monitor .......... 33
Transverter .................................. 51
Troubleshooting .......................... 65
USB (see SSB)
VFO
Equalizing A=B....................... 30
Programmable ....................... 43
Selecting A/B.......................... 13
Voice Synthesizer (optional)
Installation.............................. 58
Using ..................................... 55
Volume
AF Gain ................................. 13
RF Gain ................................. 13
VOX (Voice-Operated Transmit)
Adjusting Delay ...................... 31
Adjusting Microphone
Level ...................................... 31
XIT.............................................. 32

APPLICABLE MODEL
This manual applies to the following model: TS-570S: All mode multi-bander TS-570D: HF Transceiver Intelligent Digital Enhanced Communications System

NOTICE TO THE USER
One or more of the following statements may be applicable to this equipment.
FCC WARNING This equipment generates or uses radio frequency energy. Changes or modifications to this equipment may cause harmful interference unless the modifications are expressly approved in the instruction manual. The user could lose the authority to operate this equipment if an unauthorized change or modification is made.

SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES
Carefully unpack the transceiver. We recommend that you identify the items listed in the table below. In addition, it is safe to keep the box and the packing material. You may need to repack the transceiver in the future.

INFORMATION TO THE DIGITAL DEVICE USER REQUIRED BY THE FCC This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can generate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that the interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• • • •

Accessory Microphone DC power cable 7-pin DIN plug 13-pin DIN plug Fuse (25 A) Fuse (4 A) Instruction manual Schematic/block diagrams1 (U.S.A. and Canada only) Warranty card (U.S.A., Canada, and Europe only)
1 For

Part Number T91-0352-XX E30-3157-XX E07-0751-XX E07-1351-XX F05-2531-XX F06-4027-XX B62-0898-XX —

Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer for technical assistance.

other markets, schematic and block diagrams are available as options.

This transceiver is equipped with a bail on the bottom so that you can angle the transceiver. Pull the bail forward to the limit as shown:

THANK YOU
Thank you for choosing the KENWOOD TS-570 series. This Intelligent Digital Enhanced Communications System was developed by a team of engineers determined to continue the tradition of excellence and innovation in KENWOOD HF transceivers. This transceiver includes a 16-bit Digital Signal Processing (DSP) unit to process audio frequencies. By taking maximum advantage of DSP technology the transceiver gives you enhanced interference reduction capabilities and improves the quality of audio that you transmit. You will find the differences when you fight QRM and QRN in the new solar cycle. As you learn how to use this transceiver, you also will find KENWOOD is pursuing “user friendliness”. For example, each time you change the Menu No. in Menu mode, you will see, on the display, scrolling messages that tell what you are selecting. Though user friendly, this transceiver is technically sophisticated and some features may be new to you. Consider this manual to be a personal tutorial from the designers. Allow the manual to guide you through the learning process now, then act as a reference in the coming years.

WRITING CONVENTIONS FOLLOWED
The writing conventions described below have been followed to simplify instructions and avoid unnecessary repetition. This format is less confusing for the reader. Reviewing the following information now will reduce your learning period. That means less time will be spent reading this manual; more time will be available for operating. Furthermore, a system of advisories is used as follows: WARNING! ¬ Possibility of personal injury CAUTION: ¬ Possibility of equipment damage Note: ¬ Important information or operating tip

Instruction Press [KEY]. Press [KEY1]+[KEY2].

What to Do Press and release KEY. Press and hold KEY1 down, then press KEY2. If there are more than two keys, press and hold down each key in turn until the final key has been pressed. Press KEY1 momentarily, release KEY1, then press KEY2.

FEATURES
Taking full advantage of DSP technology, this transceiver • • • Provides high performance receive filters. Enhances the Beat Cancel and Noise Reduction tools. Allows total customization of transmitted audio through the use of functions such as the Transmit Equalizer. Enables Automatic Zero-beating for CW operation. When in Menu mode, scrolls messages to tell you what you are selecting. Allows you to quickly and easily save the current transceiver settings in Quick memory. Is equipped with a large, easy to read LCD display.

Press [KEY1], [KEY2].

Press With the transceiver power [KEY]+ POWER ON. OFF, press and hold KEY, then switch ON the transceiver power by pressing the POWER switch.
Note: Basic procedures are numbered sequentially to guide you step-by-step. Additional information pertaining to a step, but not essential to complete the procedure, is provided in bulleted form following many steps.

• • • •

To pursue user friendliness, this transceiver

i

CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS IV AM TRANSMISSION ............................................. 22 CHAPTER 7 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATING 23 SPLIT-FREQUENCY OPERATION ....................... 23 TF-SET (TRANSMIT FREQUENCY SET) ......... 23 FM REPEATER OPERATION ................................ 24 SELECTING SUBTONE FREQUENCY ............. 25 CONTINUOUS OR BURST SUBTONES? ......... 25 FM CTCSS OPERATION ....................................... 25 DIGITAL OPERATION ............................................ 26 RTTY (FREQUENCY SHIFT KEYING) .............. 26 AMTOR/ PACKET/ PACTOR/ G-TORTM/ CLOVER 27 SLOW SCAN TV/ FACSIMILE ................................ 28 SATELLITE OPERATION ....................................... 28 CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATING AIDS 29 RECEIVING ........................................................... 29 SELECTING YOUR FREQUENCY ................... 29 Direct Frequency Entry .................................. 29 Using 1 MHz Steps ....................................... 29 Quick Changes ............................................. 29 Fine Tuning ................................................... 29 Equalizing VFO Frequencies (A=B) .............. 30 RIT (RECEIVE INCREMENTAL TUNING) ......... 30 AGC (AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL) ............... 30 RX EQUALIZER ................................................ 30 TRANSMITTING .................................................... 31 VOX (VOICE-OPERATED TRANSMIT) ............. 31 Microphone Input Level ................................. 31 Delay Time .................................................... 31 SPEECH PROCESSOR .................................... 32 XIT (TRANSMIT INCREMENTAL TUNING) ....... 32 CUSTOMIZING TRANSMIT SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS ......................................... 33 Changing Transmit Bandwidth (SSB/AM) .................................... 33 Equalizing Transmit Audio (SSB/FM/AM) ...... 33 MONITORING TRANSMITTED SIGNALS ......... 33 TRANSMIT INHIBIT ........................................... 33 CHANGING FREQUENCY WHILE TRANSMITTING ................................................ 33 CW BREAK-IN ....................................................... 34 USING SEMI BREAK-IN OR FULL BREAK-IN ................................................ 34 ELECTRONIC KEYER ........................................... 34 CHANGING KEYING SPEED ............................ 34 AUTO WEIGHTING ........................................... 34 Reversible Auto Weighting ............................ 34 CHANGING LOCKED-WEIGHT ........................ 35 BUG KEY FUNCTION ........................................ 35 CW MESSAGE MEMORY ................................. 35 Storing CW Messages .................................. 35 Checking CW Messages without Transmitting35 Transmitting CW Messages .......................... 35 CHAPTER 9 REJECTING INTERFERENCE 36 CHAPTER 1 INSTALLATION 1 ANTENNA CONNECTION ....................................... 1 GROUND CONNECTION ........................................ 2 LIGHTNING PROTECTION .....................................2 DC POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION ..................... 2 REPLACING FUSES ........................................... 2 ACCESSORY CONNECTIONS .............................. 3 FRONT PANEL .................................................... 3 Headphones (PHONES) ................................ 3 Microphone (MIC) ........................................... 3 REAR PANEL ...................................................... 3 External Speaker (EXT SP) ............................ 3 Keys and Keyboards for CW Operation (PADDLE and KEY) ................ 3 CHAPTER 2 YOUR FIRST QSO 4 RECEIVING ............................................................. 4 TRANSMITTING ...................................................... 5 CHAPTER 3 GETTING ACQUAINTED 6 FRONT PANEL ........................................................ 6 MICROPHONE ........................................................ 9 REAR PANEL ........................................................ 10 DISPLAY ................................................................ 11 CHAPTER 4 OPERATING BASICS 13 SWITCHING POWER ON/OFF ..............................13 ADJUSTING VOLUME ........................................... 13 AUDIO FREQUENCY (AF) GAIN ...................... 13 RADIO FREQUENCY (RF) GAIN ...................... 13 SELECTING VFO A OR VFO B ..............................13 SELECTING A BAND ............................................. 13 SELECTING A MODE ............................................ 14 ADJUSTING SQUELCH ........................................ 14 SELECTING A FREQUENCY ................................ 14 FRONT PANEL METER ......................................... 14 TRANSMITTING .................................................... 15 SELECTING TRANSMIT POWER .................... 15 MICROPHONE GAIN ........................................ 15 CHAPTER 5 MENU SETUP 16 WHAT IS A MENU? ................................................ 16 MENU A/ MENU B ................................................. 16 MENU ACCESS ..................................................... 16 MENU CONFIGURATION ...................................... 17 CROSS REFERENCE FOR MENU FUNCTIONS .............................................. 19 CHAPTER 6 BASIC COMMUNICATING 20 SSB TRANSMISSION ............................................ 20 CW TRANSMISSION ............................................. 21 AUTO ZERO-BEAT ............................................ 21 TX SIDETONE/ RX PITCH FREQUENCY ......... 21 FM TRANSMISSION .............................................. 22 TX DEVIATION SELECTION .............................22 ii

IF FILTER .............................................................. 36 CHANGING IF FILTER BANDWIDTH ............... 36 IF SHIFT ............................................................ 36 NOISE BLANKER .................................................. 36

.... 49 QUICK DATA TRANSFER ........................................................................................... 37 CW/ FSK Modes .......................................................... 61 MCP AND TNC ........................ 38 NOISE REDUCTION ................................... 63 SERVICE ........... 49 DISPLAY DIMMER....................................................................................................................................................... 50 COMPUTER CONTROL ........... 41 Memory-VFO Split Operation ...................................................................................................................ATTENUATOR ...............................60 RTTY EQUIPMENT ......... 38 Changing NR1 Performance ................................................................. 50 Equipment Needed ..................................................... 43 Full Reset ........................ 51 Equipment Needed ................. 41 Temporary Frequency Changes .............................................................................................................. 45 TEMPORARY FREQUENCY CHANGES ................................................................................... 64 ACCESSING THE INTERNAL FUSE .......... 46 SCAN HOLD ............. 39 STORING DATA IN MEMORY .................. 53 Checking Messages ....... 48 INITIAL SETTINGS ............................................................ 51 AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER ..................................................................52 PRESETTING .............................................. 64 TROUBLESHOOTING ............................. 37 SSB/ FM/ AM Modes .............. 43 Confirming Start/End Frequencies .......40 MEMORY RECALL AND SCROLL ............................................................................................................. 42 STORING FREQUENCY RANGES .......................................................... 43 Programmable VFO ............................... 49 PROGRAM FUNCTION BUTTON .............. 43 Memory Channel Lockout .....42 Channel ¬ Channel Transfer ................... 65 SPECIFICATIONS APPENDIX: COM CONNECTOR PROTOCOL INDEX 68 70 82 iii ................... 50 Receiving Data ... 40 Memory Recall ....... 44 STORING INTO QUICK MEMORY .............................................................................. 59 CHAPTER 15 CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT 60 COMPUTER ... 63 INTERNAL ADJUSTMENTS .............. 48 BEEP FUNCTION ......................... 48 FREQUENCY LOCK FUNCTION .................. 51 SETTING UP ........................................ 42 Memory ¬ VFO Transfer .............. 40 Memory Scroll ..... 38 CHAPTER 10 MEMORY FEATURES 39 MICROPROCESSOR MEMORY BACKUP . 53 Sending Messages ..... 47 ALL-CHANNEL SCAN ... 54 Changing Volume ........................................................................... 62 CHAPTER 16 MAINTENANCE 63 GENERAL INFORMATION .................................. 37 CHANGING RECEIVE BANDWIDTH .... 60 COMPATIBLE TRANSCEIVER ............................................... 50 Transferring Data ................................................................................................................. 48 FULL RESET .................................... 58 YK-88C-1/ YK-88CN-1/ YK-88SN-1 FILTERS ............................................................................................................................... 51 COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS ........ 63 CLEANING ........................................................................................................... 58 SO-2 TEMPERATURE-COMPENSATED CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR (TCXO) ............ 50 Connections ........... 55 CHAPTER 13 CHAPTER 14 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES INSTALLING OPTIONS 56 57 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 REMOVING THE BOTTOM CASE ................... 38 Setting NR2 Time Constant ............. 54 VS-3 VOICE SYNTHESIZER (OPTIONAL) ........................ 47 GROUP SCAN ........ 48 PARTIAL RESET .................................... 61 ANTENNA TUNER ...... 51 Connections ......... 39 CONVENTIONAL MEMORY .........................44 QUICK MEMORY ........................... 37 DSP TOOLS ............. 57 VS-3 VOICE SYNTHESIZER UNIT ................................. 50 USING QUICK TRANSFER ... 43 ERASING MEMORY CHANNELS ..................................... 50 SETTING UP ................................... 51 USING A TRANSVERTER ......................................................................... 53 MESSAGE PLAYBACK ............................. 64 REFERENCE FREQUENCY CALIBRATION .. 61 LINEAR AMPLIFIER ................................... 48 SWITCHING ANT 1/ ANT 2 . 37 PREAMPLIFIER ............................................. 57 DRU-3A DIGITAL RECORDING UNIT ........... 45 QUICK MEMORY ¬ VFO TRANSFER .................................................................................................................................................................... 44 RECALLING QUICK MEMORY ........................... 41 MEMORY TRANSFER .......................................................... 47 CHAPTER 12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES 48 MICROPROCESSOR RESET ............................................................. 46 MEMORY SCAN ................................................... 54 Changing Inter-message Interval ............... 39 Split-Frequency Channels .. 53 RECORDING MESSAGES ............ 52 DRU-3A DIGITAL RECORDING UNIT (OPTIONAL) ..................................... 63 SERVICE NOTE ........................... 38 BEAT CANCEL ...................................................... 39 Simplex Channels ................................................... 45 CHAPTER 11 SCAN 46 PROGRAM SCAN ...............................

and in damp basements and attics. seek assistance from an experienced individual. 10 Heat Locate the transceiver away from heat sources such as radiators. iv . It also reduces the chance of a build-up of static charges. c) The transceiver has been exposed to rain. Contact a dealer or the nearest Service Center for advice. particularly involving the input power cable. 13 Servicing Remove the transceiver’s enclosure only to do accessory installations described by this manual or accessory manuals. amplifiers or other devices that produce substantial amounts of heat. 8 Water and Moisture Do not use the transceiver near water or sources of moisture. GROUND CLAMP 6 Power Lines Minimum recommended distance for an outdoor antenna from power lines is one and one-half times the vertical height of the associated antenna support structure.PRECAUTIONS Please read all safety and operating instructions before using this transceiver. Metal objects. AC outlet strips and points of entry to the transceiver. or have a professional technician do the task. inserted into the transceiver may contact voltages resulting in serious electrical shocks. 12 Periods of Inactivity Disconnect the input power cable from the power source when the transceiver is not used for long periods of time. such as hairpins or needles. 4 Grounding and Polarization Do not attempt to defeat methods used for grounding and electrical polarization in the transceiver. Never permit children to insert any objects into this transceiver. paint thinner. 14 Damage Requiring Service Enlist the services of qualified personnel in the following cases: a) The power supply or plug is damaged. be aware of all warnings on the transceiver and follow these operating instructions. 9 Abnormal Odors The presence of an unusual odor or smoke is often a sign of trouble. Pay particular attention to locations near AC receptacles. Retain these safety and operating instructions for future reference. Follow provided instructions carefully to avoid electrical shocks. 3 Electrical Shocks Take care not to drop objects or spill liquids into the transceiver through enclosure openings. e) The transceiver has been dropped or the enclosure damaged. b) Objects have fallen or liquid has spilled into the transceiver. If unfamiliar with this type of work. For best results. Allow a minimum of 4 inches (10 cm) between the rear of the transceiver and the wall or operating desk shelf. For example. stoves. Use a clean cloth with warm water or a mild detergent. d) The transceiver is operating abnormally or performance has degraded seriously. 5 Outdoor Antenna Grounding Adequately ground all outdoor antennas used with this transceiver using approved methods. Do not place books or other equipment on the transceiver that may impede the free movement of air. avoid use near bathtubs. 1 Power Source Connect this transceiver only to the power source described in the operating instructions or as marked on the transceiver itself. Ensure the power cables can neither be walked upon nor pinched by items placed near or against the cables. 11 Cleaning Do not use volatile solvents such as alcohol. gasoline or benzene to clean the cabinet. Grounding helps protect against voltage surges caused by lightning. Immediately turn the power OFF and remove the power cable. EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT GROUND CLAMPS POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM 7 Ventilation Locate the transceiver so as not to interfere with its ventilation. swimming pools. sinks. This distance allows adequate clearance from the power lines if the support structure should fail for any reason. 2 Power Cable Protection Route all power cables safely.

75 0. Accessories include the following: • • • • • Microphone • Headphones Antenna Tuner • External Speaker CW Key • RTTY Equipment Computer • Linear Amplifier TNC/ Multimode Communications Processor Install a ground system that satisfies DC and RF grounding requirements {page 2}.39 0. LOSS (dB) PER 30 METERS (100 FEET) OF CORRECTLY MATCHED 50 Ω LINE • Use only as a general guide.24 0. Specifications may vary between cable manufacturers. may indicate that your antenna system is not efficiently radiating the transceiver’s power.29 0.21 0. your coax connector is loose at the rear of the radio and.80 0. connect the second antenna to ANT 2.25 0.5 1. All connections must be clean and tight.70 0. If you are using two antennas. Match the impedance of the coaxial cable and antenna so that the SWR is 1. x 1 .3 1.0 1. ANTENNA CONNECTION The type of the antenna system. and feed line.50 0.4 2.6 2. CAUTION: x APPROX.10 < 0.45 0. ground.3 2.80 0. OR DAMAGE TO THE TRANSCEIVER. 3 4 5 Install lightning protection to protect the antenna system.26 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 TRANSMITTING WITHOUT FIRST CONNECTING AN ANTENNA OR OTHER MATCHED LOAD MAY DAMAGE THE TRANSCEIVER.93 0. High SWR will cause the transmit output to drop.68 0.65 0. -9A.72 0.70 0.48 0. and your property {page 2}. Use a good-quality 50 Ω coaxial cable and a first-quality connector for the connection. at the least.5:1. at the worst. 2 Connect all accessories to the transceiver {pages 3. ELECTRIC SHOCK. -58B RG-58 Foam RG-8X 5D-2V RG-8. do not rely on protection to compensate for a poorly functioning antenna system. Connect your antenna feed line to ANT 1.60 0. your antenna system is not efficiently radiating power. your personal safety. -174A RG-58A. Use a properly adjusted 50 Ω antenna of good quality to let your transceiver perform at its best. While the transceiver’s protection circuit will activate if the SWR is greater than 2. -58C 3D-2V RG-58. -9B. If you feel a tingle from the transceiver’s cabinet or the microphone’s metal fittings when you modulate.32 0.1 2. Install and connect a DC power supply {page 2}.48 0. ALWAYS CONNECT THE ANTENNA TO THE TRANSCEIVER BEFORE TRANSMITTING.3 2.50 0.37 0.29 0. you can be certain that.90 0. USE A LIGHTNING ARRESTOR TO PREVENT FIRE.45 0. Reports that your signal is garbled or distorted.29 0. -9.16 30 MHz 6.INSTALLATION 1 |nstall and connect an antenna system {page 1}.4 1.4 1. -215 5D-FB RG-8 Foam 8D-2V 10D-2V 9913 8D-FB 10D-FB 12D-FB RG-17. 60}. -17A 1/2" Hardline 20D-2V 3/4" Hardline 7/8" Hardline N/A: Not available 3.90 0.54 0. especially at peak modulation.60 0. -214. consisting of the antenna.10 < 0.13 0.0 0.80 0.3 0.5 1.24 N/A N/A N/A 0.5 MHz 2.48 0.10 14 MHz 4. Transmission Line RG-174.40 0. -213.2 1.0 0.33 0.12 < 0.26 0. You may even interfere with your own transceiver. will greatly affect the successful performance of the transceiver.6 1.5:1 or less. -8A.38 N/A 0. and may lead to radio frequency interference to consumer products such as stereo receivers and televisions.

Ground this entry panel to a good outside ground. and connect this to the transceiver GND terminal.8 V DC power supply that must be purchased separately.8 V power connector on the transceiver rear panel. for this connection.5 A peak or more.8 V REPLACING FUSES If the fuse blows. BE SURE TO SWITCH THE TRANSCEIVER AND THE DC POWER SUPPLY OFF. only then replace the fuse. Do not substitute a cable with smaller gauge wires. DO NOT directly connect the transceiver to an AC outlet! Use the supplied DC power cable to connect the transceiver to a regulated power supply. When a lightning storm occurs. Bury one or more ground rods. Fuse Location TS-570 Supplied Accessory Cable Fuse Current Rating 4A (For an external antenna tuner) DC POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION In order to use this transceiver. DO NOT PLUG THE DC POWER SUPPLY INTO AN AC OUTLET UNTIL YOU MAKE ALL CONNECTIONS.1 INSTALLATION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 GROUND CONNECTION At the minimum. If newly installed fuses continue to blow. CAUTION: DO NOT ATTEMPT TO USE A GAS PIPE (WHICH IS CLEARLY DANGEROUS). Black: negative). Just as for antenna work. For example. but there is more that you can do. First connect the DC power cable to the regulated DC power supply and check that polarities are correct (Red: positive. AN ELECTRICAL CONDUIT (WHICH HAS THE WHOLE HOUSE WIRING ATTACHED AND MAY ACT LIKE AN ANTENNA). Both of these conditions can be met by providing a good earth ground for your station. The current capacity of your power supply must be 20. Even in areas where lightning storms are less common. CAUTION: x 25 A CAUTION: REPLACE BLOWN FUSES ONLY AFTER INVESTIGATING AND CORRECTING THE CAUSE OF THE FAILED FUSE. Then connect the connectorized end of the DC power cable to the DC 13. terminate your antenna system transmission lines at an entry panel that you install outside your home. Fuse holders Black Red LIGHTNING PROTECTION Consider carefully how to protect your equipment and your home from lightning. you can ensure added protection by disconnecting the feed lines from your transceiver. a good RF ground is required. determine the cause then correct the problem. Press the DC power cable connector firmly into the connector on the transceiver until the locking tab clicks. you will need a separate 13. against which the antenna system can operate. and then connect appropriate feed lines between the entry panel and your transceiver. there are usually a limited number of storms each year. OR A PLASTIC WATER PIPE FOR A GROUND. cut as short as possible. After the problem is resolved. The installation of a lightning arrestor is a start. a good DC ground is required to prevent such dangers as electric shock. all connections must be clean and tight. x 2 . ALWAYS REPLACE A BLOWN FUSE BY A NEW FUSE WITH THE SPECIFIED RATINGS. or a large copper plate under the ground. disconnect the power plug and contact your dealer or nearest Service Center for assistance. TS-570 DC power supply DC 13. Take the time to study the best way to protect your installation from the effects of lightning by consulting reference material on the subject. BEFORE CONNECTING THE DC POWER SUPPLY TO THE TRANSCEIVER. For superior communications results. Use heavy gauge wire or a copper strap.

or the CW keyed output from a Multimode Communications Processor (MCP) to the KEY jack. MC-45E. or MC-53DM microphone.0 mm (1/4") 3-conductor plug and a 3. MC-47. THE HIGH AUDIO OUTPUT AT THIS JACK COULD DAMAGE YOUR HEARING. MC-80. Insert the connector from your microphone fully.0 mm (1/4") diameter. Use a 3. MC-45DME. For CW operation without using the internal electronic keyer. MC-60A. Use a shielded cable between the key and the transceiver. It’s recommended that you become familiar with the internal keyer by reading “ELECTRONIC KEYER” {page 34} before making your decision. MC-52DM. 2-conductor (mono) or 3-conductor (stereo) plug. then screw the retaining ring clockwise until snug. You can also use stereo headphones. Do not use the MC-44. 10 11 TS-570 12 13 Ground + Ground Dash Dot 14 15 16 3 • • • • Straight key Bug Electronic keyer MCP CW output • Paddle .5 mm (1/8") 2-conductor plug respectively. connect to the MIC connector a microphone having an impedance between 250 Ω and 600 Ω. you may decide it’s unnecessary to connect both a paddle and another type of key unless you specifically want to use a keyboard for CW. Use a 6. no sound is heard from the internal speaker. no sound is heard from the internal (or optional external) speaker. When an external speaker is used. WARNING! DO NOT CONNECT HEADPHONES TO THIS JACK. Headphones 1 2 3 4 TS-570 iGND(STBY) MICq PTTw DOWNe UPr Microphone uGND(MIC) yNC t8 V(10 mA max) s Microphone (MIC) To communicate in the voice modes. MC-85. MC-45. When headphones are used. 5 6 7 8 9 REAR PANEL s External Speaker (EXT SP) Ensure any external speaker used has an impedance of 8 Ω. Compatible microphones include the MC-43S. semi-automatic key (bug). connect a straight key.1 INSTALLATION ACCESSORY CONNECTIONS FRONT PANEL s Headphones (PHONES) Use headphones having 4 to 32 Ω impedance. electronic keyer. MC-44DM. The jacks mate with a 6.5 mm (1/8") diameter. MC-45DM. and MC-90. External electronic keyers or MCPs must use positive keying to be compatible with this transceiver. MIC connector (Front view) External speaker s Keys and Keyboards for CW Operation (PADDLE and KEY) For CW operation using the internal electronic keyer. connect a keyer paddle to the PADDLE jack. 2-conductor (mono) plug. Note: Due to the full-featured functionality of the internal electronic keyer.

They are intended only to act as a quick introduction.C. B. • Press the same button again to toggle to the second function on the button. For example. u Turn the Tuning control to tune in a station. press the [A/B] button. Pressing the [ANT] button toggles between the Antenna 1 and the Antenna 2 connectors.2 YOUR FIRST QSO Since you’ve now installed the TS-570. 4 . repeatedly pressing the [LSB/USB] button switches between LSB and USB modes. • YOUR FIRST QSO • Note that pressing [POWER] for more than approximately 2 seconds switches the transceiver power OFF. why not try it? The instructions below are abbreviated.IN 0 10 y u e e VFO A should already be selected for receiving and transmitting. If no stations are heard but you have an antenna connected. then press and hold the [POWER] switch briefly. and you should see “tA” on the display.R. If you encounter problems or there’s something you don’t understand.LOCK 6 KEY 0 10 SPLIT FM AM TF-SET A/B RIT NB AGC/TONE REV CH IF SHIFT 4 SQL 6 7 CLR 9 DELAY M/V 1MHz SCAN A=B CLEAR XIT 2 8 MENU 0 ENT M>VFO M. Note: Only those buttons and controls required to briefly try the transceiver are explained in this section. CW TUNE FILTER UP CH1 CH2 CH3 RIT/XIT MR M. Indicators and frequency digits should appear on the display. If not. • The transceiver switches ON. possibly the wrong antenna connector is selected. RECEIVING w PF t HF TRANSCEIVER TS-570D N.IN PWR CW FSK POWER PRE-AMP PROC AT TUNE DSP SLOPE HIGH LOW LOW CUT ATT VOX SEND q q qr q q q C HIGH UT AF 4 RF 6 PHONES MIC 1 ANT 2 REC 3 FINE LSB USB DOWN – + 2 8 4 MIC 5 8 F. y Select an operating mode by pressing the [LSB/USB] or [CW/FSK] button. you can read about the subject in more detail later. r Increase the AF control slowly clockwise until you hear a suitable level of background noise. t Select an Amateur band by pressing the [UP] or [DOWN] button. q Set the following as specified: • • • • • • AF control: RF control: Fully counterclockwise Fully clockwise Fully clockwise DSP SLOPE (LOW) control: Fully counterclockwise IF SHIFT control: Center SQL control: Fully counterclockwise DSP SLOPE (HIGH) control: w Switch ON the DC power supply.

“AT” will disappear and the error beeps will stop. y Begin speaking into the microphone or sending CW with your key. i Press the [SEND] button again when you want to return to receive mode. use the Tuning control to tune in a station or to select an unused frequency. • “AT” blinks and “TX” appears. u r SSB: Press the [MIC] button to activate the Microphone Gain Setting function. • e Press and hold the [AT TUNE] button to allow the built-in antenna tuner to function. “TX” appears.IN 0 10 q After tuning in a few stations as explained in the previous section “RECEIVING”.C. Press [AT TUNE] to stop the error beeps and to quit tuning. CW: Skip this step. • Note: Tuning will automatically turn off after approximately 60 seconds. • “AT” appears. In addition. error beeps sound.R. • Tuning should be completed in less than approximately 20 seconds.LOCK 6 KEY 0 10 SPLIT FM AM TF-SET A/B RIT NB AGC/TONE REV CH IF SHIFT 4 SQL 6 7 CLR 9 DELAY M/V 1MHz SCAN A=B CLEAR XIT 2 8 MENU 0 ENT M>VFO M. CW: Skip this step. but there is a great deal more to know. u SSB: While speaking into the microphone. B. q Assuming you are already on the correct band with the correct mode selected (steps 1~7 in “RECEIVING”). 5 .IN PWR CW FSK DSP SLOPE HIGH LOW LOW CUT H CUT H IG ATT VOX PRE-AMP PROC AT TUNE ti we SEND AF 4 RF 6 PHONES MIC 1 ANT 2 REC 3 FINE LSB USB DOWN – + 2 8 4 MIC 5 8 F. This completes your introduction to the TS-570. adjust the MULTI/CH control so that the ALC meter reflects according to your voice level. o Press the [MIC] button again to quit the Microphone Gain Setting function. • “MIC-50” appears. t Press the [SEND] button. try making a contact.2 YOUR FIRST QSO YOUR FIRST QSO TRANSMITTING ro PF POWER HF TRANSCEIVER TS-570D N. “AT” stops blinking and “TX” disappears. Check your antenna system before continuing. w Momentarily press the [AT TUNE] button. If tuning is not completed in approximately 20 seconds. commonly-used functions. CW TUNE FILTER UP CH1 CH2 CH3 RIT/XIT MR M. “OPERATING BASICS” {page 13} and following chapters explain all functions of the transceiver starting with the most basic.

Also used for the following functions. Also switches ON or OFF the Subtone {page 24} or CTCSS function {page 25}. w PF button A function can be assigned by the user to this Programmable Function button {page 49}. y VOX button In voice modes. r ATT button Press to switch ON or OFF the receive attenuator {page 37}. u AT TUNE button Use for activating the internal antenna tuner {page 52} or an external antenna tuner. CW TUNE FILTER UP CH1 CH2 CH3 RIT/XIT MR M.R.IN 0 10 !1 o PHONES jack Connect headphones to this jack. e PRE-AMP button Press to switch ON or OFF the receive preamplifier {page 37}. B. then snugly screw down the connector locking ring {page 3}. • CH 1. • • • FRONT PANEL w q PF POWER HF TRANSCEIVER TS-570D N. !1 Multi-purpose keypad Consists of 10 buttons that are used for inputting numeric data. CH 2. 6 . CH 3 buttons Press to select functions associated with the internal electronic keyer {page 34} and the DRU-3A Digital Recording Unit {page 53} .C. 48}. The default function is Voice 1 {page 55}.LOCK 6 KEY 0 10 SPLIT FM AM TF-SET A/B RIT NB AGC/TONE REV CH IF SHIFT 4 SQL 6 7 CLR 9 DELAY M/V 1MHz SCAN A=B CLEAR XIT 2 8 MENU 0 ENT M>VFO M. !0 MIC connector Connect a compatible microphone. i SEND button Press to switch the transceiver between receive mode and transmit mode {page 15}. press to switch ON or OFF the VoiceOperated Transmit function {page 31} or. • AGC/TONE button Press to switch the Automatic Gain Control function between Slow and Fast {page 30}.GETTING ACQUAINTED 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 q POWER switch Press and hold down briefly to switch ON the transceiver power. t PROC button Press to switch ON or OFF the Speech Processor for transmitting {page 32}.IN PWR CW FSK e rt y i u o !0 DSP SLOPE HIGH LOW LOW CUT H CUT H IG ATT VOX SEND PRE-AMP PROC AT TUNE AF 4 RF 6 PHONES MIC 1 ANT 2 REC 3 FINE LSB USB DOWN – + 2 8 4 MIC 5 8 F. REC button Press to select the record mode for CW Message Memory {page 35} or for the optional DRU-3A Digital Recording Unit {page 53}. NB button Press to switch ON or OFF the analog Noise Blanker {page 36}. to switch ON or OFF the Break-in function {page 34}. • FINE button Press to reduce by one-tenth the Tuning control step size to allow more precise tuning {page 29}. Press again to switch OFF the power {page 13}. ANT button Press to select either Antenna 1 or Antenna 2 that are connected to their respective antenna connectors on the rear panel {pages 1. in CW mode. Inserting a plug into the jack automatically mutes the audio from the speaker {page 3}.

• DELAY button When using the VOX or Break-in function.R. Use the convenient finger-tip cavity for continuous tuning. • CW/FSK button Press to select CW or frequency shift keying mode {pages 21. • KEY button Used for setting the internal electronic keyer speed {page 34}.LOCK 6 KEY 0 10 SPLIT FM AM TF-SET A/B RIT NB AGC/TONE REV CH IF SHIFT 4 SQL 6 7 CLR 9 DELAY M/V 1MHz SCAN A=B CLEAR XIT 2 8 MENU 0 ENT M>VFO M. !5 1MHz button Press to switch between the 1 MHz step mode and the Amateur band mode {page 29}. 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 7 • CLR button Press to exit from. • PWR button Used for setting the transmit output power {page 15}. Also used for erasing memory channels {page 43} or for locking out memory channels from the scan list {page 44}. . 26}. turn fully clockwise for light torque or fully counterclockwise for slightly heavy torque. • MIC button Used for setting the microphone gain level {page 15}.LOCK button Press to switch ON or OFF the Frequency Lock function {page 48}. 27}. !2 Transmit function buttons Used in conjunction with the MULTI/CH control to set various transmit functions. !3 Mode buttons Press these buttons to select your operating mode {page 14}. !4 MENU button Press to select or cancel the Menu mode that is used for activating and configuring functions {page 16}. • FM/AM button Press to select FM or AM mode {page 22}.3 GETTING ACQUAINTED 1 PF POWER HF TRANSCEIVER TS-570D N.IN PWR CW FSK DSP SLOPE HIGH LOW LOW CUT ATT VOX SEND PRE-AMP PROC AT TUNE H CUT H IG 2 3 AF 4 RF 6 PHONES MIC 1 ANT 2 REC 3 FINE LSB USB DOWN – + 2 8 4 MIC 5 8 F. The lever behind the control adjusts the control torque level. 26}. abort.IN 0 10 4 5 !2 !4 !5 !3 !6 • REV button In CW or FSK mode. or reset various functions.C. press to select either the upper or lower sideband while receiving {pages 21. • F. • LSB/USB button Press to select lower sideband or upper sideband mode for voice or digital operation {pages 20. CW TUNE FILTER UP CH1 CH2 CH3 RIT/XIT MR M. used for setting the time delay from transmit mode to receive mode {pages 31. 34}. !6 Tuning control Turn to select the desired frequency {page 14}. B. • ENT button Press to enter the desired frequency via the keypad {page 29}.

!9 M>VFO button Press to transfer data from a memory channel to a VFO {page 42}. • M/V button Press to select either Memory or VFO mode {page 40}.C. • CLEAR button Press to reset the RIT/XIT frequency offset to zero {pages 30. @5 N. MR button Press to recall data from Quick Memory {page 45}. 47}. @2 FILTER button Press to select the receive filter bandwidth in SSB. • XIT button Press to switch ON or OFF the Transmit Incremental Tuning function {page 32}. B. or a memory channel. SPLIT button Press to use split-frequency operation which allows a different transmit frequency and receive frequency {page 23}. and OFF {page 38}. @4 B. • M. • A=B button Press to copy the data in the currently selected VFO over to the other VFO {page 30}. press to monitor or change your transmit frequency {page 23}. • RIT button Press to switch ON or OFF the Receive Incremental Tuning function {page 30}. Note: Selecting the narrow filter bandwidth in SSB mode requires the optional YK-88SN-1 filter {page 36}. FSK. CW. 38}.3 GETTING ACQUAINTED 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 • !7 Frequency control buttons These buttons control functions related to selecting a frequency. button Press to toggle between Noise Reduction 1. Also used for making selections from the Menu {page 16}. button Press to switch ON or OFF the DSP Beat Cancel function {page 38}.IN button Press to write data into Quick Memory {page 44}. CW TUNE FILTER RIT/XIT MR M.R.R. in menu mode. @0 M. Also. @1 Quick Memory buttons Controls the Quick Memory function {page 44}. Noise Reduction 2. • TF-SET button While operating split-frequency. • UP/DOWN buttons Press to step through all Amateur bands consecutively {page 13} or to step the transceiver frequency in 1 MHz increments {page 29}. or press to select either narrow-band or wide-band transmit deviation in FM mode {page 22}.IN 0 10 !7 !8 !9 @0 !8 SCAN button Press to start and stop Scan functions {pages 46. and to check Start and End frequencies for the Scan function {page 43}. @3 CW TUNE button Press to activate the automatic zero-beat function for CW mode {page 21}.C. a VFO.IN button Writes data into a memory channel {page 39} or selects Memory Scroll mode {page 41}. or AM mode {pages 36.IN PWR CW FSK DSP SLOPE HIGH LOW LOW CUT H CUT H IG AF 4 RF 6 PHONES MIC 1 ANT 2 REC 3 FINE LSB USB DOWN – + 2 8 4 MIC 5 8 F. • A/B button Press to select either VFO A or VFO B {page 13}. . 8 • PF @1 @2 @3 @4 @5 POWER HF TRANSCEIVER TS-570D ATT VOX SEND PRE-AMP PROC AT TUNE UP CH1 CH2 CH3 N.LOCK 6 KEY 0 10 SPLIT FM AM TF-SET A/B RIT NB AGC/TONE REV CH IF SHIFT 4 SQL 6 7 CLR 9 DELAY M/V 1MHz SCAN A=B CLEAR XIT 2 8 MENU 0 ENT M>VFO M. 32}. press to select either Menu A or Menu B {page 16}.

LOCK 6 KEY CW FSK 0 10 SPLIT FM AM TF-SET A/B RIT NB AGC/TONE REV CH IF SHIFT 4 SQL 6 7 CLR 9 DELAY M/V 1MHz SCAN A=B CLEAR XIT 2 8 MENU 0 ENT M>VFO M. turn to change the high cut-off frequency of the receive pass band. #0 RF control Turn to adjust the radio frequency gain {page 13}. Use the control to improve readability of the desired signal when lower frequency interference is present {page 37}. Use the control to improve readability of the desired signal when higher frequency interference is present {page 37}. or Menu selections.IN – + 2 AF 4 RF 6 @6 @7 @9 #0 #1 #2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 PHONES MIC 1 ANT 2 REC 3 FINE PWR LSB USB DOWN 8 4 MIC 5 8 F. 32}.IN 0 10 #3 @6 DSP SLOPE (HIGH) control In SSB or AM mode. turn to select the desired frequency offset {pages 30. w PTT (Push-to-Talk) switch The transceiver is placed in transmit mode when this non-locking switch is held down.C.3 GETTING ACQUAINTED @8 PF 1 N. @7 DSP SLOPE (LOW) control In SSB or AM mode. B. turn to change the low cut-off frequency of the receive pass band. Releasing the switch returns the transceiver to receive mode. turn to select a memory channel {page 40}. Press and hold down to continuously change the settings. Also used for selecting Menu numbers when accessing the Menu mode {page 16}. memory channels. and as a selector to choose settings for various functions activated by front panel buttons. q DWN UP w 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 . #3 MULTI/CH control In VFO mode. CW TUNE FILTER DSP SLOPE HIGH LOW LOW CUT H CUT H IG POWER HF TRANSCEIVER TS-570D PRE-AMP PROC AT TUNE UP CH1 CH2 CH3 ATT VOX SEND RIT/XIT MR M.R. 9 PTT MICROPHONE q UP/DWN buttons Use these buttons to step up or down the VFO frequency. @8 RIT/XIT control After switching ON the RIT or XIT function. In memory channel mode. #1 IF SHIFT control Turn to slide the receive pass band either lower or higher in frequency when interference is present {page 36}. turn to step the operating frequency up or down {page 29}. #2 SQL control Used for muting (“squelching”) the speaker output when no receive signal is present {page 14}. @9 AF control Turn to adjust the audio frequency gain {page 13}.

8V ANT 2 ANT 1 AT 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 COM KEY PADDLE ACC 2 GND r EXT.5 mm (1/8"). Also used with the Quick Data Transfer function {page 60}. 2-conductor (mono) plug for connecting an external speaker {page 3}. European versions only: Before connecting to the ACC 2 and COM connectors.3 GETTING ACQUAINTED 1 2 REAR PANEL q w e DC 13. y KEY and PADDLE jacks The PADDLE jack mates with a 6. Use the supplied cable with a regulated DC power supply.0 mm (1/4") 3-conductor plug for connecting a keyer paddle to the internal electronic keyer. Refer to pages 1 and 48 for details. Read “Keys and Keyboards for CW Operation” {page 3} before connecting to these jacks. o REMOTE connector Mates with a 7-pin male DIN connector for connecting a linear amplifier {page 61}.5 mm (1/8") 2-conductor plug for connecting an external key for CW operation. t COM connector Mates with a 9-pin female RS-232C connector for connecting a computer via one of its serial communication ports {page 60}. i EXT SP jack Mates with a 3. e DC 13.8 V DC power source {page 2}. r GND post Connect a heavy gauge wire or copper strap between the ground post and the nearest earth ground {page 2}. 62}. w AT connector Mates with the connector on the cable supplied with the external antenna tuner. 10 . remove the protective covers. u ACC 2 connector Mates with a 13-pin male DIN connector for connecting various accessory equipment {pages 61.8 V power input connector Connect a 13. Connecting an external speaker cuts off the audio automatically to the internal speaker. The KEY jack mates with a 3. Refer to the instruction manual supplied with this tuner for more information.SP 8Ω REMOTE t y u i o q ANT 1 and ANT 2 connectors Connect the feed lines from your antennas to these connectors.

!6 Either “N. w Appears while the transceiver is in the transmit mode. While transmitting. appears when the Break-in function is ON {page 34}. serves as a calibrated power meter plus an ALC meter.R. !3 RIT Appears when Receive Incremental Tuning is ON {page 30}. !5 TX EQ.5 seconds. !1 SPLIT Appears when the transmit frequency differs from the receive frequency {page 23}. 11 !2 FAST Appears when a fast time constant is selected for the Automatic Gain Control function {page 30}. !7 Appears when Beat Cancel is ON {page 38}. 1” or “N. o PROC Appears when Speech Processor is ON {page 32}. e Appears while the squelch is open in the receive mode. 2” appears depending on whether Noise Reduction 1 or Noise Reduction 2 is selected {page 38}. Appears when the TX Equalizer function is ON {page 33}. y ATT Appears when the receive attenuator is ON {page 37}. !0 NB Appears when Noise Blanker is ON {page 36}. u PRE -AMP Appears when the receive preamplifier is ON {page 37}.CH Appears while Memory Recall or Memory Scroll is being used {page 40}. !9 M. !4 XIT Appears when Transmit Incremental Tuning is ON {page 32}. The Peak Hold function holds each reading for about 2.3 GETTING ACQUAINTED DISPLAY 1 q wer t y u i o !0 !2 !4 !5 !1 !3 !6 !7 2 3 4 @0 !9 !8 5 q METER While receiving. i VOX Appears when the Voice-Operated Transmit function is ON {page 31}. 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 . or a Speech Processor compression meter. an SWR meter. serves as an S-meter to measure and display the received signal strength. For CW operation.R. !8 MENU Appears while Menu mode is being accessed {page 16}. @0 Shows 2-digit information such as a menu number or a memory channel number. r Appears while the internal antenna tuner {page 52} or an external antenna tuner is in-line. t Either “ANT 1” or “ANT 2” appears depending on whether the Antenna 1 connector or the Antenna 2 connector is selected {page 48}.

@2 “tA” or “As” appears while VFO A is being selected {page 13}. #6 1MHz Appears when the 1 MHz Step function is ON {page 29}. #7 T Appears when the Subtone function is ON {page 24}.3 GETTING ACQUAINTED 1 @1 @3 @2 @4 @5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 12 @1 Shows the current operating frequency. @7 LSB Appears when in Lower Sideband mode {page 14}. “A” appears while Menu A is being accessed {page 16}. “tMs” appears while a split-frequency memory channel is being selected {page 40}. @5 Shows menu information while Menu A or B is being accessed. “B” appears while Menu B is being accessed {page 16}. @6 M. @4 “tM” or “Ms” appears while a simplex memory channel is being selected {page 40}. Also appears while the mark and space frequency relationship is being reversed for FSK {page 26}. @6 @7 @8 @9 #0 #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 #9 . Also shows the transmit frequency during split-frequency operation. @8 USB Appears when in Upper Sideband mode {page 14}. Also shows Menu selections while in Menu mode. #0 R Appears while the sideband is being reversed for CW {page 21}. #8 CTCSS Appears when CTCSS is ON {page 25}. and the RIT/XIT offset frequency when these functions are ON.LOCK Appears when the Frequency Lock function is ON {page 48}. #5 FINE Appears when the Fine function is ON {page 29}. #3 AM Appears when in AM mode {page 14}. #4 F. #9 CTRL Appears while Quick Data Transfer {page 50} or Computer Control {page 51} is being used.SCR Appears while Memory Scroll is being used {page 41}. @9 CW Appears when in CW mode {page 14}. #1 FSK Appears when in Frequency Shift Keying mode {page 26} or when you select one of the digital operation filters via Menu No. @3 “tB” or “Bs” appears while VFO B is being selected {page 13}. #2 FM Appears when in FM mode {page 14}. 32 in SSB mode {page 27}.

you may prefer leaving the RF control turned counterclockwise by some amount instead of turning it fully clockwise. If you are having trouble hearing the desired signal due to excessive atmospheric noise or interference from other stations. Holding down either button consecutively steps the transceiver to each band. Depending on the type and gain of your antenna. Press [A/B] to toggle between VFO A and VFO B. 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 SELECTING VFO A OR VFO B VFO A and VFO B are modes that allow any desired frequency to be selected within the frequency range of the transceiver. After the transceiver has been switched ON. Reception of the station will be easier. and the condition of the band. it can then be switched OFF or ON by using only the power switch on the DC power supply. To do this. Signals that are weaker than this level will be attenuated. first press [1MHz] to exit from the 1MHz Step mode. Turn the RF control counterclockwise until the S-meter reads the peak value that you noted. take note of the peak S-meter reading of the desired signal. AF 4 RF 6 QUICK MEMO 2 8 0 10 Note: The position of the AF control does not affect the volume of “beeps” caused by pressing buttons nor the CW transmit sidetone. • “tA” or “tB” appears and shows which VFO is selected. Also. always set the RF gain control fully clockwise.OPERATING BASICS SWITCHING POWER ON/OFF Switch ON the DC power supply. 13 2 Press [UP] or [DOWN]. When in FM mode. . AF 4 1 2 3 4 5 PF POWER PRE-AMP ATT RF 6 • After the “HELLO” message. RADIO FREQUENCY (RF) GAIN Usually. it may help to reduce the RF gain. press [POWER]. the frequency and other indicators appear. the audio level for Packet operation is independent of the AF control setting. Release [POWER] when you see “HELLO”. VFO A and VFO B function independently so that different or the same frequencies can be selected for each VFO. then press and hold down [POWER] until “HELLO” appears on the display. • • “1MHz” should disappear. set the RF control fully clockwise. 2 8 QUICK MEMO 0 10 To switch OFF the transceiver. • ADJUSTING VOLUME AUDIO FREQUENCY (AF) GAIN Turn the AF control clockwise to increase the audio level and counterclockwise to decrease the level. SPLIT TF-SET A/B RIT QUICK MEMO M/V A=B CLEAR XIT SELECTING A BAND UP LSB USB DOWN CW FSK QUICK MEMO SPLIT FM AM TF-SET M/V 1MHz A=B MENU 14 15 16 1 If “1MHz” is visible on the display.

Turn the SQL control clockwise to just eliminate the background noise when no signal is present.4 OPERATING BASICS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 SELECTING A MODE Depending on which operating mode you want to select. This is also true if using the front panel [UP] or [DOWN] button when the 1 MHz Step mode is used. and PWR functions are held for a brief moment. or [FM/AM] button. the MULTI/CH control.LOCK 6 9 ENT NB AGC/TONE REV ADJUSTING SQUELCH The purpose of squelch is to silence audio output from the speaker when no signal is present.5 MHz or higher frequencies if the Tuning control. CH1 CH2 CH3 1 ANT 2 REC 3 FINE 4 5 8 F. SELECTING A FREQUENCY There are two simple methods to select a frequency.5 MHz. ALC. The point at which ambient noise on a frequency just disappears. Press [ENT]. When the COMP meter appears. For details. Many operators prefer leaving the squelch control fully counterclockwise unless operating full-carrier modes such as FM or AM. Peak Hold readings cannot be deactivated on this transceiver. depends on the frequency. or AM mode. Peak readings for the S-meter. and selects USB for 9. [CW/FSK]. The second function on each button is accessed by again pressing the same button.5 MHz. When squelch is set correctly. 7 CLR 0 FRONT PANEL METER The multifunction meter measures the parameters in the table below. The appropriate meters automatically become functional according to which state the transceiver is in. SWR. called the squelch threshold. IF SHIFT 4 SQL 6 QUICK MEMO Scale Display Functional State Receive Transmit Transmit Transmit Transmit plus SSB/AM/FM mode plus [PROC] ON 2 8 0 10 S Received signal strength PWR Transmit output power ALC Automatic level control status SWR Antenna system standing wave ratio COMP Speech compression level when using the Speech Processor {page 32} Note: x The COMP meter functions only when the Speech Processor is ON while using SSB. or Mic [UP]/[DWN] is used to cross the frequency of 9. the transceiver automatically selects LSB for frequencies lower than 9. LSB USB QUICK MEMO CW FSK FM AM B Direct Frequency Entry (Keypad) In SSB mode. x 14 . repeatedly pressing [LSB/USB] toggles between LSB and USB modes. press the [LSB/USB]. COMP. A Manual Tuning Turn the Tuning control or press Mic [UP]/[DWN] to select the exact frequency. you will hear sound only while a station is actually being received. the SWR meter disappears. then directly enter the desired frequency using the numeric keypad. refer to “Direct Frequency Entry” {page 29}. FM. For example.

or AM is selected. FSK. 1 Press [PWR]. set the microphone gain by accessing Menu No. • The current transmit power appears. 1 Press [MIC]. AM: While speaking into the microphone. For the FM mode. x • • SSB/CW/FSK/FM: Transmit power can be changed from 5 W to 100 W in steps of 5 W. • The current microphone gain level appears. to select the lowest transmit power that allows reliable communication. select the CW mode. 3 SSB: While speaking into the microphone. 12 13 14 15 16 15 5 Press [MIC] again. 3 Press [PWR] again to complete the setting. and close the key or keyer paddle. Connect a key or keyer paddle. Note: When CW. On this transceiver. MIC 2 Press [SEND] or press and hold Mic [PTT]. • “TX” disappears. KEY DELAY SELECTING TRANSMIT POWER It’s wise. Reducing power lowers the risk of interfering with others on the band.4 OPERATING BASICS TRANSMITTING Methods for transmitting include the following: • • • Press [SEND]. 17 {page 17} and selecting either “L” (low) or “H” (high). Note: The transmit power can be separately selected for the AM mode independent of the other modes. AM: Transmit power can be changed from 5 W to 25 W in steps of 5 W. and required by law. • The displayed transmit power changes. select high microphone gain. press [VOX] to switch ON the Break-in function. • “TX” appears. The default is 50. adjust the MULTI/CH control so that the calibrated power meter slightly reflects according to your voice level. adjust the MULTI/CH control so that the ALC meter reflects according to your voice level. refer to sections in “BASIC COMMUNICATING” beginning on page 20. 4 Press [SEND] again or release Mic [PTT]. be careful that the output of the amplifier is not too large. The microphone sensitivity is low in FM mode and this may cause insufficient modulation. Press and hold down Mic [PTT]. MIC PF POWER PRE-AMP PROC AT TUNE ATT VOX SEND PWR For a detailed explanation on transmitting. . 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 MICROPHONE GAIN The microphone gain is finely adjustable in the SSB or AM mode. A different level can be selected between when the Speech Processor {page 32} is ON and when the Speech Processor is OFF. When using a microphone that has an amplifier. CH PWR QUICK MEMO KEY DELAY 2 Turn the MULTI/CH control counterclockwise to reduce power and clockwise to increase power. the transmit carrier level is automatically adjusted according to the selected mode. CH QUICK MEMO Note: x When using the optional MC-90 microphone in FM mode. it is possible to change output power while transmitting.

you will appreciate the versatility it offers. each would always enjoy the best configuration. each menu can be configured independently. DSP settings. Or. No longer is the number and complexity of features restricted by the physical controls and switches on the front panel. Note: The COM communication parameter setting in Menu No. For example. MENU A/ MENU B The transceiver has two menus. • “A” or “B” appears to show which Menu is selected. Menu A could be configured with one set of transmit signal characteristics.MENU SETUP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 WHAT IS A MENU? Many functions on this transceiver are selected or configured via a software-controlled Menu instead of physical controls on the transceiver. Mic [UP]. 1 Press [MENU]. • Each time you change the Menu No. however. 3 Turn the MULTI/CH control to select the desired Menu No. . The menus contain identical functions. frequency steps. etc. or Mic [DWN] to change the current selection for this Menu item. 2 Press [A/B] to toggle Menu A or Menu B. [DOWN]. These menus are called Menu A and Menu B. 16 . 5 Press [MENU] or [CLR] to exit Menu mode. Menu B could be configured completely differently. you will see a scrolling message that briefly describes the current Menu No. 4 Press [UP]. MENU ACCESS The following procedure explains how to check or change any of the Menu items. Once familiar with the Menu system. 35 is shared by Menu A and Menu B. you may enjoy two different kinds of operating activities but you like to configure the transceiver differently for each activity. two operators may share a single transceiver. By dedicating one Menu per operator. By switching from Menu A to Menu B. • “MENU” appears. programmable buttons. you could instantly change Menu configuration and button assignment to suit your current operating style.

.

5 MENU SETUP
Group Menu No. 47 48 Enhanced 49 50 51 Function Transmitted-signal monitor volume 1: minimum, 9: maximum Auto zero-beat with RIT Keyer locked-weight change RX equalizer OFF: flat, Hb: high boost, FP: formant pass, bb: bass boost, c: conventional Noise reduction 1 level change Selections OFF, 1 to 9 ON/ OFF 2.5:1 to 4.0:1 OFF/ Hb/ FP/ bb/ c (U: not currently available) Auto, 1 to 9 Default OFF OFF 3.0:1 OFF Auto Page Ref. 33 21 35 30 38

1 2 3 4

CROSS REFERENCE FOR MENU FUNCTIONS
Use this table arranged by subject to help you locate the function that you are interested in checking or changing. Consult “MENU CONFIGURATION” {page 17} for more detail on each function.

5 6
Function FREQUENCY STEPS MULTI/CH control (SSB, CW, FSK, AM) MULTI/CH control (FM) MULTI/CH control (AM and AM broadcast only) MULTI/CH control (rounds off frequencies) [UP]/[DOWN] buttons FSK Polarity (space/mark) Shift Tone MEMORY CHANNELS Memory-VFO split operation Tunable/fixed frequency PROGRAMMABLE BUTTONS [PF] button Mic [PF1] button Mic [PF2] button Mic [PF3] button Mic [PF4] button RECEIVE IF filter bandwidth REAR PANEL COM communication parameters SCAN Hold (Program Scan) Resume (Time or Carrier) SPEECH PROCESSOR Compression level TRANSMIT Bandwidth (SSB or AM) Equalizer Inhibit TRANSVERTER Enable/disable VOICE-OPERATED TRANSMIT (VOX) Gain Menu No. 03 04 06 05 02 30 29 31 07 08 41 42 43 44 45 46 35 09 10 15 13 14 38 40 16
19

Function

Menu No.

AMPLIFIER Linear amplifier relay 39 ANTENNA TUNER (AT) RX enable/ disable 11 BEEP FUNCTIONS Beep level 01 CW Auto weighting 26 Auto weighting reversed 27 Keying priority over playback 28 RX pitch 20 Semi-automatic key (“Bug”) function 22 TX sidetone frequency 20 TX sidetone volume 21 DATA TRANSFER Transfer enable 36 Transfer method 37 DIGITAL OPERATION AF input (MCP/TNC TX) 33 AF output (MCP/TNC RX) 34 Filter bandwidth 32 DISPLAY Brightness 00 DRU-3A DIGITAL RECORDING SYSTEM (DRS) Playback repeat 23 Playback repeat interval 24 Playback volume 25 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING NR2 time constant 12 FM Microphone gain 17 Subtone frequency 18 Subtone type 19

7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

BASIC COMMUNICATING
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
• 4 Press and hold down Mic [PTT], or press [SEND]. • • “RX” disappears and “TX” appears. Refer to “VOX” {page 31} for information on automatic TX/RX switching. 3 Press [MIC] to activate the Microphone Gain Setting function. • The current gain level appears

SSB TRANSMISSION
SSB is now the most commonly-used mode on the HF Amateur bands. Compared with other voice modes, SSB requires a narrow bandwidth for communications. SSB also allows long distance communication with minimum transmit power. These reasons, combined with the fact that modern Amateur transceivers deliver reasonably good audio quality, make SSB the mode that most prefer on HF. Refer, if necessary, to “OPERATING BASICS” beginning on page 13 for receiving details. 1 Select the operating frequency. 2 Press [LSB/USB] to select either upper or lower sideband mode. • “LSB” or “USB” appears to show which sideband is selected.

6 Release Mic [PTT], or press [SEND] again, to return to the receive mode. • “TX” disappears and “RX” appears. 7 Press [MIC] again to quit the Microphone Gain Setting function. Refer to “COMMUNICATING AIDS” beginning on page 29 for information about additional useful functions for operating.

5 Speak into the microphone and adjust the MULTI/CH control so that the ALC meter reflects according to your voice level. • Speak in a normal tone and level of voice. Speaking too close to the microphone, or too loudly, may increase distortion and reduce intelligibility. You may want to use the Speech Processor. Refer to “SPEECH PROCESSOR” {page 32} for details.

14 15 16
20

6 BASIC COMMUNICATING

CW TRANSMISSION
CW operators know that this mode is a reliable method of communicating under the worst conditions. Although it’s true that newer digital modes rival CW as being equally as useful in poor conditions, these modes do not have the long history of service yet nor the simplicity that CW can have. This transceiver has a built-in electronic keyer that supports a variety of functions. For details on using these functions, refer to “ELECTRONIC KEYER” {page 34}. Refer, if necessary, to “OPERATING BASICS” beginning on page 13 for receiving details. 1 Select the operating frequency. 2 Press [CW/FSK] to select CW mode. • “CW” appears.

AUTO ZERO-BEAT
Use Auto Zero-beat before transmitting whenever you need to tune in a CW station. Auto Zero-beat automatically and exactly matches your transmit frequency with the station that you are receiving. Neglecting to do this will reduce your chances for being heard by the other station. 1 Press [CW TUNE] to start Auto Zero-beat. • “CW TUNE” appears.

1 2 3 4

Your transmit frequency is automatically changed so that the pitch of the received signal exactly matches the TX sidetone/ RX pitch frequency that you have set in your transceiver Menu configuration. Refer to “TX SIDETONE/ RX PITCH FREQUENCY” below for further information on that frequency. When matching is completed, “CW TUNE” disappears. If matching is unsuccessful, the previous frequency is restored.

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

• • To tune in another station so your transceiver is precisely on their frequency, use Auto Zero-beat. Refer to “AUTO ZERO-BEAT”. If you wish, you can press [REV] to switch receive from the default upper sideband to the lower sideband. “R” will appear. •

2 To interrupt Auto Zero-beat, press [CW TUNE] or [CLR].
Note:
x

If using RIT {page 30}, you may access Menu No. 48 and switch the function ON. Auto Zero-beat then will match the RIT-offset frequency with the station that you are receiving. When this function is OFF, Auto Zero-beat changes the transmit frequency. You cannot start Auto Zero-beat if you have selected 1.0 kHz or 2.0 kHz for the DSP filter bandwidth. When using Auto Zero-beat, the matching error is within ±50 Hz in most cases. Auto Zero-beat may fail if the keying speed of the target station is too slow.

x x x

3 Press [SEND]. • • • “RX” disappears and “TX” appears. No transmit carrier level adjustment is necessary. Refer to “CW BREAK-IN” {page 34} for information on automatic TX/RX switching. As you transmit, you should be hearing a sidetone that lets you monitor your own sending. Refer to “TX SIDETONE/ RX PITCH FREQUENCY”. “TX” disappears and “RX” appears.

TX SIDETONE/ RX PITCH FREQUENCY
The transmit sidetone is the monitor tone you hear from your transceiver as you send CW. It is necessary so you can hear what you are transmitting. It is also useful for checking that your key contacts are closing, the keyer is functioning, or for sending practice without putting a signal on the air. Receive pitch refers to the frequency of the CW note that you hear after tuning your receiver for maximum receive signal strength. On this transceiver, the frequency of the sidetone and receive pitch are equal and selectable. Use Menu No. 20 to select the frequency that is most comfortable for you. To change the volume of the TX sidetone, use Menu No. 21. The selections include OFF and 1 to 9. The default is 4.
Note: The position of the AF control does not affect the volume of the TX sidetone.

4 Begin sending. •

5 Press [SEND] again to return to the receive mode. •
Note: Auto Zero-beating may fail if there are other interfering signals on frequency.

Refer to “COMMUNICATING AIDS” beginning on page 29 for information about additional useful functions for operating.

21

7 Press [MIC] to quit the Microphone Gain Setting function. Refer to “VOX” {page 31} for information on automatic TX/RX switching. • 6 Release Mic [PTT]. 4 Speak into the microphone in a normal tone and level of voice. 2 Press [FM/AM] to select FM mode. • “TX” disappears and “RX” appears. or press [SEND]. • “FM” appears. to “OPERATING BASICS” beginning on page 13 for receiving details. if necessary. to return to the receive mode. 3 Press [MIC] to activate the Microphone Gain Setting function. Speaking too close to the microphone. Refer to “SPEECH PROCESSOR” {page 32} for details. The MULTI/CH control has no effect in FM mode. Low is usually appropriate. Although long distance DX contacts may be less common while using AM. 2 Press [FILTER]. or press [SEND] again. When looking for others using AM. Microphone gain can be switched between low and high for FM using Menu No. select high if reports from other stations indicate that your audio is weak. 4 Press and hold down Mic [PTT]. may increase distortion and reduce intelligibility. Refer to “COMMUNICATING AIDS” beginning on page 29 for additional information about useful functions for operating. 2 Press [FM/AM] to select AM mode. or too loudly. or too loudly. When combined with the fullquieting aspect of FM signals that suppress background noise on the frequency. the superior audio quality characteristic of AM operation is one reason why some prefer this mode. 14286. This selection is crucial to avoid audio distortion or insufficient intelligibility that the other station will encounter. • The current filter selection appears. FM can be the best method for maintaining regular schedules with friends. however. Refer to “VOX” {page 31} for information on automatic TX/RX switching. 1 Select the operating frequency. to “OPERATING BASICS” beginning on page 13 for receiving details. check the following frequencies first: • 3885. TX DEVIATION SELECTION Select wide band or narrow band TX deviation depending on whether the other station is using wide band or narrow band RX deviation. 1 Select the operating frequency. 1 Press [FM/AM] to select FM mode.6 BASIC COMMUNICATING 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 FM TRANSMISSION FM operation on HF frequencies solves the problem of how to have long distance voice communication with the finest audio quality. 3 Press and hold down Mic [PTT]. • Speak in a normal tone and level of voice. if necessary. • “AM” appears. 3 Turn the MULTI/CH control to select Wide (“FM-WID”) or Narrow (“FM-NAR”). 22 . “RX” disappears and “TX” appears. and 29000~29200 kHz Refer. You may want to use the Speech Processor. • 5 Speak into the microphone and adjust the MULTI/CH control so that the calibrated power meter slightly reflects according to your voice level. may increase distortion and reduce intelligibility. No transmit carrier level adjustment is necessary. 7290. or press [SEND]. 21390. • • • • The current gain level appears. 4 Press [FILTER] to complete the setting. 17. • • “RX” disappears and “TX” appears. AM TRANSMISSION Each mode used on the HF Amateur bands has its own advantages. Refer. Refer to “COMMUNICATING AIDS” beginning on page 29 for information about additional useful functions for operating. • Speaking too close to the microphone.

change the operating frequency by turning the Tuning control or pressing Mic [UP]/[DWN]. 2 Press and hold [TF-SET]. Often such a station is lost under the noise and confusion of many calling stations. • The frequency selected on this VFO will be used for receiving. there are cases where you must select one frequency for receiving and another frequency for transmitting. Use the information to select a relatively clear transmit frequency and to transmit at the exact instant when the DX station is listening but the majority of the group aren’t transmitting. While holding down [TF-SET]. This is referred to as “split-frequency operation”. • 2 Select the operating frequency. TF-SET is also enabled while operating with the same TX/RX frequency (non-split). You may announce that you will be “listening up 5 (kHz.LOCK] before using TF-SET. and change it while listening. You are now receiving again on your original receive frequency. This allows you to check if the newly selected transmit frequency is free of interference. 07 and select ON. you can recall a memory channel to use for either receiving or transmitting. • 3 Press [A/B] to select the other VFO. Canceling this function immediately restores the original transmit and receive frequencies. Note: x 5 Press [SPLIT]. • The transceiver receives on the frequency that you select. from your present transmit frequency)”. x x 6 Press [SPLIT] to quit split-frequency operation. For more information. 08 to ON to use TF-SET to change the frequency of the memory channel. One typical case that requires this type of operation is described below. or “listening down between 5 and 10 (kHz)”. • “tA” or “tB” appears to show which VFO is selected. TF-SET is disabled while transmitting. “SPLIT” appears. “SPLIT” disappears. select Semi Break-in. The frequency selected here will be used for transmitting. The best way to know if your intended transmit frequency is clear is to use TF-SET. 1 Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 3 Release [TF-SET]. 23 . it is your responsibility to control the situation. If you recalled a memory channel (excluding CH 90 to 99). In this case. An RIT frequency shift is not added. all at the same time. 1 Activate split-frequency operation as explained in the previous section. refer to “MemoryVFO Split Operation” {page 41} under “MEMORY FEATURES”. an XIT frequency shift is added to the transmit frequency. x x • Pressing [A/B] reverses the receive frequency and the transmit frequency. The more proficient you become at using this function. TF-SET (TRANSMIT FREQUENCY SET) TF-SET allows you to temporarily switch your transmit frequency and receive frequency. you can listen on your transmit frequency. but the frequency shown on the subdisplay stays unchanged. By activating TF-SET. • If you access Menu No. 4 Select the operating frequency. Note: If you configure split frequencies using two different bands to perform CW operation. You soon will learn the rhythm of the DX station and the pileup.SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATING SPLIT-FREQUENCY OPERATION Usually you can communicate with other stations using the same frequency for receiving and transmitting. However. the more DX you will contact. however. pressing an incorrect button by mistake will not change the original receive frequency. When a rare or desirable DX station is heard. he or she may immediately get many responses. To do this requires two VFOs. you must set Menu No. • If you press [F. you select only one frequency on either VFO A or VFO B. Switch your receive frequency and transmit frequency by using TF-SET and listen. Successfully contacting a DX station in a pileup often depends on making a well-timed call on a clear frequency. If you find that you are suddenly being called as that rare or desirable station.

29. refer to “MemoryVFO Split Operation” {page 41} under “MEMORY FEATURES”. some repeaters may require the transceiver to transmit a subtone before the repeater can be used. Repeater frequency pairs (input/output): 29520/29620. This special service combines the advantages of FM operation. HF repeaters operate only in the 29 MHz FM sub-band. 29560/29660. 5 Select the operating frequency. In addition. • <<< DISPLAY (18L) >>> • 11 12 13 14 15 16 24 1 ARRL 10-METER BAND PLAN To quit the Subtone function.5 Hz 29. recall the desired memory channel.620 MHz 29.620 MHz 8 Select the subtone frequency via Menu Nos. press [AGC/TONE] twice. 10 Press [SPLIT] to quit split-frequency operation. good fidelity with noise and interference immunity. • • 4 Press [A/B] to select the other VFO. Note: x Frequency Range (kHz) 28000~28070 28070~28150 28120~28189 28190~28300 28300~29300 (29000~29200) 29300~29510 29510~29590 29600 29610~29700 Mode/Activity CW RTTY Packet Beacons Phone (AM) Satellite downlinks Repeater inputs 1 FM simplex calling Repeater outputs 1 When operating through a repeater. • “tA” or “tB” appears to show which VFO is selected. Refer to “Split-Frequency Channels” {page 40}. and access Menu No. This combination of elevation and high ERP allows communications over considerable distances. For more information. • See “SELECTING SUBTONE FREQUENCY” and “CONTINUOUS OR BURST SUBTONES?” for more details on the subtone. “FM” appears. 29540/29640. 18. 07 and select ON. 2 Select the operating frequency. press [A=B] before pressing [A/B].520 MHz 88. 1 Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.5 Hz 9 Press [AGC/TONE] to activate the Subtone function. 18 and 19. 10 meter FM provides reliable around-town communications with the potential for sudden DX from across the country or around the world. • If you access Menu No. Compared to simplex communication. you can usually transmit over much greater distances by using a repeater. To copy the frequency that you select in step 2 to another VFO. Pressing [A/B] reverses the receive frequency and the transmit frequency. 29. The transmit frequency may be higher or lower than the receive frequency. The data that you select in steps 1 to 9 except for subtone duration can be stored in memory. • 6 Press [FM/AM] to select FM mode. To check the subtone frequency stored in a memory channel. Repeaters are typically located on a mountain top or other elevated location. Often they operate at higher ERP (Effective Radiated Power) than a typical station. • • “SPLIT” appears. “T” appears.520 MHz 88. over deviation caused by speaking too loudly into the microphone can cause your signal to “talk-off” (break up) through the repeater. you can recall a memory channel to use for either receiving or transmitting. 29580/29680 x . with the excitement of HF DX (long distance) communications. 7 Press [SPLIT]. Even on a quiet day. • 3 Press [FM/AM] to select FM mode. The frequency selected on this VFO will be used for receiving. “SPLIT” disappears.7 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATING 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 FM REPEATER OPERATION Most Amateur radio voice repeaters use a separate receive and transmit frequency. The frequency selected here will be used for transmitting.

Freq. The Continuous selection continuously sends the subtone as long as the transceiver is transmitting.2 151.7 233.8 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 136. The available choices are shown in the table below.9 186. The Burst selection sends a 500 ms subtone burst each time the transceiver begins transmitting. the squelch on only “B” and “C” opens. • “FM” appears.0 71. 18. (Hz) 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 67. (Hz) No. Input to the microphone is muted while transmitting a 1750 Hz subtone.8 123. CTCSS uses subaudible tone frequencies. press [AGC/TONE] again.4 156. and “C” are programmed with the same subtone frequency. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Freq. FM CTCSS OPERATION CTCSS is the abbreviation for Continuous Tone Coded Squelch System.3 146.7 82. CONTINUOUS OR BURST SUBTONES? In addition to selecting the frequency of the subtone.7 218. In Europe.8 118.0 79. 5 Turn the SQL control to adjust squelch. 18.9 114. • “tA” or “tB” appears to show which VFO is selected. select FM mode on both VFOs to use CTCSS.0 127. • To quit CTCSS. (Hz) No. 01 to 39 shown in the table above when selecting subtone frequencies via Computer Control {page 51}. a subtone that you select is superimposed on your transmit signal.8 203. Freq. No. you cannot switch ON the CTCSS.3 1750 2 Select the desired subtone frequency via Menu No.8 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 97.0 103. 4 Press [FM/AM] to select FM mode. or press [SEND].6 241. The required subtone frequency depends on the repeater you are accessing.8 179. 19. So you can choose which stations will receive your transmissions. Suppose that only stations “A”.5 141.1 225. 6 Repeatedly press [AGC/TONE] until “CTCSS” appears. (Hz) No.7 162. Freq. “B”.5 85.5 210. Note: Use Nos. The default is 88. to prevent other repeaters on the same frequency from locking each other up. When you make a call: Press and hold Mic [PTT]. When using split-frequency operation.5 91. While selecting 1750 Hz subtone. While you are transmitting.5 107. Select either Continuous or Burst via Menu No.2 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 192.2 167.5 Hz.4 77. a 1750 Hz tone is generally used to access repeaters. you must choose the correct subtone duration. • Note: x x x The selected subtone is superimposed on your transmitted signal. 1 Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.8 250. The default is Continuous except on some European versions.3 131.2 110.4 88.5 94. 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 25 7 When you are called: The squelch in your transceiver opens only when the selected subtone is received. 3 Select the operating frequency.7 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATING SELECTING SUBTONE FREQUENCY Some 10-meter FM repeaters require the transceiver to transmit a subtone. When “A” calls.9 74.4 100.9 173. . Select the subtone frequency you require via Menu No.

5 18101~18109 21080~21120 24920~24929 28050~28150 U.S. 31. press [SEND] again. • • “TX” disappears and “RX” appears. No transmit carrier or AF input level adjustment is necessary./Canada Frequency (kHz) 1800~1840 3605~3645 (DX: 3590) 7080~7100 (DX: 7040) 10140~10150 14070~14099. many Amateurs enjoy operating using a number of digital modes. The AF control cannot be used for this adjustment. • • Traditionally. 8 Begin sending data from the keyboard. and then move again to AMTOR or PacTOR to deposit mail in a regional mailbox for forwarding. 30. • • 2 Access Menu No. you may switch to G-TORTM or Clover for a lightning fast file transfer with a friend. the lower sideband is used for FSK operation.A. The 170 Hz default is used on the Amateur bands. 9 When finished transmitting. 29. 1 Select the FSK shift via Menu No. enter the key sequence from the keyboard to return to the receive mode. After that. enter the key sequence at your RTTY keyboard to select the transmit mode. 5 Press [CW/FSK] to select FSK. 3 Access Menu No. it’s possible to take advantage of the camaraderie found on RTTY. Use Menu No. For example. • • “RX” disappears and “TX” appears. • The default is “OFF” (mark). 7 Following the instructions provided with your MCP or RTTY equipment.5 18100~18110 21070~21100 24920~24930 28070~28150 4 Select the operating frequency. Consult “RTTY” {page 61} under “CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT” if you need installation information. • The high tone (default) is commonly used nowadays. press [REV] to reverse the transceiver to the upper sideband. You may instead press [SEND] to manually select the transmit mode. RTTY FREQUENCIES IARU Region 1 (Europe/Africa) Frequency (kHz) 1838~1842 3580~3620 7035~7045 10140~10150 14080~14099. If you pressed [SEND] in step 7. 6 If necessary to be compatible with the station you want to contact. RTTY (FREQUENCY SHIFT KEYING) Radioteletype operation uses frequency shift keying (FSK) and the 5-bit Baudot code or the 7-bit ASCII code to transmit information. • • FSK shift is the difference in frequencies between mark and space. and select either “ON” (space) or “OFF” (mark) to be transmitted when keying down. The power and variety of Amateur radio increased greatly with the development of MCP that can use your transceiver as the communications link. 34 to select the appropriate AF output level. and select high tone (2125 Hz) or low tone (1275 Hz) for mark. • “FSK” appears.7 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATING 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 DIGITAL OPERATION Since Multimode Communications Processors (MCP) have become popular. then move to Packet to access an RBBS (Radio Bulletin Board System) to download a recent shareware program you’ve heard about. Press [REV] again if you want to return to the lower sideband. • “R” appears beside “FSK”. 26 .

Consult your national Amateur radio organization to obtain band plans that specify where in each band various modes are used. This method of modulation uses audio tones therefore either the LSB or USB mode should be selected. 50 is OFF. LSB is used similar to RTTY with the exception of AMTOR which is normally operated using USB. In some countries. the default for Menu No. audio frequency shift keying (AFSK) is used. When using the SSB mode. 4 Following the instructions provided with your TNC or MCP. In the case of G-TORTM. • The AF control cannot be used for this adjustment.5 kHz. the licensing authorities permit F2 operation on some frequencies in the 10 meter band. do not activate the RX Equalizer via Menu No. Consult “MCP AND TNC” {page 62} under “CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT” if you need installation information. 5 Use Menu No. it was developed specifically to handle the adverse conditions of communicating across the solar system with spacecraft during their missions. When selecting one of the filters (not OFF) in Menu No. or Clover stations. .7 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATING AMTOR/ PACKET/ PACTOR/ G-TORTM/ CLOVER Due to their error-handling capability and speed of transmission. 34 to select the appropriate AF output level. For this type of operation. enter the calibrate mode so you can generate a mark condition. The transceiver will briefly transmit each time it sends your commands and data. 32. 29200~29300 — U. these modes are more efficient than earlier forms of digital communication by machine. • “RX” disappears and “TX” appears. “USB”. Mode AMTOR Packet PacTOR Clover Meaning AMateur Teleprinting Over Radio Packetized data used per AX. • “TX” disappears and “RX” appears. Set Menu No. 7 Use Menu No. AMTOR activity can be found on or near 14075 and 3637. 33 to select the appropriate AF input level. Traditionally. If you selected one of the filters in step 1 (not OFF). 50. Note: x Note: In some countries. Mode USB & LSB USB & LSB FM Data Rate 300 bps (AFSK) 1200 bps (PSK) 1200 bps (AFSK) Modulation Type F1 F1 F2 G-TORTM Golay-coded Teleprinting Over Radio On most HF bands. • The data rates and types of modulation used for HF Packet operation are shown below./Canada Frequency (kHz) 1800~1830 3620~3635 7080~7100 10140~10150 14095~14099.5 18105~18110 21090~21100 — 28120~28189 50600~50780 For digital operation using the SSB or FM mode.A. select FM by pressing [FM/AM]. F2 modulation at 1200 bps may be used on the 10-meter band. These would also be good starting places when searching for PacTOR. select the FM mode. “FSK” appears with “LSB”.S. • The default is OFF. 3 Press [LSB/USB] to select LSB or USB.25 protocol Packet Teleprinting Over Radio Characteristic shape of an accurately tuned signal as viewed on a monitor. • • For F2 operation. 32 to OFF for voice operation since the filters available are too narrow for voice. 2 Select the operating frequency. 6 Exit the calibrate mode. G-TORTM. switch the Speech Processor OFF. PACKET FREQUENCIES IARU Region 1 (Europe/Africa) Frequency (kHz) — 3590~3600 Digital band Digital band 14089~14099. also select a fast AGC setting. 14101~14112 Digital band 21100~21120 Digital band 28120~28150. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 27 8 Send commands and data. 32. or when it acknowledges transmissions from other stations. x x 1 Select the appropriate filter bandwidth via Menu No. or “FM”. • Select a low input level so long as the ALC meter reflects.

support the construction and operation of satellites. contact AMSAT (Radio Amateur Satellite Corporation) directly or via their internet Home page. This transceiver can also be used with Mode A satellites. If you’re interested in pursuing satellite operation. to begin more simply. HF satellite operation is possible depending on which satellites are currently in orbit around the Earth. use a fast AGC setting and switch OFF your Speech Processor for best results. Popular fax frequencies include the following: • 7245. An example of a Mode K satellite that uses uplink and downlink HF frequencies is the Radio Sputnik 12 (RS-12). this satellite is in a low Earth orbit and provides brief windows of opportunity for use as it passes quickly over your location. just showing it is much faster. AMSAT can provide you with the latest information regarding Mode K and Mode A satellites that are currently in orbit.7 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATING 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 SLOW SCAN TV/ FACSIMILE SSTV is now increasing in popularity as a result of the capability of computers. When HF propagation is poor. To do this. Instead of trying to describe your station. Note: When operating either SSTV or fax. A TV set and a video camera that you may already own will also be useful tools. you can transmit and receive still monochrome or full-color images. Due to the longer transmission times required for fax. Net). 21345 (Intern. 14245. Mode A satellites use a VHF uplink and an HF downlink. you require a scan converter to translate your video images into audio signals that can be fed into your transceiver. Using this technique. if you have an SSB/CW VHF transceiver.S. you can use only your computer with readily available software to perform this task.A. you may discover you actually prefer satellite operation over the hunt-andmiss method of communicating via the ionosphere. satellite operation can provide an incentive to get back on the air. This group of satellite operators. The high resolution that is possible using facsimile (fax) can allow you to exchange more detailed graphics than SSTV allows. located all over the world. The satellite accepts SSB or CW signals on the 15 meter band and outputs them on 10 meters. 28 . Launched in the early 1990s. Consult the documentation that comes with your software or accessory equipment./Canada Frequency (kHz) 3845 7171 14230 21340 28680 SATELLITE OPERATION Though not as common as VHF/UHF satellite operation. Or. SSTV FREQUENCIES IARU Region 1 (Europe/Africa) Frequency (kHz) 3730~3740 7035~7045 14225~14235 21335~21345 28675~28685 U. it’s best to use this mode when band conditions are stable with strong signals. Since this communications mode is so reliable. 28945 kHz Operation on SSTV or fax mainly involves learning the functionality of your computer application or accessory hardware that supports these modes.

• • Note: x s Fine Tuning Usually. access Menu No. because you can also select 18. CW.. use Menu No. The default for both Menu numbers is 10 kHz. press [1MHz] again. press [0] for the 10 MHz digit (first digit). 5 kHz. press [FINE] again. • “1MHz” disappears. there are several other ways to select your frequency. frequencies are rounded such that new frequencies are multiples of the frequency step size. 1 Press [1MHz]. directly entering a frequency from the numeric keypad can be the fastest method. 20 kHz. The 1 Hz digit is not displayed. Some digits cannot be entered for the 10 MHz digit (first digit). When changing the operating frequency by using the MULTI/CH control. Attempting to enter a frequency that is outside the selectable frequency range causes an alarm to be generated.S.. and FSK modes. 1 Press [ENT].. but the RIT or XIT frequency is not changed. • “1MHz” appears.A. • 2 Press numeric buttons [0] to [9] to enter the frequency you desire. • “FINE” appears. The default is 1 MHz. 03 and 04. 14 15 16 29 . or 25 kHz for FM. • • Pressing [ENT] fills the remaining un-entered digits with 0 and completes entry. Within the AM broadcast band. the receive frequency can be changed by using Direct Frequency Entry within the programmed range. and frequency entry is completed. 02. 06. You can also use [UP]/[DOWN] to change operating frequencies in steps of 1 MHz. When the 10 Hz digit (last digit) is entered.COMMUNICATING AIDS RECEIVING SELECTING YOUR FREQUENCY In addition to turning the Tuning control or pressing Mic [UP]/[DWN]./Canada versions: 10 kHz) for AM mode. s Quick Changes To move up or down in frequency quickly. If you prefer 100 kHz or 500 kHz steps instead of 1 MHz.-” appears. This section describes additional methods of frequency selection that may save you effort and time. 3 To cancel the function. To select 1. x x x x s Using 1 MHz Steps Pressing [UP]/[DOWN] on the front panel changes Amateur bands. 12. • “FINE” disappears. . 2 Press [UP] or [DOWN]. • Holding down either button causes the function to repeat. RIT and XIT are switched OFF. s Direct Frequency Entry When the desired frequency is far removed from the current frequency. 5 kHz. turning the Tuning control changes the frequency in steps of 10 Hz for SSB. However. the digit 0 is entered automatically for the 1 Hz digit.. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 3 To restore the original function. When an entered frequency is accepted. ..5 MHz on this transceiver. Pressing [CLR] cancels entry and restores the previous frequency. 05 and select OFF. CW. and FSK modes. Pressing one of those digits will cause that digit to be entered in the 1 MHz position. and 100 Hz for FM and AM modes. or 10 kHz for the other modes. The entered frequency is rejected. To cancel this function. 10 kHz.85 MHz for example. you can also change the step size to 1 Hz for SSB. the step size automatically defaults to 9 kHz (U. and select 1 kHz. • “. and to 10 Hz for FM and AM modes. This step size can be switched between 9 kHz and 10 kHz via Menu No. 1 Press [FINE]. • If you want to change the frequency step size. After recalling memory channels 90 to 99 that have Start and End frequencies stored.5 kHz. Turning this control changes the operating frequency in 10 kHz steps. Select 1 kHz. use the MULTI/CH control. 2 Turn the Tuning control to select the exact frequency. use Menu Nos.

2 Press [AGC/TONE]. • “FAST” appears and shows that a fast time constant is selected. 3 Turn the RIT/XIT control to change your receive frequency.7 2.99 kHz in steps of 10 Hz without changing your transmit frequency. If the Fine Tuning ([FINE]) function is ON. press [AGC/TONE] again. the step size is 1 Hz. Conventional (c): Emphasizes by 3 dB frequencies at 600 Hz and higher. • High boost (Hb): Emphasizes higher audio frequencies. changing or clearing the RIT offset also affects the XIT offset.8 COMMUNICATING AIDS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 s Equalizing VFO Frequencies (A=B) This function allows you to copy the frequency and modulation mode of the active VFO to the inactive VFO. A fast AGC setting is particularly useful in the following situations: • • • 30 Tuning rapidly Receiving weak signals Receiving high-speed CW Note: x 0. RIT only functions with a memory that contains stored data. RX EQUALIZER RX Equalizer changes the receive frequency characteristics so that you can listen to received signals with the most comfort. fast for FSK. RIT (RECEIVE INCREMENTAL TUNING) RIT provides the ability to change your receive frequency by ±9. The frequency shift set by the RIT/XIT control is also used by the XIT function. x . effective for a voice with more high frequency components. The figure above is given for your better comprehension. • 4 To cancel RIT. Use Menu No. 2 If required. 1 Assume that USB is currently selected. 50 to select from five different receive profiles including the default flat response. 3 Press [A/B] if you want to confirm that the frequency was copied. • “RIT” and the RIT offset appear. The actual profiles will be affected by factors such as the receive IF filters. 3 To select a slow time constant. press [CLEAR] to reset the RIT offset to 0. Amplitude Conventional Formant pass High boost Off Bass boost When using Memory Recall. 1 Select the frequency and mode on VFO A or VFO B. The menu includes this selection because of a possible future enhancement. • Formant pass (FP): Improves clarity by suppressing audio frequencies outside the normal voice frequency range. • The frequency and mode selected in step 1 are copied to the inactive VFO. The default time constant is slow for SSB. AGC selects the time constant for the automatic gain control circuit. 1 Press [RIT]. AGC (AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL) When using modes other than FM. Therefore.2 Audio frequency (kHz) “U” selectable in Menu No. Selecting a slow time constant will cause the receiver gain and S-meter readings to react slowly to large input changes. Selecting any of the following items from the Menu causes “ ” to appear beside the Menu No. A fast time constant causes the receiver gain and the S-meter to react quickly to changes in the input signal. 11 12 13 14 15 16 x x • Note: The receive frequency is returned to the frequency that was selected prior to step 1. fast for CW. effective for a bassy voice. 50 is not currently available. RIT works equally well with all modulation modes and while using VFO mode or Memory Recall mode. press [RIT]. 2 Press [A=B]. • Bass boost (bb): Emphasizes lower audio frequencies. and slow for AM.

VOX can be switched ON and OFF independently for CW and the other modes excluding FSK. 1 Select SSB. 1 2 3 4 5 4 While speaking into your microphone using your normal level of voice. 3 Press [DELAY]. FM. 16 is configurable even if VOX is OFF or while you are transmitting. This level controls the capability of the VOX circuit to detect the presence or absence of your voice. Press [VOX] to toggle VOX between ON and OFF. The final selection should not allow background noises near your operating position to falsely switch the transceiver from receive to transmit. develop the habit of pausing between thoughts to let the transceiver drop back to receive briefly. select the appropriate delay time that allows all of your words to be transmitted without an overly long delay after you stop speaking. adjust the MULTI/CH control such that the transceiver switches to receive a brief time after you stop talking. 2 Switch the VOX function ON. To avoid this. select different settings (default is 4) until the transceiver reliably switches to transmit each time you speak. your final word may not be transmitted. 4 While speaking into your microphone using your normal level of voice.8 COMMUNICATING AIDS TRANSMITTING VOX (VOICE-OPERATED TRANSMIT) VOX eliminates the necessity of manually switching to the transmit mode each time you want to transmit. FM. The transceiver automatically switches to transmit when the VOX circuitry senses that you have begun speaking into the microphone. take time to set the gain of the VOX circuit to the correct level. s Delay Time If the transceiver immediately returns to receive too quickly after you stop speaking. 31 . Your listener will appreciate your consideration as well as respect your more articulate conversation. • The selectable range is 5 to 100 (150 ms to 3000 ms) in steps of 5. s Microphone Input Level To enjoy the VOX function. Note: Menu No. When using VOX. • • The selectable range is 0 to 9. 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 5 Press [DELAY] again. The default is 50. this level cannot be adjusted. 2 Switch the VOX function ON. and OFF. plus you will have a short period to gather your thoughts before speaking again. or AM mode. 1 Select SSB. • “VOX” appears when the function is ON. or AM mode. When using CW mode. 16. • The current setting appears. 3 Access Menu No. You will then hear if anybody wants to interrupt.

and the COMP meter appears. Note: The frequency shift set by the RIT/XIT control is also used by the RIT function. changing or clearing the XIT offset also affects the RIT offset. You will notice that using the Speech Processor makes it easier to be heard by distant stations. • 4 To switch the Speech Processor OFF. . Transmit power 3 Turn the RIT/XIT control to change your transmit frequency. • The transmit frequency is returned to the frequency that was selected prior to step 1. FM. The recommended selection and default is 10 dB. 1 Press [XIT]. this leveling action effectively raises the average transmit output power. 11 12 13 14 15 16 32 • Selectable range is 0 dB to 25 dB in steps of 5 dB. 3 Access Menu No. Transmit power XIT (TRANSMIT INCREMENTAL TUNING) Similar to RIT. Speech Processor OFF Time 2 If required. The COMP meter disappears. 4 To cancel XIT. press [CLEAR] to reset the XIT offset to 0. Excessively compressed signals are more difficult to understand due to distortion and are less pleasant to hear than signals with less compression. The amount of voice compression is fully adjustable. XIT provides the ability to change your transmit frequency by ±9. • “XIT” and the XIT offset appear. or AM mode. the step size is 1 Hz. • “PROC” disappears. resulting in a more understandable signal. Therefore. 2 Press [PROC] to switch the Speech Processor ON.8 COMMUNICATING AIDS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 SPEECH PROCESSOR The Speech Processor levels large fluctuations in your voice while you speak. • “PROC” appears. press [XIT]. Using higher compression will not improve your signal clarity or apparent signal strength.99 kHz in steps of 10 Hz without changing your receive frequency. press [PROC] again. When using SSB. The SWR meter disappears. 15 and select the desired level of compression. If the Fine Tuning ([FINE]) function is ON. or AM mode. Time Speech Processor ON 1 Select SSB. and the SWR meter appears. FM.

Note: x 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 When the monitor volume is high or the Speech Processor is ON. • Formant pass (FP): Improves clarity by suppressing audio frequencies outside the normal voice frequency range. However. • • TX Inhibit OFF: Transmissions are possible. The larger the number. CHANGING FREQUENCY WHILE TRANSMITTING Moving your frequency while transmitting is usually an unwise practice due to the risk of interference to other stations.8 COMMUNICATING AIDS CUSTOMIZING TRANSMIT SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS The quality of your transmitted signal is important regardless of which on-the-air activity you pursue. The default is OFF. x 33 .4 kHz (Normal) 2. by using the Tuning control you can change the operating frequency while transmitting. 0. The figure above is given for your better comprehension.4 kHz. If you selected transmit mode by pressing [SEND]. You can select from five different transmit profiles including the default flat response .” to appear on the display. it’s easy to be casual and overlook this fact since you don’t listen to your own signal. The actual profiles will be affected by factors such as the transmit IF filters. the greater the monitor volume. MONITORING TRANSMITTED SIGNALS While operating in the SSB. resulting in a howling phenomenon. Amplitude Conventional Formant pass High boost Off Bass boost TRANSMIT INHIBIT Transmit Inhibit prevents the transceiver from being placed in the transmit mode. FM.2 Note: x Audio frequency (kHz) “U” selectable in Menu No. So the quality of this audio slightly differs from the quality of audio which other stations will hear. TX Inhibit ON: Transmissions are not possible. Switch the function ON or OFF via Menu No. if necessary. Use headphones if this happens. effective for a voice with more high frequency components. for example. • High boost (Hb): Emphasizes higher audio frequencies. While transmitting. However. You also can change the XIT offset frequency in the transmit mode. Bandwidth 2. and you press [SEND] again. 47 to select 1 to 9. 14 is not currently available. The menu includes this selection because of a possible future enhancement. No signals can be transmitted if this function is ON. Audio picked up before the modulation is output from the speaker. speaker output audio may be picked up by your microphone. transmission will not resume until you select a frequency inside the transmit frequency range.4 kHz (normal) and 2.7 2. 38. The following sub-sections provide information that will help you tailor your transmitted signal. Selecting any of the following items from the Menu causes “TX EQ. or AM mode. effective for a bassy voice. • Conventional (c): Emphasizes by 3 dB frequencies at 600 Hz and higher. You may use this function. The default is 2.0 kHz (narrow).0 kHz (Narrow) Lower Cut-off Frequency 300 Hz 500 Hz Higher Cut-off Frequency 2. the transceiver is automatically forced to receive mode. while selecting an optimum TX equalizer profile.5 kHz x x x s Equalizing Transmit Audio (SSB/FM/AM) Use Menu No. monitoring your transmitted signals is a good method for judging intelligibility by other stations. The position of the AF control does not affect the monitor volume. • Bass boost (bb): Emphasizes lower audio frequencies. This function is not available in the CW or FSK mode.7 kHz 2. The default is OFF. if you select a frequency outside the transmit frequency range. 14 to change the transmit frequency characteristics of your signal. Use Menu No. s Changing Transmit Bandwidth (SSB/AM) Use Menu No. 13 to change the transmit bandwidth between 2.

ELECTRONIC KEYER This transceiver has a built-in electronic keyer that can be used by connecting a keyer paddle to the transceiver’s rear panel. 27. • • • “CW” appears. The current keying speed appears. • • AUTO WEIGHTING The electronic keyer can automatically change the dot/ dash weighting. access Menu No. The current setting (Full or delay time) appears. s Reversible Auto Weighting Auto Weighting increases the weighting as you increase your keying speed. you will obtain the best results. Selecting a speed that is beyond your keying ability will only result in mistakes. 4 Press [KEY] again to complete the setting. 26 to switch Auto Weighting ON or OFF. USING SEMI BREAK-IN OR FULL BREAK-IN 1 Press [CW/FSK] to select CW mode. If you select a speed that is close to the speed used by the other station. 4 Turn the MULTI/CH control to select Full Break-in or a delay time for Semi Break-in. The default is 20. The larger the number. However. 3 Press [DELAY]. This built-in keyer supports lambic operation. the transceiver returns to the receive mode. Consult “Keys and Keyboards for CW Operation” {page 3} for details regarding this connection. 5 Begin sending. Semi Break-in and Full Break-in. The transceiver then returns to the receive mode. To switch this function ON. The transceiver automatically switches to the transmit mode. Two types of Break-in are available. 10 11 12 • Available delay times are from 5 to 100 (50 ms to 1000 ms) in steps of 5. The weighting changes with your keying speed thus making your keying easier for other operators to copy. 3 While keying the paddle and listening to the transmit sidetone. Note: Full Break-in cannot be used with the TL-922/922A amplifier. • 13 14 15 16 6 Press [DELAY] again. When Auto Weighting is OFF. • • “CW” appears. 2 Press [VOX]. the weighting is locked at 3:1. The default is ON. the selected speed applies only to the rate that dots are sent. Semi Break-in: When the key contacts open. CHANGING KEYING SPEED The keying speed of the electronic keyer is fully adjustable. • The selectable range is 0 to 100 in steps of 2. the faster the speed. The default is Full (“FBk”). Selecting the appropriate speed is important in order to send error-free CW that other operators can copy solidly. Full Break-in: As soon as the key contacts open. 1 Press [CW/FSK] to select CW mode. Note: When using the semi-automatic “Bug” function. the transceiver automatically waits for the passage of the time period that you have selected. Weighting is the ratio of dash length to dot length. Use Menu No. turn the MULTI/CH control to select the appropriate speed. 34 . and select ON. the electronic keyer also can decrease the weighting as you increase your keying speed. 2 Press [KEY]. When a delay time is selected: The transceiver switches to the receive mode after the delay time that you have selected has passed.8 COMMUNICATING AIDS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CW BREAK-IN Break-in allows you to transmit CW without manually switching between transmit and receive modes. The default is OFF. “VOX” appears. When Full is selected: The transceiver immediately switches to the receive mode when the key opens.

23 and select ON. To interrupt playback. press [CLR]. The default is OFF.5:1 to 4. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Note: While not operating the keyer paddle after pressing a memory channel button. CW Message Memory (see below) cannot be used. • The message you send is stored in memory. press the corresponding channel buttons during playback. 24. press [CLR]. • 3 Press [CH 1]. Even If message playback does not stop because of your keying start timing. press [VOX].7:1. s Checking CW Messages without Transmitting 1 Press [CW/FSK] to select CW mode. and select ON. [CH 2].7”. The default is OFF. To transmit the messages stored in the other channels in sequence. The electronic keyer has a function that allows you to interrupt playback and manually inject your own keying. “VOX” disappears. designates 2. recording automatically stops. for example. Note: When the Auto Weighting or Bug Key function is ON. Semi-automatic keys are also known as “Bugs”. press [VOX]. 6 To complete the message storage. The electronic keyer also can repeatedly play back the message that you stored. [CH 2]. press [SEND]. The default is OFF. Dashes. 2 If “VOX” is visible. visible while making selections. To switch this function ON. Up to three channels can be queued at the same time. and select the time in the range of 0 to 60 seconds. It is also possible to change this default locked-weight. • • The message is transmitted. otherwise. 28 OFF cancels message playback. • 4 If [SEND] was pressed in step 2. [CH 2]. • • The message plays. Up to three channels can be queued at the same time. 28. 22. Note: x x • s Transmitting CW Messages Messages can be transmitted using Semi Break-in/ Full Break-in or manual TX/RX switching. the selection made in Menu No. 5 Begin sending using the keyer paddle. however. Use Menu No. To interrupt transmission. “2. access Menu No. 1 2 BUG KEY FUNCTION The built-in electronic keyer also can be used as a semiautomatic key. and select ON. 2 To use Semi Break-in/Full Break-in. • “CW” appears. To switch this function ON. “VOX” disappears. 2 If “VOX” is visible. Each memory channel can store approximately 50 characters. press [VOX]. access Menu No. • When the memory becomes full. 1 Press [CW/FSK] to select CW mode. • “CW” appears. 35 . Operating the keyer paddle with Menu No. you can cancel playback by pressing [CLR]. press [SEND] again to return to receive mode. This function cannot be used when the Bug Key function is ON. Use Menu No. dots are generated in the normal manner by the electronic keyer. 3 Press [REC].8 COMMUNICATING AIDS CHANGING LOCKED-WEIGHT Switching Auto Weighting OFF locks the dash/dot weighting to 3:1. When this function is ON. 49 to select from 16 ratios. • • “CW” appears. For repetitive message playback. 4 Press [CH 1]. To switch this function ON. Note: When the Bug Key function is ON. press [REC] or [CLR]. or [CH 3] to select a memory channel. are manually generated by the operator by holding the keyer paddle closed for the appropriate length of time for each dash. press the corresponding channel buttons during playback. or [CH 3] to select the channel that stores the desired message. in the range from 2. access Menu No. s Storing CW Messages 1 Press [CW/FSK] to select CW mode. you can change the interval between each series of messages. Stored messages can be played back to check message content or for transmitting. To play back the messages stored in the other channels in sequence. These memory channels are ideal for storing contest exchanges that you want to send repeatedly. CW MESSAGE MEMORY This transceiver has three memory channels for storing CW messages. or [CH 3] to select the channel that has the desired message stored. 3 Press [CH 1].0:1. a pause is stored in the channel. 49 is invalid.

• “NB” appears when the function is ON. Changing the filter bandwidth will not effect the current receive frequency. 46. • The current filter selection appears. CHANGING IF FILTER BANDWIDTH When adjacent frequency interference is present at both sides of the desired signal. Press [NB] to toggle Noise Blanker ON or OFF. Shifting this center frequency does not change the current receive frequency. . use the IF filters with the DSP filters described on pages 37 and 38. To use a narrow filter in SSB. To remove interference that is lower in frequency than the desired signal. Interference adjacent to the desired signal can be reduced by selecting a narrow bandwidth filter and/or shifting the center frequency of the filter. a narrow IF filter bandwidth may be the best way to remove the interference. In FM mode. 1 Select SSB or AM mode. make sure to select the appropriate filter bandwidth via Menu No. you cannot change the filter bandwidth. CW. CW. The default in SSB or AM mode is wide bandwidth. To more effectively remove interference. Noise Blanker does not function in FM mode. or FSK mode. 2 Press [FILTER]. the wide filter or the narrow filter is automatically selected. turn the IF SHIFT control counterclockwise. Desired Interfering signal signal NOISE BLANKER Noise Blanker was designed to reduce pulse noise such as that generated by automobile ignitions. and select the appropriate setting in Menu No. Note: When you use Menu B. depending on the bandwidth of the DSP filter that you select. install the appropriate optional filter {page 58}. Interfering signal Desired signal Interfering signal IF FILTER The IF filters are designed for selecting the exact range of intermediate frequencies that are sent to the next stage in the receive circuit. 46 in Menu B. Refer to “CHANGING RECEIVE BANDWIDTH” {page 37}. shifting the center frequency of the filter pass band is an additional method of fighting adjacent frequency interference. When in CW or FSK mode.REJECTING INTERFERENCE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 36 3 Turn the MULTI/CH control to select Wide (“FIL-WID”) or Narrow (“FIL-NAR”). IF SHIFT For SSB. 4 Press [FILTER] to complete the setting. To remove interference that is higher in frequency than the desired signal. or FSK mode. turn the IF SHIFT control clockwise.

50 7. 1000 Hz DSP SLOPE 1. 700.4.50 10.4.50 18. 1. Each time you select the same band.50 ~ 4. You can also monitor signals trimmed off by the above DSP filters. 200.5 MHz to 60.4. the DSP filters will restore the default bandwidths. Frequency range (MHz) 0.2. Each time you select the same band.50 2. 350. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 CHANGING RECEIVE BANDWIDTH For improving the interference reduction capability. The default of Preamplifier is OFF for the bands from 30 kHz to 7.50 Frequency range (MHz) 14.7. or counterclockwise to lower the high cut-off frequency.50 ~ 30.8. the same setting will automatically be selected. 2.8. 950. For CW and FSK modes. • “PRE-AMP” appears when the function is ON. This function is useful when interference from adjacent frequencies is strong. 100. 900. 3. or AM mode. 2. USB pass band f Adjust Frequency Selections 14 15 16 37 DSP SLOPE 10. (HIGH) control 1.5 MHz.2. 250. 300.03 ~ 2.50 ~ 25. When in SSB.0. You may use this function to check how adjacent frequencies are in use. s SSB/ FM/ AM Modes 1 Select SSB. 53) to any [PF] button. 3.2. 150. 5.50 ~ 10. 800. .9 REJECTING INTERFERENCE ATTENUATOR Attenuator reduces the level of received signals. you can change the filter bandwidth by directly specifying a bandwidth.50 ~ 18.10 4.6. DSP TOOLS KENWOOD digital signal processing (DSP) technology is used for the functions described in this section.0 MHz (TS-570D: 30. Press [PRE-AMP] to toggle ON or OFF. this transceiver also provides audio frequency (AF) filters designed using DSP technology.6. (LOW) control 400.50 21. 2. FM. 1.00 ~ 60. 4. Press and hold the [PF] button to monitor the trimmed signals.0. the same setting will automatically be selected. Release the button to quit the function. and ON for the bands from 7. 2. The frequency range of each band is the same as for the Attenuator. • “ATT” appears when the function is ON. 650. Note: Switching Preamplifier OFF has the same effect as activating the AIP function on other KENWOOD transceivers. 600. you can change the filter bandwidth by altering its low cut-off frequency and/or high cut-off frequency. 3. FM.5.50 ~ 21. 4. or AM mode.0. 1. 1.6.50 25.1.0.50 ~ 14. 50. 2. 550.00 30. or counterclockwise to lower the low cut-off frequency. 3. 1. Consult “PROGRAM FUNCTION BUTTON” {page 49} and assign the DSP Filter Monitor function (No. 2 Turn the DSP SLOPE (LOW) control clockwise to raise the low cut-off frequency. USB pass band f f Turn the DSP SLOPE (HIGH) control clockwise to raise the high cut-off frequency. USB pass band f The ON/OFF setting will automatically be stored in the current band. 450. USB pass band The ON/OFF setting will automatically be stored in the current band.0 kHz The default cut-off frequencies depend on the current positions of the DSP SLOPE controls. 850. 1.4.10 ~ 7. Press [ATT] to toggle Attenuator ON or OFF.00 (TS-570S) PREAMPLIFIER Switching Preamplifier OFF also may help to reduce interference from adjacent frequencies. 1.3.0 MHz). The frequency range of each band is shown below. 500. Changing the filter bandwidth does not affect the current receive frequency. 750.

If attenuation is not satisfactory. • The current filter selection appears. 300.] for 1 second or longer to enhance the attenuation effect. 2 Press [FILTER]. BEAT CANCEL Beat Cancel uses an adaptive filter and attenuates more than one cyclic interference within the receive pass band. or counterclockwise to narrow the bandwidth.0 k.9 REJECTING INTERFERENCE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 s CW/ FSK Modes 1 Select CW or FSK mode. x When changing the NR1 level in the menu.5 kHz 250 Hz.R. 400. Noise Reduction 2. the wide IF filter or the narrow IF filter will automatically be selected. 1 and 2. and the other group includes CW and FSK. this does not indicate a malfunction. The default is 20 ms. Interfering signal Desired signal Interfering signal NOISE REDUCTION 4 Press [FILTER] to complete the setting. 500. this selection provides an optimum effect according to the strength of the received signal. The longer the correlation time. Optional Filter Mode DSP Filter Bandwidth IF Filter Bandwidth Wide Narrow Wide Narrow Wide Narrow Wide Narrow Wide Narrow Press [N. 1. Pressing [B. Desired signal Before After 38 . 150.] to toggle between Noise Reduction 1. When receiving CW. 3 Turn the MULTI/CH control clockwise to widen the bandwidth. Press [B. or AM mode. Note: While receiving intermittent CW signals. one group includes SSB. select the correlation time that allows you to hear signals with more clarity. but no change occurs on the display. Note: Using Noise Reduction 2 in SSB mode may lower the clarity of signals or induce pulse noise depending on conditions. a beep sounds.C.0 kHz CW 1. 1. (270 Hz) 200 Hz Note: A different selection can be made between two groups of modes. Depending on which bandwidth you select for the DSP filter and which type of optional filter you install. Switch Noise Reduction 1 ON. 1. 2.0 kHz YK-88C-1 CW 600 Hz or lower CW (500 Hz) FSK 1. for reducing random noise which interferes with the desired signal.0 kHz or lower YK-88SN-1 S SB 1.] to toggle Beat Cancel ON or OFF. Access Menu No. You can use Beat Cancel when in SSB. 500 Hz.5 k This transceiver provides two types of Noise Reduction functions. 2. When in SSB. 100. FM. it is best to select the longest correlation time that allows reliable reception. 51 to change the effect of Noise Reduction 1. The adaptive filter changes its characteristics according to the nature of the signal being received at a given moment. the better S/N. press [B. 80. 1” or “N.0 kHz. This does not indicate a malfunction. 2. 500. Interfering tones Receive pass band s Setting NR2 Time Constant You can change the correlation time for Noise Reduction 2. 500 Hz 300 Hz or higher YK-88CN-1 CW CW 50 Hz. x Enhanced Beat Cancel may adversely affect desired signals slightly because of its stronger effect. • “N. s Changing NR1 Performance Use Menu No.0 k 250. and AM. you will hear sound momentarily caused by an internal operation change. So you need not change the selection each time you switch modes between the two groups.8 kHz) FSK 250 Hz.0 kHz.5 ms or 20 ms. and OFF. The default is “Auto”. 600.0 k.5 k Default (Hz) 600 1. Just trying them both is the easiest way to judge which function works more effectively under the current condition. 1. the transceiver sounds clicks.R. 100 Hz.] for 1 second or longer again restores the original attenuation level.0 kHz 1. 1. • “BEAT CANCEL” appears when the function is ON.C. 2” appears depending on which function is selected. this does not indicate a malfunction. then select level 1 to 9 in this menu while receiving signals. Note: x The Enhanced Beat Cancel setting is cleared when the power to the transceiver is turned OFF. Mode CW FS K Bandwidth Selections (Hz) 50. 200. Note: x Using a high NR1 level and Beat Cancel simultaneously may cause noise to stand out. R. Normally select Noise Reduction 1 in SSB mode and select Noise Reduction 2 in CW mode.5 kHz (1. FM. 12 and select 7.C.

etc. Changing the data after recalling a memory channel overwrites the contents of the channel. This transceiver provides 100 Conventional memory channels. Switching OFF the power will not erase the Menu setups or memory channels. 2 Select the frequency. For example. Use either method depending on the relationship of the receive and transmit frequencies that you store: • • Simplex channels: RX frequency = TX frequency Split-frequency channels: RX frequency ≠ TX frequency 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CONVENTIONAL MEMORY Conventional memory is used for storing data that you want to recall many times in the future. The data that you can store is listed below: Parameter RX frequency TX frequency Mode for RX Mode for TX Start/end frequencies Subtone frequency Tone ON/OFF CTCSS ON/OFF Memory Channel Lockout ON/OFF 1 Memory channels 90 to 99 can also be used as simplex channels. If you find the transceiver powers-up with default settings. 9 10 11 12 4 Turn the MULTI/CH control. 5 Press [M. 3 Press [M. Channels 90 to 99 are designed for programming VFO tuning ranges and scan ranges. • “t A” or “t B” appears to show which VFO is selected.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode. 13 14 15 16 39 . you may store the frequency where you regularly meet your club members.IN] again to store the data. or press Mic [UP] or [DWN] to select a memory channel. and VFO and memory channel data is lost.MEMORY FEATURES MICROPROCESSOR MEMORY BACKUP This transceiver uses a lithium battery to retain the userspecified memory items. STORING DATA IN MEMORY There are 2 methods for storing transmit/receive frequencies and associated data in memory channels 00 to 89. Contact an authorized KENWOOD service facility or dealer. Channel 00 ~ 89 Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes1 Channel 90 ~ 99 Yes1 (simplex) Yes1 (simplex) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes1 • To exit Memory Scroll mode and abort the storage process. mode. have the lithium battery replaced. • Entering a 2-digit number such as 05 using the numeric keys can also be used to select a channel. in total. • The previous data stored in the channel is overwritten. press [CLR]. s Simplex Channels 1 Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B. to be stored. the frequency that includes the RIT or XIT offset will be stored. numbered 00 to 99. Note: When RIT or XIT is ON. The lithium battery life is approximately 5 years.

the subtone frequency for RX will be stored in the memory channel. or press Mic [UP] or [DWN] to select a memory channel. • Continuously holding down Mic [UP] or [DWN] steps the transceiver through the memory channels until the button is released. The memory channels that contain no data are skipped. mode. MEMORY RECALL AND SCROLL There are two modes that allow you to retrieve frequencies and associated data that you stored in a memory channel: Memory Recall and Memory Scroll. frequencies that you retrieve are not used for receiving and transmitting. 6 Press [M. • • 3 To exit Memory Recall mode. 8 Press [M. Memory Recall: In this mode. Memory Scroll: Use this mode to check the contents of memory channels without changing the current receive frequency. • Entering a 2-digit number such as 05 using the numeric keys can also be used to select a channel. Note: When subtone frequencies differ between TX and RX while performing memory-VFO split operation. or press Mic [UP] or [DWN] to select a memory channel.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode. .IN] again to store the data. • “tA” or “tB” appears to show which VFO is selected. In this mode. etc. to be stored. s Memory Recall 1 Press [M/V] to enter Memory Recall mode. the transceiver receives and transmits using a frequency that you retrieve. 7 8 • 2 Turn the MULTI/CH control. 9 10 11 12 7 Turn the MULTI/CH control. • “SPLIT” appears. Note: Memory channels can also be changed while using the TF-SET function. press [M/V]. You cannot change memory channels while transmitting.10 MEMORY FEATURES 1 2 3 4 5 6 s Split-Frequency Channels 1 Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B. • The memory channel that was last selected appears. press [CLR]. 2 Select the frequency. You can temporarily change the frequency and associated data without overwriting the contents of the memory channel. 4 Select the receive frequency and mode. 5 Press [SPLIT]. • 3 Press [A/B] to select the other VFO. To exit Memory Scroll mode and abort the storage process. 13 14 15 16 40 • The previous data stored in the channel is overwritten. The frequency and mode selected here will be used for transmitting.

• Use only the Tuning control to select a frequency. 5 Press [M/V] to quit split-frequency operation. 08 and select ON.10 MEMORY FEATURES s Memory Scroll 1 Press [M. 6 Press [SPLIT] again to use the memory channel that you recalled in step 1. 7 Press [SPLIT] once again to quit split-frequency operation. • Entering a 2-digit number such as 05 using the numeric keys can also be used to change channels. press [SPLIT] once again. • Skip this step when changing only the associated data. 9 10 11 12 13 4 If necessary for future use. • The memory channel that was last selected appears. 3 Recall a memory channel. store the changed data in another memory channel. 2 Press [M/V]. To use a memory channel for transmitting: 1 Recall a memory channel. 4 Press [SPLIT] to start split-frequency operation. Refer to “Channel ¬ Channel Transfer” {page 42}. press [CLR]. or press Mic [UP] or [DWN] to step through the memory channels. If you access Menu No. you can temporarily change the data without overwriting the contents of the memory channel. 2 Recall a memory channel. 1 Access Menu No. RX: Memory channel TX: VFO A or VFO B RX: VFO A or VFO B TX: Memory channel To use a memory channel for receiving: 1 Press [A/B] to select the VFO that you will use for transmitting. • If you selected VFO B in step 1. • 2 Select the frequency for transmitting. s Memory-VFO Split Operation Under “SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATING” {page 23}. • “tA” or “tB” appears to show which VFO is selected. as follows: • • 2 Turn the MULTI/CH control. 07 and select ON. you can also use a memory channel and a VFO together for this operation. The transceiver re-displays the memory channel or VFO frequency that was selected before you activated Memory Scroll. 5 Press [SPLIT] to start split-frequency operation.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode. Recalling a split-frequency channel is another way to do split-frequency operation. Note: Memory channel data can also be changed while using the TF-SET function. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 To exit Memory Scroll mode. s Temporary Frequency Changes After retrieving frequencies and associated data in Memory Recall mode. 14 15 16 41 . 4 Select the frequency for receiving. 3 Change the frequencies and associated data. 3 Press [A/B] to select the VFO that you will use for receiving. you learned split-frequency operation using two VFOs.

Channel 90 ~ 99 TX/RX frequency Mode for TX/RX Subtone frequency Tone ON/OFF CTCSS ON/OFF Memory Channel Lockout ON/OFF ¬ ¬ ¬ ¬ ¬ ¬ ¬ Channel 00 ~ 89 RX frequency TX frequency Mode for RX Mode for TX Subtone frequency Tone ON/OFF CTCSS ON/OFF Memory Channel Lockout OFF x s Channel ¬ Channel Transfer You can also copy the contents of one memory channel to another memory channel. you can copy this data to the VFO. the RX data is copied to VFO A and the TX data is copied to VFO B.IN] again. When a split channel is recalled. Start frequency End frequency Subtone frequency Tone ON/OFF CTCSS ON/OFF Memory Channel Lockout ON/OFF 3 Select the memory channel to which you would like this data copied. when the frequency you want to monitor is near the frequency stored in a memory channel. press [CLR]. 4 Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode. the data is copied to VFO A or VFO B. This function is useful when storing frequencies and associated data that you temporarily change in Memory Recall mode. Pressing [M>VFO] after temporarily changing the retrieved data copies the new data to the VFO. depending on which VFO was used to recall the channel.10 MEMORY FEATURES 1 2 3 4 5 MEMORY TRANSFER Channel 00 ~ 89 s Memory ¬ VFO Transfer After retrieving frequencies and associated data in Memory Recall mode. The tables below illustrate how data is transferred between memory channels: Channel 00 ~ 89 RX frequency TX frequency Mode for RX Mode for TX Subtone frequency Tone ON/OFF CTCSS ON/OFF Memory Channel Lockout ON/OFF ¬ ¬ ¬ ¬ ¬ ¬ ¬ ¬ ¬ Channel 90 ~ 99 TX/RX frequency Mode for TX/RX Start frequency End frequency Subtone frequency Tone ON/OFF CTCSS ON/OFF Memory Channel Lockout OFF ¬ ¬ ¬ ¬ ¬ ¬ ¬ ¬ ¬ Channel 00 ~ 89 RX frequency TX frequency Mode for RX Mode for TX Subtone frequency Tone ON/OFF CTCSS ON/OFF Memory Channel Lockout OFF . Channel 90 ~ 99 TX/RX frequency Mode for TX/RX • To exit Memory Scroll mode. 2 Press [M>VFO]. 1 Recall the desired memory channel. for example. This function is useful. RX frequency TX frequency Mode for RX Mode for TX Subtone frequency Tone ON/OFF CTCSS ON/OFF Memory Channel Lockout ON/OFF ¬ ¬ ¬ ¬ ¬ ¬ ¬ ¬ ¬ Channel 90 ~ 99 TX/RX frequency Start frequency End frequency Mode for TX/RX — Subtone frequency Tone ON/OFF CTCSS ON/OFF Memory Channel Lockout OFF • Note: x 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 42 The Memory Channel Lockout status and the subtone frequency are not copied. 1 Recall the desired memory channel. • When a simplex channel is recalled. 2 Press [M.

• “SPLIT” appears. • The previous data stored in the channel is overwritten. 1 Press [M/V] to enter Memory Recall mode. or press Mic [UP] or [DWN] to select a memory channel. etc. • To exit Memory Scroll mode and abort the storage process.IN] again to store the data. 3 Press [DOWN] to check the start frequency and press [UP] to check the end frequency. Now you can only tune from the start frequency to the end frequency 6 Press [M. or press Mic [UP] or [DWN] to select a memory channel in the range from 90 to 99. that you customized. s Confirming Start/End Frequencies Use this procedure to check the start and end frequencies that you stored in channels 90 to 99. To do Full Reset. To tune or scan frequencies in a desired range only. 2 Turn the MULTI/CH control. 4 Select the start frequency. quick memory. • “tA” or “tB” appears to show which VFO is selected. • A beep sounds to confirm that the channel data is erased. i. Note that this function resets all settings. press [A=B]+ POWER ON. or press Mic [UP] or [DWN] to select a memory channel. 7 Turn the MULTI/CH control. or press Mic [UP] or [DWN] to select a memory channel. 1 Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B. you may prefer erasing the contents of those channels. 3 Press [CLR] for approximately two seconds. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 2 Select the end frequency and mode. 1 Press [M/V] to enter Memory Recall mode. Program Scan is described in the next chapter. 14 15 16 43 . 3 Press [A/B] to select the other VFO.e. press [CLR]. s Programmable VFO Using the start and end frequencies that you stored in channels 90 to 99. 8 Press [M. • Entering a 2-digit number such as 90 using the numeric keys can also be used to select a channel. ERASING MEMORY CHANNELS If there are memory channels that you will not recall in the future.IN] to select Memory Scroll mode. One application of this function is to help you operate within the authorized frequency limits of your license. 5 Press [SPLIT]. 2 Turn the MULTI/CH control.10 MEMORY FEATURES STORING FREQUENCY RANGES Memory channels 90 to 99 allow you to store frequency ranges for VFO tuning and Program Scan. to the factory defaults. menu settings. store start and end frequencies for that range in advance. 2 Turn the MULTI/CH control. 1 Press [M/V] to enter Memory Recall mode. Programmable VFO restricts the frequency range that you can tune with the Tuning control. s Full Reset Do Full Reset if you want to erase all data in all memory channels.

911 ® 14.IN]. the current VFO data is written to Quick memory. this ON status and the offset also will be stored. You can quickly jump between several different memory channels as you monitor them.200 ® 24. STORING INTO QUICK MEMORY Each time you store a new frequency.235 ® 18. 2 Turn the MULTI/CH control.545 Memory 1 Memory 2 Memory 3 Memory 4 Memory 5 21. A dot appears beside the right-most digit of the memory channel number to indicate the channel has been locked out. For example. 2 Press QUICK MEMO [M. 1 Select the frequency. QUICK MEMORY Quick memory is designed for quickly and temporarily saving data without specifying a particular memory channel. Use Quick memory to store data that you will not need during future operating sessions. Memory Scan is described in the next chapter.IN] is pressed.082 Memory 5 § 44 .111 Memory 1 Memory 2 Memory 3 Memory 4 Memory 5 You can store data in Quick memory only when using VFO frequencies for both transmitting and receiving. as you tune across the band looking for DX.911 ® 14.10 MEMORY FEATURES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 s Memory Channel Lockout You can lock out Conventional memory channels that you prefer not to monitor during Memory Scan.111 ® 7. Note: When RIT or XIT is ON. etc. storing one more frequency bumps the contents of memory channel 5 off the stack (data lost). • Each time [M. When all five memory channels contain frequencies. 1 MHz Step ON/OFF RIT ON/OFF 1 DSP SLOPE control settings are not stored. it is convenient to store stations that you want to contact. 24. • Release [CLR] immediately.911 ® 14. 1 Press [M/V] to enter Memory Recall mode.103 ® 21. 3 Press [CLR].082 ® 3.235 ® 18.200 ® 24. This transceiver provides five Quick memory channels that can store the following data: • RX frequency Mode for RX RIT/XIT offset Transmit power VOX delay time Receive filter bandwidth Subtone ON/OFF 1 TX frequency Mode for TX Microphone gain Keying speed Break-in delay time VOX ON/OFF CTCSS ON/OFF Fine Tuning ON/OFF XIT ON/OFF Speech Processor ON/OFF Noise Blanker ON/OFF • Repeatedly pressing [CLR] adds and removes the channel from the scan list. all previously stored frequencies are bumped to their next respective Quick memory channel. or press Mic [UP] or [DWN] to select a memory channel.111 ® Memory 1 Memory 2 Memory 3 Memory 4 10. Pressing it for more than approximately 2 seconds erases the contents of the memory channel. § 7.235 ® 18. mode.

to the VFO. You can change the frequency even when you select OFF in Menu No.IN]. • The current memory channel number appears. 3 To exit. 1 Recall a Quick memory channel. press QUICK MEMO [M. Note: Memory channels cannot be changed while using the TF-SET function. Note: Memory channel data can also be changed while using the TF-SET function. 2 Turn the MULTI/CH control to select a Quick memory channel (1 to 5). Note: Pressing [M>VFO] after temporarily changing the recalled data copies the new data to the VFO. . then this step will not access Quick memory. 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 45 2 Turn the MULTI/CH control to select a Quick memory channel (1 to 5). • This action stores the new data in the current channel and bumps the old frequency to the next higher Quick memory channel. TEMPORARY FREQUENCY CHANGES After recalling a Quick memory channel. you can temporarily change the data without overwriting the contents of the channel. 1 Press QUICK MEMO [MR].10 MEMORY FEATURES RECALLING QUICK MEMORY You can recall a Quick memory channel. 1 2 3 4 • If there is no data stored in any Quick memory channel. 2 Press [M>VFO]. 5 To exit. press QUICK MEMO [MR] again. 08. press QUICK MEMO [MR] again. only when using VFO frequencies for both transmitting and receiving. 1 Press QUICK MEMO [MR]. 4 To store the changed data in Quick memory. • You cannot change memory channels while transmitting. QUICK MEMORY ¬ VFO TRANSFER This function copies the contents of the memory channel that you recalled. 3 Change the frequencies and associated data.

) 7. the monitoring flexibility gained will increase your operating efficiency. • Memory Scan Monitors all RX frequencies All-channel that you store in the Scan Conventional memory channels. Scan automatically stops on a channel in which a signal is present. or pressing Mic [UP]/[DWN]. When in FM mode. When in FM mode. 2 Press and hold down [SCAN]. When the current receive frequency is within one of the ranges that you select by channel numbers. Monitors all RX frequencies Group Scan stored in the Conventional memory channels of the desired group.) 14. but the memory channel is overwritten with the changed mode. refer to “STORING FREQUENCY RANGES” {page 43}. When the current Scan range is smaller than a single step of the MULTI/CH control. Operating mode can be changed during scanning. “P1” to “P9” on the display show the current speed (P1: maximum. access Menu No. Scan starts with the start frequency stored in the smallest channel number.200 (Start freq. • PROGRAM SCAN Program Scan monitors the range between the start frequency and the end frequency that you store in Conventional memory channels 90 to 99. The transceiver remains on the same channel for either a short time (Time-operated mode) or until the signal drops (Carrier-operated mode). 14.) 21. If this happens.) 4 To stop Scan. SCAN HOLD This function stops Program Scan for approximately five seconds and then resumes Scan when you jump to the desired frequency by turning the Tuning control or MULTI/CH control.) x x Ch 97 1 Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.350 (End freq.150 (Start freq. depending on which one you select via Menu No. Note: x If you have turned the SQL control clockwise far beyond the squelch threshold when in FM mode. 357 for Ch 93/Ch 95/Ch 97. When the current receive frequency is outside all the ranges that you select by channel numbers. • Scan Type Program Scan Purpose Monitors frequencies in the range that you select. By becoming comfortable with how to use all types of Scan. turning this control clockwise causes Scan to jump to the start frequency.070 (Start freq.030 (End freq. press [SCAN] or [CLR]. and counterclockwise to the end frequency.SCAN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Ch 93 Scan is a useful function for hands-off monitoring of your favorite frequencies. 3 for Ch 93. or press Mic [UP]/[DWN]. The default is OFF.300 (End freq. and counterclockwise increases the speed. P9: minimum). and select ON.e. For a refresher on how to store Program Scan limits. 3 Release [SCAN] to start Program Scan. turn the SQL control slightly counterclockwise. You can select a maximum of 10 memory channels and sequentially scan the ranges that you previously stored in those channels. turning the RIT/XIT control clockwise decreases the scan speed. Starting Program Scan switches OFF the RIT and XIT functions. then using the numeric keys enter the second digit of each memory channel you desire to scan. Program Scan monitors rounded off frequencies regardless of the Menu No. x x x x 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 46 7. and Program Scan is activated using this channel. To use this function. The operating mode stored in the channel with that range is used. If you press [SCAN] before storing any frequency range. 05 selection. 10. To jump to the desired frequency while scanning. 09. Scan may fail to stop at a channel in which a signal is present. Scan starts with the current frequency. i. . Refer to “MEMORY SCAN” for further information. When in a mode other than FM. turn the Tuning control or MULTI/CH control. The transceiver provides the following types of Scan: • Releasing [SCAN] before entering channel numbers selects the channels that you selected last time for Program Scan.) x Ch 95 21. etc. then the lower and upper frequency limits of the transceiver are stored in memory channel 90. Program Scan starts with the smallest channel number and repeats the sequence as shown below.

etc. Scan may fail to stop at a channel in which a signal is present. 2 Press [M/V] to enter Memory Recall mode. Ch 22. Scan waits another three seconds then restarts.e. Group Scan starts with the smallest group number and repeats the sequence. 3 Turn the SQL control to adjust the squelch to the threshold. Time-operated mode: After stopping on a busy channel and waiting approximately three seconds. Note that doing Full Reset returns all settings. • • • • Ch 99 You can select a maximum of 10 groups and sequentially scan the channels that belong to those groups. or press Mic [UP]/[DWN]. Scan automatically stops at a channel in which a signal is present. Scan starts with the current channel. Scan starts with the group number that is larger than and closest to the group number of the current channel. • • • • Ch 19 Group 2 Ch 20. Starting Memory Scan switches OFF the RIT and XIT functions. • • • • Ch 29 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Group 9 Ch 90. ALL-CHANNEL SCAN Use the following procedure to monitor all memory channels that contain frequency data. The default is Time-operated. i. 4 Press and hold down [SCAN] then. 4 Press [SCAN] to start All-channel Scan. press [SCAN] or [CLR]. Note: x If you have turned the SQL control clockwise far beyond the squelch threshold. If this happens. 1 Select Time-operated or Carrier-operated via Menu No. 10 to select either mode. turn the SQL control slightly counterclockwise. • • Scan ascends up through the channel numbers (this direction cannot be changed). When the current channel is outside all the groups that you select by group number. Carrier-operated mode: Scan restarts approximately two seconds after the signal drops. If the channel is still busy. 10. GROUP SCAN For the purpose of Group Scan. Ch 92. 35 for groups 3 and 5. Scan checks the channel again. Ch 21. Ch 01. To jump to the desired channel while scanning. • Scan starts with the current channel and ascends up through the channel numbers (this direction cannot be changed). Ch 11. 10. If the channel is not busy three seconds after stopping. • • • • Ch 09 Group 1 Ch 10. Scan restarts immediately. turn the MULTI/CH control. If this happens. When the current channel is within one of the groups that you select by group number. To jump to the desired channel while scanning. Ch 02. enter all group numbers in step 4 or do Full Reset {page 48} to use All-channel Scan (factory default). 11 12 13 14 15 16 47 6 To stop Scan. Use Menu No. Ch 91. Ch 12. that you customized. with each group containing 10 channels. press [SCAN] or [CLR]. 3 Turn the SQL control to adjust the squelch to threshold. Note: x • 5 To stop Scan. 1 Select Time-operated or Carrier-operated via Menu No. 5 Release [SCAN] to start Group Scan. 2 Press [MR] to enter Memory Recall mode. The transceiver remains on the same channel for either a short time (Time-operated mode) or until the signal drops (Carrier-operated mode). for example. 3 for group 3. turn the SQL control slightly counterclockwise. or press Mic [UP]/ [DWN]. After using Group Scan. turn the MULTI/CH control. enter the group numbers you desire to scan. Starting Memory Scan switches OFF the RIT and XIT functions. to the factory defaults.11 SCAN MEMORY SCAN Memory Scan monitors all memory channels in which you stored frequencies (All-channel Scan) or only a desired group of memory channels (Group Scan). using the numeric keys. The channels are grouped as follows: Group 0 Ch 00. You can lock out the memory channels that you prefer not to monitor while scanning. To do this refer to “Memory Channel Lockout” {page 44}. the 100 Conventional memory channels are divided into 10 groups. group 3 © group 5 © group 7 © group 3. Scan may fail to stop at a channel in which a signal is present. If you have turned the SQL control clockwise far beyond the squelch threshold. x x x x .

10 4. etc.50 ~ 30. the factory defaults for operating frequency and mode are as follows: • • VFO A: 14. i. To do Full Reset.000.50 10. Each time you select the same band.50 ~ 18. PARTIAL RESET Do Partial Reset if a button or control does not function according to the instructions in this manual.00 (TS-570S) 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 For each VFO. FULL RESET Do Full Reset if you want to erase all data in all memory channels. you can still change the transmit frequency with the Tuning control while using the TF-SET function.IN] Note: x x After activating Frequency Lock.50 ~ 4. In addition.OPERATOR CONVENIENCES 1 2 INITIAL SETTINGS MICROPROCESSOR RESET If your transceiver seems to be malfunctioning.50 ~ 25.50 ~ 14.50 18. Note: The IF filter selection in Menu No. resetting the microprocessor default settings may resolve the problem. the MULTI/CH control is still available for selections other than frequency and memory channel changes. select ANT 1 or ANT 2. 46 will not be reset.50 ~ 21.50 Frequency Range (MHz) 14. The ANT 1/ANT 2 setting will automatically be stored in the current band. the internal tuner will always be bypassed. SWITCHING ANT 1/ ANT 2 After connecting antenna feed line to the ANT 1 connector and/or ANT 2 connector on the rear panel. The following buttons and controls are disabled by Frequency Lock: • Tuning control • MULTI/CH control • QUICK MEMO [MR] • QUICK MEMO [M.e. The following are not erased by Partial Reset.000 MHz/ USB VFO B: 14. menu settings. antenna tuner preset data. this function resets all settings.00 ~ 60.LOCK” appears when the function is ON.50 ~ 10. depending on which antenna is used for transmitting and receiving. After activating Frequency Lock. the same setting will automatically be selected.00 30.50 21. After activating Frequency Lock.50 2.50 7. press [A/B]+ POWER ON. press [A=B]+ POWER ON.IN] • [FINE] • [REV] • [CLR] • [ENT] • [LSB/USB] • [CW/FSK] • [FM/AM] • [1MHz] • [UP]/[DOWN] • [SPLIT] • [A/B] • [M/V] • [A=B] • [SCAN] • [M>VFO] • [M. that you customized.000 MHz/ USB The Conventional and Quick memory channels have no data stored.000. [CLR] is still available in some situations. After activating Frequency Lock. Press [F. Frequency Range (MHz) 0. FREQUENCY LOCK FUNCTION Frequency Lock disables some buttons and controls to prevent you from accidentally activating a function or disturbing current settings. • “ANT 1” or “ANT 2” appears to show which antenna is selected.10 ~ 7. • “HELLO” appears on the display. Note: Connect an external antenna tuner to the ANT 1 connector only. After connecting this tuner correctly and selecting ANT 1.50 25. • “F. • • • • • Memory channel data Menu settings Antenna tuner preset data ANT 1/ANT 2 data. To do Partial Reset. the MULTI/CH control and [UP]/[DOWN] are still available in Menu mode.03 ~ 2. The frequency range of each band is shown below. “HELLO” appears on the display. Press [ANT] to select ANT 1 or ANT 2. to the factory defaults.LOCK] to toggle Frequency Lock ON or OFF. x x 48 .

• Consult the above table to select a function. 4 Press [UP]. [PF2]. 01. 3 Turn the MULTI/CH control to select Menu No. 50 Monitor Voice 1 51 52 Voice 2 53 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 DSP Filter Monitor QUICK MEMO [MR] QUICK MEMO [M. Activate a function that is supported by no other front panel buttons. Mic [UP]. Consult the following table to select a function. [DOWN]. LOCK] [CLR] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 00 to 40 Selects Menu No. Function Number Function Function Number 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 Function [SCAN] [M>VFO] [M. and [PF4] buttons. 84 accessible in step 4 is not currently available. The default values are as follows: • • • x x 11 12 13 14 15 16 Front panel [PF]: Voice 1 Mic [PF1]: [A/B] Mic [PF3]: [M/V] • Mic [PF2]: [SPLIT] • Mic [PF4]: Monitor Note: Full Reset returns the functions of the PF buttons to default settings. 48 to 51. DISPLAY DIMMER The Display illumination can be switched between 5 levels via Menu No. 42. 50. [DELAY]. 48 to 51. 00 to 40. Mode LSB USB CW CW –R FSK FSK –R AM FM Morse Code Output ·–·· ··– –·–· –·–· ·–· ·–· ·– ··–· ·–· ·–· (L) (U) (C) (CR) (R) (RR) (A) (F) Selects Menu No. a Morse code abbreviation for that mode is heard. 5 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode. 84 assigned will simply cause the transceiver to display a string of error codes. Activate the same function as one of the front panel buttons. Function No. 00. 49 . or [FILTER] again. There are three types of signals: • • • To confirm that a button has been pressed. Morse codes are used for some errors. To confirm that the selection was completed by pressing [MIC]. 80 to 83 Ex: 82 selects Menu No. or 45. 41 to 45: • • • Directly select Menu No.12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES BEEP FUNCTION The purpose of the Beep function is to provide an audible signal that conveys information. [PF3].IN] [CW TUNE] [CH 1] [CH 2] [CH 3] [FINE] [F. 99 OFF 1 Press [MENU]. Selecting OFF assigns no function to the button.IN] [SPLIT] [TF-SET] [A/B] [M/V] [A=B] When selecting an operating mode. 00 to 40. PROGRAM FUNCTION BUTTON The transceiver allows you to customize the function of the front panel [PF] button. 43. No need to press [MENU] and turn the MULTI/CH control. You can assign the following types of functions to these buttons via Menu No. Pressing the PF button with Function No. When using the optional MC-47 microphone. To report an error condition. 44. 41. [PWR]. or Mic [DWN] to select a function number. You can change the volume of the beep output via Menu No. See “MENU CONFIGURATION”. [KEY]. you can also customize the functions of the Mic [PF1]. 2 Press [A/B] to select Menu A or Menu B.

Compatible transceivers include: • TS-570S/570D • TS-870S • TS-950SDX • TS-850S • TS-690S • TS-450S s Transferring Data The TS-570 transceiver works as the Master sending data to the Slave transceiver. The Slave can receive data using either Quick memory channel 1 or the VFO. When the Slave receives data using the VFOs programmed with split frequencies. Use Menu No. On the Slave. USING QUICK TRANSFER If you always use the TS-570 just to receive. other functions may work slowly. select 4800 bps and 2 stop bits on the TS-570. activate TX Inhibit via Menu No. see “CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT ” {page 60}. receiving data from the Master transceiver. • On the TS-570. 2 On the Master. both RIT and XIT are set to OFF. 36 and select ON. access Menu No. XIT is set to OFF but RIT is not changed. • When using another TS-570 as the Slave. • The default is Quick memory. s Receiving Data The TS-570 transceiver works as the Slave. x 50 . • Note: For the correct method. Transfer to a transceiver other than TS-570 and TS-870S: • • KENWOOD IF-232C interface unit One cross-wired cable This cable must have a 9-pin RS-232C female connector at one end and a 25-pin RS-232C female connector at the other end. 35 to select these parameters. perform the appropriate operation to send data. When the Slave receives data using the VFO programmed with a simplex frequency. For the compatible transceiver. • On the TS-570. access Menu No. For the compatible transceiver. x 13 14 15 16 When connecting with another TS-570 or the TS-870S. Data Transfer could be useful while contesting. x • Note: If the Master has RIT switched ON. “CTRL” appears on the Slave.12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 QUICK DATA TRANSFER This transceiver has the capability to quickly and conveniently transfer the receive frequency and mode to another compatible transceiver. 38 to avoid unintentional transmission. check the instruction manual that came with the transceiver. SETTING UP s Equipment Needed In addition to a compatible transceiver. A spotting station that is searching for new contest multipliers can quickly transfer a frequency over to the running (main) station. Note: While transferring data. • One straight cable This cable must have a 6-pin DIN male connector at both ends. 2 On the Slave.IN]. 37 and select either OFF (Quick memory channel 1) or ON (the VFO). 1 Switch ON the Transfer function on each transceiver. The displayed data is stored in Quick memory channel 1 on the Master and transferred to the Slave. while in VFO mode. the received data replaces the data only on the TX side of the VFO. 3 On the Master. On the Slave. 36 and select ON. If transferring to or from other KENWOOD transceivers. the received data replaces the data on both VFOs. 1 Switch ON the Transfer function on each transceiver. check the instruction manual that came with the transceiver. select an operating frequency and mode. check the instruction manual that came with the transceiver. access Menu No. press QUICK MEMO [M. the offset frequency is added to the receive frequency to be transferred. the following equipment is required: Transfer to TS-570 or TS-870S: • One cross-wired cable This cable must have a 9-pin RS-232C female connector at both ends. s Connections For diagrams on how to connect the two transceivers. 3 On the Master. use the same COM connector baud rate on each transceiver.

consult the instruction manual that came with the transverter. and at the other end a 9pin or a 25-pin RS-232C female connector that mates with the RS-232C port of your computer. When using the optional VS-3 unit. Normally set 1 kHz and lower digits to 0 (“0. or. x x When using a transverter. • Transceiver control application To design your programs consult “APPENDIX” {page 70} for the necessary information. from another city. 144 MHz or 430 MHz.12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES COMPUTER CONTROL By connecting this transceiver to a computer. 2 Select the operating frequency. configure your transceiver control application for 8 data bits and no parity. This capability makes possible remote operation of your transceiver from across the room. select the appropriate transfer rate and number of stop bits via Menu No. you can use this HF transceiver as a VHF or UHF transceiver. 2 On the transceiver. 40. The default is OFF. from another room. x SETTING UP s Equipment Needed • • Computer equipped with an RS-232C serial port. not all the functions of this transceiver are available. For more information. USING A TRANSVERTER If you have a transverter that converts HF frequencies to VHF/UHF frequencies. you must first choose the communication parameters.00” on the display). After the computer is disconnected or turned off. you can change the computer into an electronic console from which you can remotely control functions of the transceiver. One straight cable This cable must have a 9-pin RS-232C female connector at one end. or down to the 100 Hz digit for 144 MHz and 430 MHz. Note: To reliably use the 38400 or 57600 bps transfer rates. or country via a telephone connection. the RS-232C port of the computer must support these high-speed communications parameters. 1 On the computer. 1 Connect the transverter to the ANT 1 or ANT 2 connector of this transceiver. . • • The transverter will use this frequency as the reference for converting frequencies. The transceiver displays a frequency down to the 10 Hz digit for 50 MHz. • COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS Note: In order to control the transceiver by computer. state. 3 Access Menu No. Note: x Menu Setting 12 – 1 24 – 1 48 – 1 48 – 2 96 – 1 192 – 1 384 – 1 576 – 1 Transfer Rate (bps) 1200 2400 4800 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 Stop Bits 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 51 You can use the front panel controls while using computer control. Settings done from the front panel are effective immediately. switch OFF the power to the transceiver and the computer. the selected VHF or UHF frequencies are not announced. and select 50 MHz. all values and settings on the front panel are restored. when coupled with other commercially available products and where lawful. • The defaults are 9600 bps and 1 stop bit. • Changing from the default (OFF) will automatically set the transmit power to approximately 5 W. s Connections Connecting the transceiver to the computer is easy. depending on which band you will use. Note: Before connecting this transceiver to the computer. See the diagram given in “CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT” {page 60}. and vice versa. 35.

00 ~ 60.00 1 1 1 TS-570S only . the internal tuner will be in-line for both transmitting and receiving. If tuning does not finish within about 20 seconds.00 ~ 30.00 ~ 53.00 ~ 51.) transmit power for tuning and 100 W transmit power.50 14.10 7.00 ~ 52. To do this. “AT” will disappear and the error beeps will stop.50 ~ 14. Press [AT TUNE] and release it immediately. “AT” appears to show that the internal tuner is inline (not bypassed). 11 ON.50 7. 2 Press [ANT] to select ANT 1 or ANT 2. Note: Tuning may restart to obtain the optimum matching condition although the current antenna tuner band has the preset data.00 53. “AT” blinks. • • To cancel tuning for any reason. It happens because of an unavoidable SWR calculation algorithm error between 10 W (approx.575 3. This may reduce interference to the receive frequency. The position of the capacitor is stored for each of the antenna tuner bands (see table below) and for each antenna connector (ANT 1 and ANT 2). Press [AT TUNE] to stop the alarm and tuning. the Preset function automatically positions the tuning capacitor without need for retuning. • • “AT” will appear to show that the internal tuner is inline (not bypassed).525 3. then retry tuning.50 21.50 2.50 ~ 18.12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER As explained in “ANTENNA CONNECTION” {page 1}. is output and the internal tuner is bypassed. In addition. 11 and select ON. • x x PRESETTING After each successful tuning session.15 21. Each time you go across the antenna tuner band. Pressing [AT TUNE] for more than one second while transmitting interrupts transmitting and starts tuning.10 ~ 14.50 ~ 21. adjust the antenna system to lower the SWR. 51.10 4. and “TX” and “CW” disappear. an alarm sounds. and does not indicate a malfunction.725 3.50 ~ 3. received signals will also pass through the internal tuner.00 1 5 See the display and check that tuning has successfully finished. and “TX” and “CW” appear. then the default data for 50 Ω is used. Tuning may not lower the SWR to 1:1 depending on conditions. consult the instruction manual that comes with the tuner. This section describes how to use the internal tuner. Morse code “SWR”.00 29. matching the impedance of the coaxial cable and antenna is very important. press [AT TUNE] again. • With an external tuner connected to the ANT 1 connector. you have the choice of using the internal or an external tuner. Tuning still may continue when the SWR meter indicates 1:1. If you access Menu No. If no Preset data exists for a particular band/antenna combination.50 ~ 29.575 ~ 3. you cannot select ANT 1 here.725 ~ 4.03 7. While using a different antenna tuner band for transmitting and receiving with Menu No.15 ~ 21. This does not indicate a malfunction. received signals bypass the internal tuner. Frequency Range (MHz) 0. “AT” stops blinking.50 10.03 ~ 7. 4 Press [AT TUNE] for more than one second. • • After successful tuning. 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 52 • • CW mode is automatically selected and tuning starts. 1 Select the transmit frequency. Selecting ANT 1 in this situation always causes the internal tuner to be bypassed. Before retrying tuning.525 ~ 3. Tuning will automatically turn off after approximately 60 seconds.85 ~ 2. an alarm. the internal tuner may not function for retuning. If the SWR of the antenna system is extremely high.50 ~ 10.10 ~ 7. Note: x x x The internal tuner will not tune outside the authorized transmit limits of Amateur bands.00 52.03 ~ 1.85 1.50 25. This happens because of the tuning algorithm. the Preset function stores the position of the tuning capacitor in memory.10 1 Frequency Range (MHz) 14. This does not indicate a malfunction.50 ~ 25. Even though the SWR meter shows more than one segment.10 ~ 7.00 30. For the external tuner. If tuning does not finish although the SWR meter indicates smaller than 3:1. x x x x 3 Press [AT TUNE] and release it immediately.50 18. While using CW Full Break-in. adjust the antenna system to lower the SWR.

recording stops. After recording a message via your transceiver microphone. 1 Select SSB. 2. • For example. • s Checking Messages 1 Select SSB. 4 To play back another message in sequence. start with step 3. 23 and select ON. For information on how to install the DRU-3A unit. Note: x x 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 To erase a message. or AM. and press [CLR]. MESSAGE PLAYBACK You can play back the message in channel 1. FM. 3 Press [CH 1]. • Up to three channels can be queued at the same time. 15 sec Channel 3: Approx. 3 Press [REC] to enter the Record Standby mode. or [CH 3] and begin speaking into your microphone. To switch this function ON. press [CLR]. • • Also when the maximum recording time passes. press the corresponding [CH 1]. You can even send a longer linked message repeatedly by using the Repeat function. 12 13 14 15 16 53 • To exit the Record Standby mode and quit recording your message. The maximum recording time for each channel is as follows: Channel 1: Approx. depending on which channel you want to check.12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES DRU-3A DIGITAL RECORDING UNIT (OPTIONAL) The optional DRU-3A unit allows you to record a voice message on up to 3 channels. [CH 2]. or [CH 3]. press [VOX] to switch the function OFF. 4 Press and hold down [CH 1]. The content of the channel is overwritten with the new message. Press the button that corresponds to the channel that you want to use. 2 If VOX is ON. press [CLR]. access Menu No. It is also possible to make a longer linked message. by consecutively playing back the messages of more than one channel. “AP 1– –” appears while playing back the message in channel 1. 23 and No. refer to “INSTALLING OPTIONS” {page 57}. 15 sec The DRU-3A is useful in many situations: • • • DX chasing or contest operation where repeated calls are necessary for extended periods of time Checking interference complaints to other equipment (lets you be in two places at one time) Checking or adjusting your transmit signal or your antenna(s) if it’s not convenient to be sitting in front of your microphone Helping a friend adjust his antenna or receive when he needs repeated test transmissions from you 6 To record a message in another channel. . Note: x x Pressing the [POWER] switch cancels playback in progress. • To interrupt playback. or [CH 3] while playing back the first message. • Use the same mode for transmitting and receiving. 30 sec Channel 2: Approx. The settings in Menu No. 24 are shared with CW Message Playback described in “CW MESSAGE MEMORY” {page 35}. you can then send that message. or AM. Pressing the [POWER] switch cancels recording in progress and clears the memory channel. [CH 2]. • “AP –” appears. 2 If VOX is ON. press and hold the desired channel button. • There are three channels for recording messages. 5 Release the button pressed in step 4 when you have finished recording your message. FM. The default is OFF. RECORDING MESSAGES This section explains how to record a single message. or 3 to check or to send. [CH 2]. press [VOX] to switch the function OFF. • Use the same mode for transmitting and receiving.

To change the volume. [CH 2]. and select the time in the range of 0 to 60 seconds. you can change the interval between each series of messages. 24. • Up to three channels can be queued at the same time. • For example. or press and hold Mic [PTT]. Depending on this selection. • Use the same mode for transmitting and receiving. 6 If you press [SEND] or Mic [PTT] in step 3. press [SEND]. [CH 2]. press [CLR]. use Menu No. the subsequent procedures differ. FM. 25. press [SEND] again or release Mic [PTT]. s Changing Volume Turning the AF control does not change the volume for playback. Use Menu No. or [CH 3] while playing back the first message. 5 To play back another message in sequence. • To interrupt playback. press the corresponding [CH 1].12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES s Sending Messages 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 54 1 Select SSB. • 3 If you switch OFF VOX in step 2. or AM. s Changing Inter-message Interval For repetitive message playback. 2 Press [VOX] to switch VOX ON or OFF. depending on which channel you want to use. “AP 1– –” appears while playing back the message in channel 1. . or [CH 3]. 4 Press [CH 1].

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Announcement VFO A frequency VFO B frequency Channel number and frequency “Q”. you can program the front panel [PF] button so that pressing [PF] makes the transceiver announce the displayed information. To interrupt the announcement. the transceiver automatically announces the new mode.12 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES VS-3 VOICE SYNTHESIZER (OPTIONAL) Install the optional VS-3 unit to use this function. the transceiver will announce different information depending on whether Voice 1 or Voice 2 is selected. you can program one of the Mic [PF] buttons for this function. A 200 ms pause also is made between the channel number and the frequency. Voice 2: • Peak readings for the S-meter are announced. the announcement is interrupted. 2 Press the [PF] button that you programmed. If you have the optional MC-47 microphone. Each time you change the transceiver mode such as VFO A/B or Memory Recall. For the kHz decimal point. For an explanation on how to install the VS-3 unit. • Note: If operating a button or a control changes the contents of the display while an announcement is in progress. If the memory channel has no data stored. Menu numbers and their settings are announced with a short pause (200 ms) between the menu number and the setting. for example. When you enter a number using the numeric keys in Entry mode or Memory Scroll mode. In addition. “open” is announced. press the [PF] button again. channel number and frequency “MENU”. The table below shows what the transceiver automatically announces when it enters a new mode. menu number and menu selection “enter” QUICK MEMO Quick Memory Recall1 [MR] [MENU] [ENT] 1 Menu1 Entry 2 When you change the channel or menu number in this mode. Voice 1: • VFO or memory channel frequencies are announced beginning with the 10 MHz digit and continuing through to the 10 Hz digit. the transceiver announces the new number. refer to “PROGRAM FUNCTION BUTTON” {page 49}. a short pause (200 ms) is made. Key Pressed [A/B] [M/V] New Mode VFO A VFO B Memory Recall 1 Steps: 1 Assign Voice 1 or Voice 2 to the front panel [PF] button or. the transceiver announces the entered number. “S5” or “20dB”. “point” is announced. one of the Mic [PF] buttons. For the MHz decimal point. For this method. • • Announcement is made based on Voice 1 or Voice 2 selection. refer to “INSTALLING OPTIONS” {page 57}. 55 . if you use the optional MC-47 microphone. 2 For the [PF] button.

IF-232C Interface Unit LF-30A Low-pass Filter YK-88C-1 CW Filter (500 Hz) YK-88CN-1 CW Filter (270 Hz) YK-88SN-1 SSB Filter (1.8 kHz) PG-2Z DC Cable MA-5 Mobile 5-band Antenna 15 16 56 .5 A) MC-43S Hand Microphone MC-47 Multi-function Microphone MC-60A Deluxe Desktop Microphone MC-80 Desktop Microphone MC-85 Multi-function Desktop Microphone MC-90 DSP-compatible Desktop Microphone HS-5 Deluxe Headphones 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 HS-6 Small Headphones SP-23 External Speaker SP-50B Mobile Speaker MB-430 Mobile Mounting Bracket DRU-3A Digital Recording Unit SO-2 Temperaturecompensated Crystal Oscillator (TCXO) VS-3 Voice Synthesizer Unit PC-1A Phone Patch Controller Using PC-1A with the transceiver does not comply with the European EMC standard. PS-53 Regulated DC Power Supply (22.OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 1 2 3 4 5 Microphone sensitivity is low in FM mode.

VS-3. 7 8 9 1 Remove the bottom case (8 screws). 1 Remove the 8 screws. 1 2 3 REMOVING THE BOTTOM CASE When installing the optional DRU-3A. 2 Remove the flat cable from the CN15 connector. 12 13 14 Cushion 15 16 57 . CN17 4 5 6 5 Reconnect the flat cable to the CN15 connector.INSTALLING OPTIONS The following equipment is required for installing the optional units. 2 Lift off the bottom case. or SO-2 unit. • The large IC on the DRU-3A must closely contact the cushion on the PC board. CN15 10 11 3 Peel off the paper backing from the cushion installed on the transceiver PC board. 6 Replace the bottom case (8 screws). remove the bottom case first. DRU-3A DIGITAL RECORDING UNIT CAUTION: SWITCH OFF THE POWER AND UNPLUG THE DC POWER CABLE BEFORE BEGINNING INSTALLATION. • • • Large Philips screwdriver Small Philips screwdriver 25 W pencil soldering iron (for the SO-2 unit only) DRU-3A 4 Plug the DRU-3A connector (CN901) into the CN17 connector.

Bottom cover 6 Re-install the 2 screws that you removed in step 3. 7 Replace the bottom cover (2 screws). 46. otherwise the filter will not function. 58 . Use only when the volume level is too low or too high.14 INSTALLING OPTIONS 1 2 3 4 5 VS-3 VOICE SYNTHESIZER UNIT CAUTION: SWITCH OFF THE POWER AND UNPLUG THE DC POWER CABLE BEFORE BEGINNING INSTALLATION. Note: After installing the filter. 2 Hold the VS-3 unit with the component side facing inward. CN8 CN9 VR8 5 While holding the filter. Component side VS-3 CN16 4 Align the pins of the transceiver CN8 and CN9 connectors with the two connectors on the filter. Filter 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Note: The VR8 allows you to adjust the volume for voice announcement. • 3 Replace the bottom case (8 screws). Take care to properly align the pins. 1 Remove the bottom case (8 screws). 3 Remove the 2 screws from the OPTION FILTER section of the transceiver PC board. 2 Remove the bottom cover. and insert the VS-3 connector into the transceiver CN16 connector. YK-88C-1/ YK-88CN-1/ YK-88SN-1 FILTERS CAUTION: SWITCH OFF THE POWER AND UNPLUG THE DC POWER CABLE BEFORE BEGINNING INSTALLATION. carefully push down until the filter snaps into place. be sure to select the appropriate setting in Menu No. 1 Remove the 2 screws from the bottom cover of the transceiver.

CN1 15 Reconnect the cable to the CN1 connector. and lock it using the cable holder. 16 Pull the CN1 connector cable. 9 Turn the PC board over. • Be careful with the orientation of the clamp. Heat sink 11 12 13 14 15 16 5 Remove the cable from the CN1 connector. 12 Re-install the 13 screws on the PC board. Clamp 9 10 10 Solder the five pins of the SO-2 unit to the PC board. • Be careful not to damage the flat cables connected to the PC board. 13 Re-install the protective cover on the PC board (6 screws). 59 . 14 Re-position the clamp. then cut off the SO-2 pins extruding from the PC board. SO-2 4 5 3 Remove the 13 screws that fasten the PC board to the chassis. 17 Replace the bottom case (8 screws). 11 Re-position the PC board. Cut here 1 2 3 1 Remove the bottom case (8 screws). See the drawing in step 4. 2 Remove the protective cover installed on the PC board (6 screws). 7 Cut the leads of the R503 and R504 resistors.14 INSTALLING OPTIONS SO-2 TEMPERATURE-COMPENSATED CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR (TCXO) CAUTION: SWITCH OFF THE POWER AND UNPLUG THE DC POWER CABLE BEFORE BEGINNING INSTALLATION. 1 2 6 7 8 4 Remove the clamp that fastens the heat sink to the chassis. and not to drop the SO-2 unit. R504 R503 8 Insert the SO-2 unit into the specified position on the PC board. 6 Take the CN1 connector cable off the cable holder.

ANT DIN(6P) IF-232C RS-232C(25P) DIN(6P) Straight cable ACC 1 14 15 16 60 ACC 1 Rear panel view on TS-450S/690S/850S/ 950SDX Pin No.CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT 1 2 3 RS-232C serial port COMPUTER The COM connector allows you to directly connect a computer or dumb terminal by using an RS-232C cable terminated with a female 9-pin connector. Contact your dealer or a KENWOOD Service Center. use the optional IF-232C interface unit. TS-570 4 COM connector 5 6 Personal computer/ dumb terminal Straight cable COMPATIBLE TRANSCEIVER 7 8 9 10 11 When transferring data to or from another TS-570 or the TS-870S. Pin Name 1 GND 2 TXD 3 RXD 4 CTS 5 RTS 6 NC . See “APPENDIX” on page 70 for information related to this connector. Connect the IF-232C to the ACC 1 connector located on the compatible transceiver. No external hardware interface is required between your computer and the transceiver. 6-pin DIN plugs (E07-0654-XX) are available as options. TS-570 TS-570/870S COM Connector cable TS-450S/690S/850S/950SDX Cross-wired cable TS-570 12 13 Cross-wired cable See IF-232C manual. directly connect the two transceivers using the COM connectors. When transferring data to other KENWOOD transceivers.

+12 V DC is output when in TX mode (10 mA max. the amplifier enters TX mode. When connected with the common terminal. When connected with the common terminal. The TX/RX relay response time is 10 ms when you have selected CW Full Break-in and 25 ms when you have selected CW Semi Break-in. Note: The TX/RX control method differs depending on external amplifier models. Connect the demodulation input line of the RTTY equipment to pin 3 of the ACC 2 connector. 1 2 3 MCP power supply MCP Personal computer/ dumb terminal TS-570 ACC 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 LINEAR AMPLIFIER Connect an external transmit power amplifier to the REMOTE connector. ALC input from amplifier Approx. Some amplifiers enter the TX mode when the control terminal is grounded. For those amplifiers. switch ON the linear amplifier control relay via Menu No. Note: Do not share a single power supply between the transceiver and the RTTY equipment.). the transceiver enters TX mode. you cannot use the 6 m band to transmit.15 CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT RTTY EQUIPMENT Use the ACC 2 connector to connect to the RTTY equipment. External antenna tuner 15 TS-570 16 61 . 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Function Speaker output Common terminal Standby. Keep as wide a separation as possible between the transceiver and the RTTY equipment as practical to reduce noise-pickup by the transceiver. REMOTE connector Pin No. the external tuner will not function. Before using the external amplifier. Connect the RTTY key output line to pin 2 of the ACC 2 connector. Connect your 6 m band antenna to the ANT 2 connector. 39. Note: While using an external antenna tuner with the TS-570S. connect pin 2 of the REMOTE connector to the GND terminal of the amplifier and connect pin 4 of the connector to the control terminal of the amplifier. TS-570 AC LINE RF OUTPUT Control relay R T 4 1 6 7 2 5 3 Linear amplifier GND REMOTE Connector (Rear panel view) ANTENNA TUNER Use the ANT 1 connector and the AT connector to connect an external antenna tuner. the amplifier enters RX mode. when grounded. If you connect the external tuner to the ANT 2 connector.

• Output impedance: 4. • AF output level is independent of AF control setting. 2.7 kΩ Shield for pin 3 Squelch control • Connect to TNC or MCP squelch control pin for digital operation. Connecting the TNC or MCP to a personal computer or dumb terminal requires an RS-232C cable. or from a Clover interface. • Squelch open: Low impedance • Squelch closed: High impedance S-meter output Not connected Chassis ground Transceiver PTT line control • Connect to TNC or MCP transmit/receive switching pin for digital operation. • AF output level can be changed via Menu No.8 V) and other modes (approx. • Prevents the TNC from transmitting while the receiver squelch is open. the input impedance of that equipment must be higher than 1 MΩ. G-TORTM. 34. Not connected Microphone audio input • Connect to TNC or MCP transmit data pin for digital operation. Keep as wide a separation as possible between the transceiver and the computer as practical to reduce noise-pickup by the transceiver.5 ~ 3. PacTOR. Do not share a single power supply between the transceiver and the TNC or MCP. Also use the ACC 2 connector to connect SSTV and phone patch equipment.8 V). The output voltage of Pin No. the S-meter will not give accurate readings. • • x x Connect the TNC or MCP to the ACC 2 connector using a cable equipped with a 13-pin DIN plug.15 CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 MCP AND TNC Use the ACC 2 connector to connect the input/output lines from a Terminal Node Controller (TNC) for Packet operation. Note: Pin No. In addition. the output voltage differs between FM (approx. or FAX. If you connect to equipment having lower impedance.8 ~ 3. 6 (SMET) is not 0 V even when no signal is present. • Microphone audio input is muted when the transceiver is switched to the transmit mode. a Multimode Communications Processor (MCP) for operation on Packet. 0. When connecting this pin to peripheral equipment such as a personal computer. AMTOR. 1 2 3 Pin Name NC RTK ANO Function Not connected RTTY key input AF output from receiver • Connect to TNC or MCP receive data pin for digital operation. Shield for pin 11 PTT control (in parallel with MIC jack) for connecting a footswitch or other external controller Black Red TNC/MCP power supply 4 5 GND PSQ 6 7 8 9 SMET NC GND PKS 10 11 12 13 NC PKD GND SS TNC/MCP Personal computer dumb terminal TS-570 13 9 5 1 10 6 2 11 7 3 12 8 4 PS-53 ACC 2 Connector (Rear panel view) 62 .

CLEANING The buttons. the transceiver will operate in accordance with these operating instructions. Please do not send subassemblies or printed circuit boards. Remove the controls from the transceiver and clean them with a neutral detergent and warm water. or other proof-of-purchase showing the date of sale. When operated properly. controls and case of the transceiver are likely to become soiled after extended use. Send the complete transceiver.MAINTENANCE GENERAL INFORMATION Your transceiver has been factory aligned and tested to specification before shipment. Help us help you by providing the following: 1 Model and serial number of equipment 2 Question or problem you are having 3 Other equipment in your station pertaining to the problem 4 Meter readings 5 Other related information (Menu setup. mode. Under normal circumstances. Attempting service or alignment without factory authorization can void the transceiver warranty. You may return your transceiver for service to the authorized KENWOOD dealer from whom you purchased it or any authorized KENWOOD service center. Tag all returned items with your name and call sign for identification. button sequence to induce malfunction. Record the date of purchase. Use a neutral detergent (no strong chemicals) and a damp cloth to clean the case. For your own information. The information in this section gives some general service procedures requiring little or no test equipment. and to the point. serial number and dealer from whom the transceiver was purchased. Include both your telephone number and fax number (if available) along with your name and address in case the service technician needs to call for further explanation while investigating your problem. frequency. When claiming warranty service. Don’t return accessory items unless you feel they are directly related to the service problem. They should only be readjusted by a qualified technician who is familiar with this transceiver and has the necessary test equipment. Note: x x x 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 63 SERVICE If it is ever necessary to return the equipment to your dealer or service center for repair. retain a written record of any maintenance performed on the transceiver. the transceiver will provide years of service and enjoyment without requiring further realignment. SERVICE NOTE Dear YL/OM. etc. please include a photocopy of the bill of sale. please make your note short. . Include a full description of the problems experienced. complete. coils and resistors in the transceiver were preset at the factory.) CAUTION: DO NOT PACK THE EQUIPMENT IN CRUSHED NEWSPAPERS FOR SHIPMENT! EXTENSIVE DAMAGE MAY RESULT DURING ROUGH HANDLING OR SHIPPING. pack the transceiver in its original box and packing material. Please mention the model and serial number of the transceiver in any communication regarding the problem. All adjustable trimmers. If you desire to correspond on a technical or operational problem. A copy of the service report will be returned with the transceiver.

2 Remove the bottom case (8 screws) from the transceiver. 3 Remove the protective cover installed on the PC board (6 screws). 4 Tune in a standard frequency station such as WWV or WWVH at.000 MHz. you cannot perform this adjustment. You should hear a beat tone of approximately 800 Hz. For 800 Hz: fsidetone = 800 Hz ±50 ppm (= 800 ±0. for example.04 Hz) where ∆freference is the shift from the 20 MHz reference frequency Fuse (4A) 3 Open the inner cover. • • • This sidetone produces a double beat tone when it combines with the received signal. DO NOT perform this adjustment.000 x ∆freference) + 800 Hz where ∆freference is the shift from the 20 MHz reference frequency 5 Close your CW key and you will hear a transmit sidetone of approximately 800 Hz. • Be careful not to damage the speaker cable connected to the PC board.000 or 15. 2 Remove the 12 screws that fasten the inner cover to the chassis. If you have installed the optional SO-2 unit. 20 (CW RX pitch): 800 Hz IF SHIFT control: Center Receive bandwidth {page 38}: 600 Hz RIT function: OFF Break-in function (VOX): OFF 7 Re-install the protective cover on the PC board (6 screws). 1 Set the following on the transceiver: • • • • • • • Mode: CW AF control: Center Menu No. Unless necessary. TC500 ACCESSING THE INTERNAL FUSE 1 Remove the top case (8 screws) from the transceiver. The transceiver is adjusted at the factory prior to shipping. 64 . Adjust the AF control to hear the double beat clearly. 8 Re-install the bottom case (8 screws). • • • Adjust the Tuning control so that the display reads the exact frequency of the station. For 800 Hz: faf = (fdisplay/20. 10.16 MAINTENANCE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 INTERNAL ADJUSTMENTS REFERENCE FREQUENCY CALIBRATION Note: x x 6 Adjust the TC500 trimmer to minimize the frequency difference between the received 800 Hz tone and the 800 Hz sidetone.

1 The filter for digital operation is selected. Have a new battery installed by your dealer or at a KENWOOD Service Center. If the problem remains. After inspecting and correcting any problems. 2 The Frequency Lock function is ON. 3 Press [N. Nothing appears on the display. or turning controls per instructions in this manual. then press the appropriate buttons. 3 Noise Reduction 1 or 2 is ON.000 MHz. Please review this table. 1 Review “WRITING CONVENTIONS FOLLOWED”. Probable Cause 1 DC power supply is OFF. or operator error due to incomplete programming. 4 Press [B. 20. Placing a powered handy transceiver near this transceiver may cause noise in this transceiver. the transceiver does not function normally.LOCK] to switch OFF function. The Frequency Lock function is ON. “14. The frequency cannot be changed. without doing Full Reset. do a Full Reset.7 to 15. SSB audio quality is very poor.8 V DC).R. After understanding what data will be lost. install a new fuse of the specified rating. and the appropriate section(s) of this instruction manual. do a Full Reset. 4 Beat Cancel is ON. After switching ON the transceiver.8 V DC ±15% (11. 4 The buttons on the transceiver are unavailable while operating the Tuning control. After understanding what data will be lost. After switching ON the power. 2 Review “MICROPROCESSOR RESET”. 10 11 12 7 48 18 37 13 14 15 16 38 38 65 .LOCK] to switch OFF function.8 V DC power supply and pressing [POWER]. Black: negative (–) 3 Confirm the connections to the DC power supply are secure. accidental incorrect control settings. Confirm polarities are correct. These problems are usually not caused by circuit failure.] to switch OFF function. 2 Press [F. 2 Inspect the power cable. 1 Correct the input voltage or use a 12 to 16 V battery. 2 Faulty power cable Corrective Action 1 Switch ON the DC power supply. and no receiver noise is heard.C. 3 Review “MICROPROCESSOR RESET”. Problem The transceiver will not power up after connecting a 13.000 MHz and 30.16 MAINTENANCE TROUBLESHOOTING The problems described in this table are commonly encountered operational malfunctions.00 MHz USB” appears and all data is lost. 32 to OFF. The transceiver does not respond correctly after pressing button or key combinations. do a Partial Reset. 4 Stop operating the Tuning control. For example. the high or low audio frequencies are absent. no digits or incorrect digits appear on the display.000 MHz. Red: positive (+). 39 9 i 48 48 1 Procedures are not being followed precisely. beat tones may be heard on the following frequencies: 10. 4 Power cable fuse is open. do a Partial Reset. 2 Turn the DSP SLOPE (LOW) control counterclockwise and the DSP SLOPE (HIGH) control clockwise. These types of difficulties are usually caused by improper hook-up. Note: x x 1 2 3 Due to frequency relationships of some circuits in this transceiver. 4 Look for the cause of the blown fuse. 3 The microprocessor and its memory need resetting. Page Ref. Press [F.000. 2 48 The backup lithium battery voltage is too low. 2 2 1 The input voltage is outside 13. before assuming your transceiver is defective. 1 Change Menu No. This is not a fault. 13 2 4 5 6 7 8 3 The power cable is not connected securely. 2 The microprocessor has malfunctioned. 2 The DSP SLOPE (LOW) control or DSP SLOPE (HIGH) control was incorrectly set.] to switch OFF function. If the problem remains.

14 37 15 15 36. Secure the connector with the locking ring. 3 Press [LSB/USB] or [FM/AM] to select a voice mode. 2 Unlock at least two memory channels. 1 Adjust the SQL control to just eliminate background noise. Store different start and end frequencies. 5 Review sections “IF FILTER” and “CHANGING RECEIVE BANDWIDTH”. Program Scan will not start scanning. 32 to OFF. 4 The filter for digital operation was selected. No signals are received or receive sensitivity seems poor. The RF control was set too low. ensure the MIC connector has no foreign objects in it. 6 Press [ANT] to select the other antenna connector. [CW/FSK]. 14 14 44 39 47 The start and end frequencies are identical. Memory Scan will not scan one of the stored channels. and set the controls accordingly. S-meter is reading full scale.37 6 The wrong antenna connector (ANT 1/ANT 2) was selected. Adjust the antenna system to lower the SWR. 52 1 The microphone plug was not inserted completely into the MIC connector.16 MAINTENANCE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 No signals are received or receive sensitivity seems poor. 2 Change Menu No. 2 The Transmit Inhibit function is ON. 4 Mic [PTT] is pressed. 2 Less than two memory channels were unlocked. The SWR of the antenna system is too high. With Group Scan selected. 4 Change Menu No. Received signals are totally unintelligible. 2 The Attenuator function is ON. 43 1 The internal tuner is bypassed immediately after tuning is started. 3 18 14 18 48 66 . 5 Press [ANT] to select the other antenna connector. Adjust the antenna system to lower the SWR. 2 Press [ATT] to switch OFF function. 48 37 13 The wrong modulation mode was selected. 1 The SQL control was not set correctly. Press [LSB/USB]. 3 Store data in at least two memory channels. 5 The receive bandwidth was incorrectly set. and the transceiver is now in transmit mode. the desired channel is NOT locked out. Memory Scan will not start scanning. 3 Press [SEND] to return to receive mode. 3 Less than two memory channels were programmed. Tuning does not finish successfully. 7 The receive preamplifier is OFF. 38 to OFF. 1 Turn the SQL control counterclockwise. Turn the RF control fully clockwise. 7 Press [PRE-AMP] to switch ON function. 4 Release Mic [PTT]. 3 CW or FSK was selected instead of a voice mode. or [FM/AM] to select the correct modulation mode. • Tuning does not successfully finish depending on conditions although the SWR meter indicates smaller than 3:1. then plug in the connector. 5 The wrong antenna connector (ANT 1/ANT 2) was selected. You cannot transmit even though you press Mic [PTT] or transmissions result in no contacts. The impedance of the coaxial cable and antenna was not matched. the channel you want to scan is in a different group. 1 Turn OFF the power. Select the group that contains the memory channel you want to scan. 1 The SQL control is fully clockwise. 3 [SEND] was pressed.

3 Adjust TX and RX levels using Menu Nos. Refer to “COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS”. 1 When in SSB or AM mode. 5 The TX delay time parameter in 5 Set the TNC/MCP TX delay time to your TNC/MCP was incorrectly set. 24 Digital operation results in few or no connects or contacts with other stations. Increase the gain via Menu No. and run a utility not functioning correctly. 2 Check antenna connections.16 MAINTENANCE Attempting to transmit results in the “HELLO” message appearing and the receive mode being restored. 16. 62 23. Confirm that the antenna tuner is reporting a low SWR. 1 The linear amplifier control relay is OFF. 39 to ON. transceiver.7 to 15. 1 Problem with the RS-232C cable 1 Check the cable and cable that connects the computer to the connections. 17 18 61 24 You cannot access and use 10 meter band repeaters. Refer to “FM REPEATER OPERATION”. 2 Confirm that the RIT and XIT functions are switched OFF. 2 The REMOTE connector wiring is wrong or faulty. and level controls on your TNC/MCP. The VOX gain was set too low. 2 Reduce the SWR of the antenna system. 1 Review “FM REPEATER OPERATION” and select the correct frequency and type of subtone. more than 300 ms.8 V DC). 1 The repeater requires a subtone frequency for access. 2 Different transmit and receive frequencies are being used. 2 Communication parameters set in 2 Use the same parameters in the your terminal program do not match terminal program and the transceiver parameters. and TNC or MCP are incorrect. 33 and 34. 2 Inspect the REMOTE connector wiring and correct as necessary.30. 4 Reorient/relocate your antenna or increase your antenna gain. — — 60 12 13 14 51 — 15 16 67 . 3 Correct the input voltage or use a 12 to 16 V battery. 1 Change Menu No. 1 Check the antenna connection. 2 You are not operating split frequency. 1 The antenna was not connected correctly. Correct as necessary. increase the microphone gain. Confirm that you are NOT operating split frequency. 1 Physical connections between the transceiver. computer. Linear amplifier does not operate. 3 The input voltage is outside 13. transceiver. 18 Attempts at controlling the transceiver by computer have failed. 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 2 15 1 The transceiver has low transmit power. VOX does not operate. 4 Your transmitted signal or the incoming receive signal is too weak. 4 Use the provided or an optional DC power cable. 4 An inappropriate DC power cable is being used. 2 The impedances of the antenna and transceiver are not properly matched.8 V DC ±15% (11. 32 10 11 3 The levels between the transceiver and the TNC/MCP are incorrect. 2 You must transmit on the repeater’s input frequency and receive on the repeater’s output frequency. 1 Re-check all connections using this manual. and your computer hardware manual as references. or software settings in the TNC or MCP are wrong. 1 The microphone gain was set too low. your TNC/MCP manual. program to test the computer serial port. 2 Poor antenna system connections are causing high SWR. 3 The serial port on your computer is 3 Disconnect the computer from the transceiver.

168 MHz 24. FSK.6 x 3. Belgium. Spain 1.8 3. (281 x 107 x 314 mm / 11.8 MHz: Europe. France.99 MHz ~ 29.5 7. F3E (FM).0 ~ 54. Spain 3.99 kHz 600 Ω 1.2 x 12. Max. Holland.35 MHz ~ 21.83 MHz: Belgium.1 MHz: Europe.7 MHz 50 ~ 54 MHz Wide Narrow ±5 kHz or less ±2.4 in.0 4.0 7.45 MHz ~ 24. 6.0 1 ~ ~ ~ 2.7 ~ 150 Ω) DC 13.) Approx. France.8 kg (15 lbs) 160 m band 80 m band 40 m band 30 m band Frequency range 20 m band 17 m band 15 m band 12 m band 10 m band 6 m band SSB. FM AM SSB Modulation FM AM Spurious emissions Carrier suppression Unwanted sideband suppression (modulation frequency 1. A1A (CW). Min.5 A 2A –10°C ~ 50°C (+14°F ~ 122°F) Within ±10 PPM Within ±10 PPM 270 x 96 x 271 mm / 10.89 28. 1. Spain Belgium. Holland. Min. USB).3 2 3 4 MHz MHz MHz ~ 10. Spain: 10 W fixed on 160 m band 68 . Spain 7.) Receive (no signal) TS-570D J3E (LSB.SPECIFICATIONS GENERAL TS-570S Mode Number of memory channels Antenna impedance Supply voltage Grounding method Current Usable temperature range Frequency stability (–10°C ~ 50°C) Frequency accuracy (at room temperature) Dimensions [W x H x D] (Projections included) Weight Transmit (max.0 21.0 MHz Max. Holland.0 kHz) Maximum frequency deviation (FM) XIT shift frequency range Microphone impedance 1 2 3 4 5 TRANSMITTER 1.7 in. Holland.85 MHz: France.1 x 4.0 10.8 ~ 29. France.1 14.5 kHz or less ±9.8 V ± 15% Negative ground 20. F1D (FSK) 100 50 Ω (with Antenna Tuner 16.7 100 W 5W 25 W 5W Balanced MHz 18.81 MHz: Europe. Belgium.8 x 10.15 MHz ~ 14. Belgium. CW.0 50.068 ~ 18. A3E (AM). Output power 5 Reactance Low level –50 dB or less –60 dB or less 40 dB or more 40 dB or more 1.

83 MHz. 2nd: 8. CW. –50 dB: 20 kHz –6 dB: 12 kHz.705 MHz 70 dB or more 70 dB or more 70 dB or more 70 dB or more ±9.2 kHz.25 µV or less 0.705 MHz ~ 24.5 MHz 24. CW.4 kHz –6 dB: 4 kHz. FSK 28 MHz ~ 30 MHz 50 MHz ~ 54 MHz Selectivity AM FM Image rejection 1st IF rejection RIT shift frequency range SSB.25 µV or less 1. FSK.8 MHz ~ 30 MHz 50 MHz ~ 54 MHz 500 kHz ~ 1.99 kHz 20 µV or less 2 µV or less 2 µV or less 0. 10% distortion) Audio output impedance Specifications are subject to change without notice or obligation due to ongoing technological developments. 3rd: 455 kHz (FM only) 4 µV or less 0.8 MHz ~ 30 MHz 50 MHz ~ 54 MHz 1.5 W or more 8Ω 1.5 MHz 24.25 µV or less –6 dB: 2.6 µV or less 2 µV or less 1.5 MHz ~ 30 MHz 50 MHz ~ 54 MHz FM (at 12 dB SINAD) SSB.13 µV or less 31.2 µV or less 0.SPECIFICATIONS RECEIVER TS-570S Circuit type Frequency range Intermediate frequency 500 kHz ~ 1.5 MHz ~ 30 MHz 50 MHz ~ 54 MHz Sensitivity AM (at 10 dB (S+N)/N) 500 kHz ~ 1. AM Squelch sensitivity FM Audio output (8 Ω.13 µV or less 0.3 µV or less 1. 69 . CW.705 MHz ~ 24. FSK (at 10 dB (S+N)/N) TS-570D Double conversion superheterodyne FM only: Triple conversion superheterodyne 500 kHz ~ 60 MHz 500 kHz ~ 30 MHz 1st: 73.25 µV or less 0.3 µV or less 0.05 MHz. –60 dB: 4.705 MHz 1. –50 dB: 25 kHz 1.705 MHz SSB.705 MHz ~ 30 MHz 50 MHz ~ 54 MHz 28 MHz ~ 30 MHz 50 MHz ~ 54 MHz 1.

Serial data transmission uses time-division methods over a single line. (Ref. therefore. 8 data bits. For example. The serial form is. The computer and transceiver cannot be allowed to send data at the same time! The required control is achieved by using the RTS and CTS lines. A bit is the smallest piece of information that the computer can handle. serial interface for communicating through the male 9-PIN RS-232C COM connector. asynchronous.: Transceiver) — Transmit data Receive data — Signal ground — Receive enable Transmit enable — I/O — Output Input — — Input Output — From a practical standpoint. therefore. TXD: Receive data is serial data transferred from the computer to the transceiver. Only 3 lines are required theoretically for control of the transceiver via the computer: 5 4 3 2 1 • • • Transmit data Receive data Ground Rear panel view COM COM Pin Name Pin No. Bytes are constructed with 1 start bit.: Computer) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 NC RXD TXD NC GND NC RTS CTS NC Function (Ref. while the serial method is slower and requires less complicated equipment.” is called a computer control command. GND: Signal ground pin RTS: This signal is applied to the transceiver. A byte is composed of eight bits. The pinout and the pin functions of the COM connector are as shown below: COM 9 8 7 6 CONTROL OPERATION Most computers handle data in the form of “bits” and “bytes”. 70 . it is also necessary to incorporate some means of controlling when this data transfer will occur. It is used to inhibit transmit data from the computer when the transceiver is not ready to receive the data. Transmit data is inhibited when the level is low. Programming methods vary from computer to computer.” is sent from the computer. Transmit data is stopped when the level is low. the transceiver is placed into the transmit mode whenever the character string “TX. There are numerous commands available for control of the transceiver. a less expensive alternative. No parity is used. This is the most convenient form for most computer data. These commands may be incorporated into a computer program written in any high level language. refer to the instruction manuals provided with the terminal program and computer.q APPENDIX APPENDIX: COM CONNECTOR PROTOCOL HARDWARE DESCRIPTION This transceiver uses a full-duplex. It tells the transceiver what to do. It is used to inhibit transmit data from the transceiver when the computer is not ready to receive the data. Using a single line also offers the advantage of reducing the number of errors due to line noise. The parallel method is faster but more complicated. CTS: This signal is applied from the transceiver. The character string “TX. This data may be sent in the form of either serial or parallel data strings. and 1 stop bit (4800 bps can be configured for 1 or 2 stop bits). RXD: Transmit data is serial data transferred from the transceiver to the computer.

A communication error occurred such as an overrun or framing error during a serial data transmission. Not enough parameters specified (No direction given for the IF shift) Not enough digits (Only three frequency digits given) Commands can be classified as shown below: Input command (Input to the transceiver) Computer control commands Output command (From the transceiver) Set command (Sets a particular condition) Read command (Reads an answer) Answer command (Transmits a condition) IS + 1000. Command was not executed due to the current status of the transceiver (even though the command syntax was correct). EXAMPLE: Command to set VFO A to 7 MHz FA 00007000000 . When configuring parameters.APPENDIX q COMPUTER CONTROL COMMANDS A computer control command is composed of an alphabetical command. various parameters. the following command is returned to the computer: “FA00007000000. Receive data was sent but processing was not completed. note the following in the case of the FA command (Frequency of VFO A): • To set the frequency to 7 MHz. Error Message ?.” Note: x x x • • Command syntax was incorrect. Refer to the Parameter Table {page 73} and the Computer Control Command Tables {page 75} to configure the appropriate parameters.” • (Read command) When the Read command above has been sent. 71 . s Alphabetical Commands A command consists of 2 alphabetical characters. Receive data is not processed if the frequency is entered from the keypad. the following command is sent from the computer to the transceiver: “FA. Program execution may be delayed while turning the Tuning control rapidly. Too many digits (Five frequency digits given) Note: If a particular parameter is not applicable to this transceiver. it is necessary to use a semicolon (. the parameter digits should be filled using any character except the ASCII control codes (00 to 1Fh) and the terminator (. be careful not to make the following mistakes. (Answer command) Do not use the control characters 00 to 1Fh since they are either ignored or cause a “?” answer. the transceiver can send the following error messages.). The digit where this special character must appear differs depending on the command used.). You may use either lower or upper case characters. Note: Occasionally this message may not appear due to microprocessor transients in the transceiver. Terminator Parameters Alphabetical command s Parameters Parameters are used to specify information necessary to implement the desired command.” • (Set command) To read the frequency of VFO A. Reason for Error For example. The number of digits assigned to each parameter is also predetermined. s Error Messages In addition to the Answer command. IS+100. E. s Terminator To signal the end of a command. and the terminator that signals the end of the control command. (correct parameter: “IS+1000”) IS1000. Unnecessary characters between parameters IS+10000. O. The commands available for this transceiver are listed in the Alphabetical Command Table {page 72}. The parameters to be used for each command are predetermined. the following command is sent from the computer to the transceiver: “FA00007000000.

Sets or reads squelch level. Sets or reads CTCSS tone number (01~39). Fine function (OFF/ON) Sets TX (VFO A/B. Selects receive mode. Sets or reads AGC time constant. Sets or reads RF gain. Sets or reads VOX gain. Selects transmit mode. MIC UP function Sets or reads VOX delay time. memory channel). Reads busy signals. Sets or reads CW Auto Zero-beat (OFF/ON). memory channel). Raises RIT frequency. Sets or reads RIT (OFF/ON). Sets or reads Speech Processor (OFF/ON). Sets or reads subtone number (01~39). Reads model number of the transceiver. Resets the transceiver. Reads memory. Sets or reads power (OFF/ON). Reads status of the transceiver. Clears RIT frequency. Lowers RIT frequency. Sets or reads low cut-off frequency. Sets VOX (OFF/ON). Sets or reads Frequency Lock (OFF/ON). Writes into memory. Command PB PC PR PS PT RA RC RD RG RM RT RU RX SC SD SH SL SM SQ SR TN TO TX UP VD VG VR VX XT Function DRU or CW message playback Sets or reads transmit power. Sets or reads CTCSS (OFF/ON). Sets or reads modulation modes. Sets or reads Noise Reduction. Sets RX (VFO A/B. Sets or reads VFO A frequency. Sets or reads IF shift. Converts input characters into Morse code. Sets or reads high cut-off frequency. Sets or reads keying speed while using the KY command or the built-in keyer. 72 . Sets or reads RF ATT (attenuator). Triggers the Voice Synthesizer for message output. Sets XIT (OFF/ON). DRU or CW message recording Sets or reads memory channels.q APPENDIX s Alphabetical Command Table Command AC AG AI AN BC BY CA CN CT DN EX FA FB FR FS FT FW GT ID IF IS KS KY LK LM MC MD MG MR MW NB NR PA Function Antenna Tuner THRU/IN-LINE. Sets or reads MIC gain. Sets or reads filter bandwidth. and tuning START/CANCEL Sets or reads AF gain. Sets or reads Beat Cancel. Reads S-meter. Sets or reads Semi Break-in delay time. Sets or reads Preamplifier (OFF/ON). Selects a meter function or reads meter values. Sets or reads Scan (OFF/ON). Sets or reads VFO B frequency. Sets or reads Noise Blanker (OFF/ON). Sets or reads Subtone (OFF/ON). Sets or reads CW RX pitch. MIC DOWN function Sets or reads Menu. Auto information Selects antenna connector (ANT 1/ANT 2).

Represented in msec using 0000~1000. 002: Fast 004: Slow “+”: Upward freq. Contains the CW message. 3: Both 1 and 2. A Set command cancels recording. shift Represented in Hz using 0000~1100. See the subtone frequency table on page 25. 1: Channel 1 2: Channel 2 3: Channel 3 0: Antenna tuner thru 1: Antenna tuner in-line Represented using 000 (min. Ex.APPENDIX q s Parameter Table Format No.)~ 060 (max.32 kHz Represented using 00~99. Represented in words per minute using 010 (min.: 00014230000 is 14. 35 36 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 No. TS-570S: 018 TS-570D: 017 RM command: 0000~0008 SM command: 0000~0015 Relative values are output. Ex. 1: Voice 1 0: 1: 2: 0: 1: 2: 2: Voice 2 2 MODE 1 3 FUNCTION 1 4 FREQUENCY 11 5 RIT/XIT FREQUENCY MEMORY CHANNEL MEMORY CHANNEL SPLIT DATA MEMORY LOCKOUT TX/RX TONE NUMBER MODEL NUMBER METER VALUE METER SWITCH 5 0: No selection 5: AM 6: FSK 1: LSB 7: CW-R 2: USB 8: No selection 3: CW 4: FM 9: FSK-R 0: VFO A 1: VFO B 2: Memory Represented in Hz. Represented in watts using 005~100.: Ch.230 MHz The first digit is “+” or “–”. Represented using 0000~9999. of Digits 1 0: OFF Format No.). MG command: 000~100 0: AI OFF 1: IF command outputs its Answer command periodically.) 1: Transmit (End freq. shift (or “ ”) “–”: Downward freq. Represented using 00 (400 Hz min.).0 kHz Low cut-off 00: 10 Hz 20: 1000 Hz Represented using 001 (min. the corresponding Answer command is output. 1: Channel 1 2: Channel 2 3: Channel 3 Represented using 000 (min. 1 No.)~255 (max.) ~ 12 (1000 Hz max. 0: No selection 1: SWR 2: COMP 3: ALC 0: No playback A Set command cancels playback. See table on page 74.) (Start/End freq. 1: ANT 1 2: ANT 2 7 9 10 11 14 2 1 1 1 2 45 LOAD MESSAGE 1 46 47 49 LEVEL POWER CONTROL SEMI BREAK-IN DELAY TIME SYSTEM RESET VOX DELAY TIME CW RX PITCH 3 3 4 16 3 22 4 50 1 24 1 51 52 4 2 27 PLAYBACK CHANNEL 1 53 DSP SLOPE 2 30 31 ANTENNA TUNER GAIN 1 3 54 55 56 VOX GAIN VOICE RECALL NOISE REDUCTION BEAT CANCEL 3 1 1 32 AI NUMBER 1 57 1 33 ANTENNA NUMBER Noise Reduction OFF Noise Reduction 1 Noise Reduction 2 Beat Cancel OFF Beat Cancel ON Enhanced Beat Cancel ON 1 73 . 50 ms steps. 2: For parameter changes.)~255 (max. Represented using 00~20 High cut-off 00: 5.0 kHz 20: 1.: +5320 is +5. 1: Partial Reset ([A/B]+ POWER ON) 2: Full Reset ([A=B]+ POWER ON) Represented in msec using 0000~3000.90~99) 0: Not locked out 1: Locked out 0: Receive 1: Transmit Represents the tone number (01~39).) ~ 009 (max. 0: Buffer space available 1: Buffer space not available 0: Not recording. Represents the type of transceiver. of Digits 3 4 4 3 1 4 3 24 1 Name SW Format 1: ON Name MENU NUMBER MENU SELECTION FILTER WIDTH AGC TIME CONSTANT IF SHIFT DIRECTION IF SHIFT FREQUENCY KEYER SPEED KEYER MESSAGE KEYER BUFFER Format Represented using 000~051.).). 5 W steps. and the remaining four digits indicate the frequency in Hz.). 0: Receive (Start freq.

5 20 25 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON TO CO OFF ON 7. 50~53: 0050~0053 Function Nos.0:1: 0000~0015 C 4 5 6 7 8 9 74 .q APPENDIX s Menu Selection Table for “EX” Command Menu No.0 OFF HB 0 5 0 1 Low High B C 400 450 OFF 1 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 170 OFF 1275 OFF 0 0 12-1 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 1 ON ON ON 200 ON 2125 1200 1 1 24-1 ON ON ON ON 50 FP 10 2 BB 15 3 C 20 4 25 5 6 7 8 9 Subtone frequency Nos. 48~51: 0080~0083 Function Nos. 00~40: 0000~0040 Menu Nos. 60~76: 0060~0076 OFF: 0099 OFF 1800 500 OFF 1 2 OFF ON OFF Auto HB 1 FP 2 270 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 BB 3 2.5 20 2.4 2. Subtone type CW RX pitch/ TX sidetone TX sidetone volume Semi-automatic key Playback repeat Playback repeat interval Playback volume Auto weighting Auto weighting reversed Keying priority over playback FSK shift FSK polarity FSK tone freq.5:1~4. 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 Menu Item Display brightness Beep output level [UP]/[DOWN] MULTI/CH control (SSB/CW/FSK/AM) MULTI/CH control (FM) MULTI/CH control (rounds off freq.) MULTI/CH control (AM broadcast band) Memory-VFO split Tunable/fixed freq. Program Scan Hold Scan resume Antenna tuner in RX mode NR2 Time constant TX filter (SSB/AM) TX equalizer Speech processor VOX gain MIC gain (FM) Subtone freq. Digital operation filter AF input level (MCP/TNC TX) AF output level (MCP/TNC RX) COM communication parameters Data transfer enable Data transfer method TX inhibit Linear amplifier relay Transverter [PF] Mic [PF1] Mic [PF2] Mic [PF3] Mic [PF4] IF filter Transmitted-signal monitor volume Auto zero-beat with RIT Keyer locked-weight change RX equalizer Noise reduction 1 level change Parameter 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 0010 0011 0012 OFF d4 d3 d2 d1 OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 100 500 1000 1 1 OFF 10 5 5 ON 9 10 10 12. 01~39: 0001~0039 500 2 550 3 600 4 650 5 700 6 750 7 800 8 850 9 900 950 1000 2 3 4 0~60 sec: 0000~0060 5 6 7 8 9 425 850 300 PSK 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 48-1 48-2 96-1 192-1 384-1 576-1 8 9 144 430 Menu Nos.

Function AN Parameter Format Parameter function Function ANTENNA NUMBER Parameter Format Parameter function P1 33 ANTENNA NUMBER Selects antenna connector ANT 1/ ANT 2. Tuning cannot be started if P2 is in the THRU state (If P2="0". COMPUTER CONTROL COMMAND TABLES Note: Parameters that have a Parameter Function of “NOT USED” are not supported by this transceiver. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A C P1 P2 P3 . Answer Read AC Function ANTENNA TUNER CONTROL Parameter Format Parameter function AI Function AUTO INFORMATION Parameter Format Parameter function P1 32 AI NUMBER Antenna Tuner THRU/IN -LINE. 9 10 11 12 13 14 A N P1 . y The format of the command output from the transceiver is shown. 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Set 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 A N P1 . When oblique lines are drawn in the 1st and 2nd columns.APPENDIX q READING COMMAND TABLES w u q e r Input i o !0 AC Function ANTENNA TUNER CONTROL Parameter Format Parameter function Antenna Tuner THRU/IN -LINE. refer to the Parameter Table {page 73}. and tuning START/CANCEL P1 P2 30 30 1 TUNE THRU/IN (Answer Only) TUNE THRU/IN TUNE OFF/ON Set 1 2 A C 1 2 A C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 P3 P2 P3 . AG AF GAIN Sets or reads AF gain. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Note: For other commands. there is no Read command. Note: P1 is used for Answer only. o Corresponds to the Format number in the Parameter Table. !0 Indicates the function of the parameter. Switching the transceiver ON restores "0". P1: RX THRU/IN P2: TX THRU/IN r The format of the Set command is shown. selecting "1" for P3 does not start tuning). there is no Set command. Read Read 1 2 A I Answer Answer Output Output 1 2 A I P1 . Tuning cannot be started if P2 is in the THRU state (If P2="0". P1 31 AF GAIN Set Input Input A G 1 2 A G 1 2 A G 3 .) may be entered for those parameters. t The format of the command for reading the transceiver’s current status is shown. Ex: For IF. i Corresponds to the parameter of the command format. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 t y q Command w Name e Function of the command Output A C P1 P2 P3 . Note: P1 is used for Answer only. 3 . 1 2 3 . 3 . P1 4 5 . Any character except the ASCII control codes (00 to 1Fh) and the terminator (. 3 . 75 . and tuning START/CANCEL Auto information OFF/ON P1 P2 30 30 1 TUNE THRU/IN (Answer Only) TUNE THRU/IN Set Set 1 2 A C 1 2 A C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 P3 TUNE OFF/ON Input 1 2 A 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Input P2 P3 . When oblique lines are drawn in the 1st and 2nd columns. P1: RX THRU/IN P2: TX THRU/IN I P1 . selecting "1" for P3 does not start tuning). When oblique lines are drawn in the 1st and 2nd columns. controls whether changing a parameter will or will not trigger the corresponding Answer command to be output. the Answer command is output if the step frequency or RIT/XIT frequency is changed. u The number of command digits is shown. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Read Read Answer A N 1 2 Answer Output Output 3 4 5 P1 6 7 8 . there is no Answer command. For the parameter formats.

Set 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 F 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 S P1 . FUNCTION TX Parameter Format Parameter function P1 3 FUNCTION Sets RX/TX (VFO A/B. Sets or reads Menu. BY Function BUSY Parameter Format Parameter function EX Function EXTENSION MENU Parameter Format Parameter function P1 P2 35 36 MENU NUMBER MENU SELECTION Reads busy signals. Set Input Read B C 1 2 . Output 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 CN CTCSS TONE NUMBER Sets or reads CTCSS tone number(01~39). 3 4 5 Answer Answer Output 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 4 5 P1 6 7 8 P2 9 10 11 12 13 14 . B Y P1 . 39 (1750 Hz) switches OFF the CTCSS. 3 . 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 C N Answer F R/T P1 . 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 B C P1 . Output Read 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Input C T P1 . Answer Output C A P1 . F R/T . P1 1 BUSY OFF/ON Set Set 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Input 1 2 E X 1 2 E X 1 2 E X 3 4 5 P1 6 7 8 P2 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 . 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 F R/T P1 .q APPENDIX BC BEAT CANCEL Sets or reads Beat Cancel. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Note: Using FR command always places the transceiver to simplexoperation status. Function FA Function FB FREQUENCY VFO A/ VFO B Parameter Format Parameter function P1 4 FREQUENCY Parameter Format Parameter function P1 1 CW AUTO ZEROBEAT OFF/ON Sets or reads VFO A/ VFO B frequency. 1 2 F A/B 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 P1 . 9 10 11 12 13 14 Input Read B Y 1 2 . Output Read 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 3 . Set Input Read Read 1 2 C A 1 2 3 . 76 . Output Read 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Input C N P1 Set 1 2 3 4 5 . 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Note: Selecting No. CA CW AUTO ZERO-BEAT Sets CW Auto Zero-Beat OFF/ON or reads status. Fine function OFF/ON Set Input Read C T . 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Input C A P1 . Set 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 DN/UP . CT Function CTCSS FUNCTION Parameter Format Parameter function P1 1 CTCSS OFF/ON FS Function FINE STEP Parameter Format Parameter function P1 1 FINE OFF/ON Sets or reads CTCSS OFF/ON status. Output Answer Answer Output 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Read 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Input B C P1 . memory channel). Function FR Parameter Format Parameter function Function Answer FT FUNCTION RX. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Answer Output 3 4 P1 5 . P1 14 CTCSS TONE NUMBER Set Input Read C N 1 2 . 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 F S Answer Answer Output 1 2 C 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 F T P1 . Function DN Parameter Format Parameter function P1 57 BEAT CANCEL Function UP DOWN/UP Parameter Format Parameter function Microphone DOWN/UP function. S P1 . 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 F A/B . Set 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 F A/B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 P1 .

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 G T K Y 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 K Y P2 . 9 10 11 12 13 14 GT Function AUTO GAIN CONTROL TIME CONSTANT Parameter Format Parameter function P1 39 AGC TIME CONSTANT KY Function CW KEYING Parameter Format Parameter function P1 P2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 P1 43 44 KEYER MESSAGE KEYER BUFFER Sets or reads AGC time constant. Insert “ ” for bytes that have no characters to make a 28-byte fixed length command. 2 K 2 3 . 9 10 11 12 13 14 Read 1 2 3 . 3 Note: When in FM mode. Set 1 2 3 4 P1 5 6 7 8 . Answer Output Read L M P1 . Parameter Format Parameter function P1 42 KEYER SPEED Set Input Read F W ./:=? Up to 24 characters can be converted as one sentence at one time. 3 4 5 4 5 Answer Read 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 Note: If P2 is positive or zero. " ' (( )) ( ) + . the transceiver returns “ ”. 9 10 11 12 13 14 Input Set G T 1 2 3 . Output Read K P1 . The “ ” bytes will not send any character. 1 2 L M 1 2 3 . 9 10 11 12 13 14 S P1 77 . 1 2 F W 3 4 5 P1 6 7 8 . 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Input S P1 2 S 2 3 . 3 4 5 9 10 11 12 13 14 Answer Output 4 5 P1 6 7 8 . 40 41 IF SHIFT DIRECTION IF SHIFT FREQUENCY 1 I 1 I 1 I 2 3 4 5 6 7 P2 8 . Supported characters include: Letters. Set 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 LM LOAD MESSAGE DRU or CW message recording Function Input Read 1 I 1 I 2 F 2 F 3 . 9 10 11 12 13 14 Set 1 L 1 L 1 L 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Input K P1 . numbers. IS Function IF SHIFT Parameter Format Parameter function P1 P2 Set Sets or reads IF shift. The subsequent sentence must be keyed after the current conversion is completed. Input Note: The Set command requires K Y a “ ” (ASCII code 20h) in the third byte position. G T 1 2 Answer Output 4 P1 5 6 7 8 .APPENDIX q FW FILTER WIDTH Sets or reads filter bandwidth. Converts input characters into Morse code. Function KS KEYER SPEED Parameter Format Parameter function P1 38 FILTER WIDTH Function Sets or reads keying speed while using the KY command. 9 10 11 12 13 14 Read 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Input F W P1 . 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 .– . 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 Set 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 LK Function FREQUENCY LOCK Parameter Format Parameter function P1 1 LOCK OFF/ON Input Read 1 2 I D 3 . P1 can be “+” or “ ”. Read 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 . 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 3 . Answer Output ID Function IDENTIFICATION Parameter Format Parameter function P1 16 MODEL NUMBER 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Reads Model number of the transceiver. Output 6 7 P2 8 . Set 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Answer Output Note: SSB/AM/FM CW 0000~0079: 50 Hz 0000: Narrow 0080~0099: 80 Hz 0001~: Wide 0100~0149: 100 Hz 0150~0199: 150 Hz FSK 0200~0299: 200 Hz 0000~0499: 250 Hz 0300~0399: 300 Hz 0500~0999: 500 Hz 0400~0499: 400 Hz 1000~1499: 1000 Hz : 1500 Hz 0500~0599: 500 Hz 1500~ 0600~0999: 600 Hz 1000~1999: 1000 Hz 2000~ : 2000 Hz 1 2 K S 1 2 K S 1 2 K S 3 4 5 P1 6 7 8 . 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Sets Frequency Lock OFF/ON or reads status. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Parameter Format Parameter function P1 45 LOAD MESSAGE 4 5 6 7 P1 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Output Answer 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 P3 P4 P5 P7 Set 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Input L M P1 . Answer Output 1 2 I D 4 5 P1 6 7 8 . 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 IF Function INFORMATION Parameter Format Parameter function P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 4 – 5 1 1 – 7 11 2 3 1 1 1 14 – FREQUENCY NOT USED RIT/XIT FREQUENCY RIT OFF/ON XIT OFF/ON NOT USED MEMORY CHANNEL TX/RX MODE FUNCTION SCAN OFF/ON SPLIT OFF/ON TONE OFF/ON TONE NUMBER NOT USED Answer Reads status of the transceiver.

Parameter Format Parameter function P1 P2 9 – 7 4 2 10 1 14 SPLIT DATA NOT USED MEMORY CHANNEL FREQUENCY MODE MEMORY LOCKOUT TONE OFF/ON TONE NUMBER Set 1 2 M C 1 2 M C 1 2 M C 3 4 5 P2 6 7 8 . 1 2 3 . Function Parameter Format Parameter function P1 1 PREAMPLIFIER OFF/ON Input Set 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Read Set 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P3 . 1 2 3 . Set 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Input P B P1 . Function Output N R P1 . P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 9 – 7 4 2 10 1 14 – PA PREAMPLIFIER Sets Preamplifier OFF/ON or reads status. Answer Output 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 P A P1 . Function Parameter Format Parameter function P1 56 NOISE REDUCTION Set 1 2 3 4 P1 5 6 7 . 1 2 P A 1 2 3 . 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Answer Output Read Answer M D P1 . 4 5 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 . 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Read Answer M G N R 1 2 MR MEMORY READ Reads memory. Function Parameter Format Parameter function P1 2 MODE NB NOISE BLANKER Sets Noise Blanker OFF/ON or reads status. P1 must be "0" to read the CH 90 ~ 99 Start frequency and "1" to read the End frequency. 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Input M G 1 2 3 .q APPENDIX MC MEMORY CHANNEL Sets or reads memory channels. 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Input Set 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 P3 9 10 11 12 13 14 P4 Input M W P1 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 Read 3 . P5 P6 P7 P8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Output Output P2 . 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Answer Output Read P B P1 . 78 . N B 1 2 N B P1 . 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Output Read 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Input Set 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 N B P1 . 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 P5 P6 P7 P8 . PB Function PLAY BACK Parameter Format Parameter function P1 27 PLAYBACK DRU or CW message playback. Function Answer 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 P9 – NOT USED Note: All parameters must be entered. 1 2 P B 1 2 3 . P1 must be "0" to store a Start frequency and "1" to store an End frequency. Other parameters are ignored. MG MIC GAIN Sets or reads MIC gain. 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Output Answer M R P1 P3 P4 Read 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Input M R P1 P A P1 . Parameter Format Parameter function SPLIT DATA NOT USED MEMORY CHANNEL FREQUENCY MODE MEMORY LOCKOUT TONE OFF/ON TONE NUMBER NOT USED Note: For a vacant channel. the Answer command sends "0" for all parameters except the memory channel number. Function Parameter Format Parameter function P1 31 MIC GAIN NR NOISE REDUCTION Sets Noise Reduction OFF/ON or reads status. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Answer Output 4 P1 5 6 7 . Answer Parameter Format Parameter function P1 1 NOISE BLANKER OFF/ON Set 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Input M D P1 . The memory channel becomes a vacant channel if all frequency digits are "0". Function MW MEMORY WRITE Function Parameter Format Parameter function P1 P2 _ 7 NOT USED MEMORY CHANNEL Writes into memory. 3 Read Set 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Input 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 M G 1 2 N R P1 . Read 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 MD MODE Sets or reads modulation modes. 1 2 M D 1 2 3 .

Function RT Function RIT Parameter Format Parameter function Parameter Format Parameter function P1 – ATTENUATOR Sets RIT OFF/ON or reads status. The command functions independently from the RIT/XIT control. 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Input 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Input R M P1 . 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Note: This command also affects the XIT frequency (same as RIT shift). 1 2 R M 1 2 3 . Function Output 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Answer Read 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 RG RF GAIN Parameter Format Parameter function P1 1 POWER OFF/ON Function Sets or reads RF gain. Note: This command also clears the XIT frequency (same as RIT shift). Parameter Format Parameter function P1 P2 24 22 METER SWITCH METER VALUE Set Set 1 2 P T 3 4 5 P1 . Function RC RIT CLEAR Parameter Format Parameter function P1 47 POWER CONTROL Function Sets the RIT frequency shift to 0. Read P R 1 2 Answer Output P R P1 . Function Sets or reads CW RX pitch. 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Input 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Input R T P1 . 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Answer Read 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 R M P1 RA RF ATTENUATOR Sets or reads RF ATT(attenuator). Parameter Format Parameter function Set Set 1 2 3 4 P1 5 6 7 . 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Answer Output Output 3 4 5 P1 . PS POWER SWITCH Sets Power OFF/ON or reads status. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Input P C 1 2 3 . 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Input 1 2 R C 1 2 3 . 3 P1 4 5 Read Read 9 10 11 12 13 14 P S 1 2 R G 1 2 Answer Output Output 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Answer 4 5 6 7 8 . Lowers/raises RIT frequency. 9 10 11 12 13 14 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Read P T . PR Function Output 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Answer Read 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 SPEECH PROCESSOR Parameter Format Parameter function P1 1 SPEECH PROCESSOR OFF/ON RD Function RU RIT DOWN/UP Parameter Format Parameter function Sets Speech Processor OFF/ON or reads status. 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Read Answer R T . 79 . Output Answer Output 1 2 P T 3 4 5 P1 . 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 R D/U . 9 10 11 12 13 14 P S P1 . 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Input S P1 . 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Read 3 . Set Set 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Input 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Input P R P1 . 1 2 3 . 2 3 . 3 4 5 6 7 8 P2 . 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 R G 1 2 3 .APPENDIX q PC POWER CONTROL Sets or reads transmit power. P1 1 RIT OFF/ON 00: OFF 01: ON Set Set 1 2 R A 1 2 R A 1 2 R A 3 4 5 P1 . Read P C 1 2 Answer Output P C P1 . The command functions independently from the RIT/XIT control. 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 R T P1 . R G P1 PT Function CW RX PITCH Parameter Format Parameter function P1 52 CW RX PITCH RM READ METER Selects a meter function or reads meter values. Parameter Format Parameter function P1 31 RF GAIN Set Set 1 P 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Input 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 .

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 T N SL Function DSP SLOPE (LOW CUT-OFF) Parameter Format Parameter function TO TONE Sets Subtone OFF/ON or reads status. Parameter Format Parameter function P1 46 SQUELCH LEVEL Set Set 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Input 1 2 3 4 P1 5 6 7 . Parameter Format Parameter function P1 22 S-METER VALUE Set Input Read Read 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Input RX/TX . Input T N 1 2 3 . 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 S Q 1 2 3 . Function SQ SQUELCH LEVEL Function Parameter Format Parameter function P1 1 SCAN OFF/ON Sets or reads squelch level. Set 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Note: In transmit mode: power meter reading 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 S M . Parameter Format Parameter function P1 1 TONE OFF/ON P1 53 DSP SLOPE (LOW CUT-OFF) Set Input Read S L . TX Parameter Format Parameter function SM S-METER S-meter reading. SC SCAN Sets Scan OFF/ON or reads status. 3 Read Read 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 S Q 1 2 Answer Answer Output Output 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 4 P1 5 6 7 . 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 S C P1 . 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Set 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 S R P1 . 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Answer T O P1 . 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 T 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 O P1 .q APPENDIX RX Function TX RX. Function SR SYSTEM RESET Function Parameter Format Parameter function P1 49 SEMI BREAK-IN DELAY TIME Resets the transceiver. 2 3 . P1 4 5 . 80 . 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Input S C P1 . 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Answer 4 P1 5 . 1 2 S C 1 2 3 . Sets or reads subtone number (01~39). 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Input 1 2 3 4 P1 5 . 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Read S D 1 2 Answer Answer Read Output S D P1 . S Q SD SEMI BREAK-IN DELAY TIME Sets or reads Semi Break-in delay time. Function Sets or reads low cut-off frequency. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Answer Output RX/TX . Output Read 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Input S L P1 Set 1 2 3 4 5 . 3 Read . Output 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Answer S M P1 . 39 (1750 Hz) switches OFF the CTCSS. Function Selects receive/transmit mode. Parameter Format Parameter function P1 50 SYSTEM RESET Set Input Input S 1 D 2 3 . Output Read 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 T N 1 2 Answer Output 3 4 5 P1 . 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 T O 1 2 Answer Output 1 2 S L 3 4 5 P1 . TONE NUMBER Set Set 1 2 S H 1 2 S H 1 2 S H 3 4 5 P1 . SH Function DSP SLOPE (HIGH CUT-OFF) Parameter Format Parameter function P1 53 DSP SLOPE (HIGH CUT-OFF) Output 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 TN Function TONE NUMBER Parameter Format Parameter function P1 14 Sets or reads high cut-off frequency. 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Note: Selecting No.

3 4 5 9 10 11 12 13 14 Answer Output 4 5 P1 6 7 8 . Set 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Input V X P1 . 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Input V G 1 2 3 . XT Function XIT Parameter Format Parameter function P1 1 XIT OFF/ON Sets XIT OFF/ON. Function Parameter Format Parameter function P1 54 VOX GAIN Set 1 2 3 4 P1 5 6 7 . 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Answer Output Read V X P1 . Set 1 2 X 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Input T P1 . 9 10 11 12 13 14 VG VOX GAIN Sets or reads VOX gain. 81 . Function Parameter Format Parameter function P1 55 VOICE RECALL Set 1 V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Input R P1 . Function Parameter Format Parameter function P1 51 VOX DELAY TIME Set 1 2 V D 1 2 V D 1 2 V D 3 4 5 P1 6 7 8 . 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Read 1 2 X T Answer Output 1 2 X T P1 . 3 . 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Answer Read Output 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 VX Function VOX FUNCTION Parameter Format Parameter function P1 1 VOX OFF/ON Sets VOX OFF/ON. 1 2 V X 1 2 3 . 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Input Read 3 . 3 Read 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 V G 1 2 Answer Output 4 P1 5 6 7 . 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 V G VR VOICE RECALL Triggers the Voice Synthesizer for message output.APPENDIX q VD VOX DELAY TIME Sets or reads VOX delay time.

............. 13 RF Gain . 38 Optional Accessories Available ... 31 Adjusting Microphone Level ..... Transmitting ........................ 40 Resetting ...... 61 Operation ...... 50 Reset Full ................... 22 Amplifier............................................. 51 Connection ........................... 43 Storing.......................... External (EXT SP) ............................................. 55 Volume AF Gain ...................................... 56 Installation ............... 3 Gain .... 14 Microphone Compatible ................ 51 Troubleshooting .. 58 Using ............................................... 3 Keyer....... 30 RTTY Connection (RTTY.. Recalling ............................................................ 50 Equipment................... Scan Limits ..... 48 RIT ...... 30 Satellite Operation ..................... 13 Beat Cancel ........... 3 IF Filter Bandwidth Change ........ 27 Computer Control Commands .. 47 Program ................................................................................... 62 Operation ................ Group ..................... 52 Attenuator............ 50 Using .. Changing ............................................ 39 Storing..................... 48 Partial ................................ 60 Connector (COM) .................... 15 Program Scan ....................................................... 62 Operation .......... 68 Speech Processor ............................................................ 62 Operation ........................................ 70 CW Break-in............................................................ 37 Automatic Gain Control .............. Transfers to VFO ............................................ 47 Clover Connection (ACC 2) ................................................ 49 VFO .............................. 53 Display Dimmer ..... 34 Bands......... 37 Noise Reduction ........ 27 Headphones Jack (PHONES) ......... 19 Description ............................... 17 Cross Reference ............................. 1 Feed Line Loss ... 15 Operation ....................................................................................................... 34 Pitch ...................................... 54 Playback ......... 32 Split-Frequency Operation . 35 Carrier-operated mode ..... 43 Scanning......... 20 SSTV Connection (ACC 2) . 29 Step Size ................. 1 Antenna Tuner Operation ......... 35 Linear Amplifier Connection (REMOTE) ............................................... 13 RF ................. 41 Start/End Frequencies ............................ 35 Locked-weight change ......... 30 Auto Weighting ........ 42 Tunable ..........................................INDEX AGC .................................................... Semi .. To Memory ........................ 21 Reverse ... 41 Memory Scan ............................................ 30 AM Transmitting . 44 Quick..................... 43 Storing................................ 71 Communication Parameters ................................ 36 Key Jack (PADDLE/KEY) ....... 24 Subtone.................................................................................................. 28 TF-SET (Transmit Frequency Set) 23 Time-operated mode ....... 47 Hold ........ 48 Lockout..................... 34 Break-in......... 47 Menu Access ......................... 29 Keypad Entry ..... 22 Frequency Fine Tuning ................................................ 62 Operation ............................ 46 Lockout .... 46 Start/End Frequencies ..................................... 65 USB (see SSB) VFO Equalizing A=B ........... 62 Operation ............... 46 Programmable Buttons . 57 Message Interval ....... 35 Messages.. 47 Scanning........................ 28 FM Band Plan ... 45 Recalling .................. 47 Speaker........................................... 2 Switching ON/OFF ..... Storing ............ 60 Equipment...... 13 Voice Synthesizer (optional) Installation ....... 3 Specifications ... 48 Power Connecting DC .......................................................................... 13 Transmit Output ............................. Simplex ................................................ Connection ..... Group ..................................................... 47 Transmit Inhibit ... 36 Reduction ...................................... 29 FSK (see RTTY) Full Reset ....................................................................................... 13 G-TORTM Connection (ACC 2) .................. Type ........................................................................................ 9 Noise Blanker ..... 21 Digital Recording Unit (optional) Installation ..................... Storing . Frequency . 3 FAX/Facsimile Connection (ACC 2) .... 25 Transmitting ................... Full ............ Checking ........................... Split-Frequency ................. To VFOs ....... 16 Configuration . Linear Connection (REMOTE) .. 35 Messages............ 25 Subtone.... 48 Fuses................ 3 Connector (MIC). Electronic Auto Weighting .................................. 26 RX Equalizer .. 27 Partial Reset .................................. 33 Transverter ..... 31 XIT .... Frequency ........... 30 Programmable ....................................................... 61 AMTOR Connection (ACC 2) ........... 44 Quick..................... 34 Bug Key Function . Volume ..................... Transmitting .................... 28 Scan Carrier-operated ... 32 ..... 45 Quick............................................ 39 Erasing ........ 61 Lock Function ................ 53 Recording ........................ 40 Transfer............... RF .................................................... 44 LSB (see SSB) Memory Channels Conventional .......... 16 Meter ............................... 42 Transfer................ 47 Memory....................... 29..... 21 Zero Beating ............ 21 Sidetone. Needed ................. Memory Channels ........................ All-Channel . Replacing .................................................................. 49 DSP Beat Cancel ...... Full/Semi (see CW) Bug Key Function ................. 62 Operation .......... 23 Squelch .. 43 Time-operated ......................... 27 PacTOR Connection (ACC 2) ......... 30 82 Tuning ........... 21 Sidetone............................................ ACC 2) ............... 38 DSP Filter ............................................... 2 Gain AF ...................... 35 Messages................................ 22 TX Deviation ................................................. 14 SSB............ 33 Transmitted-signal monitor . 49 Break-in... Compatible ... 47 Scrolling ................... 38 External Speaker (EXT SP) ............... 25 Repeaters ..... 27 Antenna Connection .. 29 Rounding ............. 24 CTCSS .................................... All-Channel .................................................... 62 Operation ............... 44 Memory......................................... 52 Presetting ...... 21 Transmitting ....................... 43 Quick Data Transfer Equipment.. 57 Packet Connection (ACC 2) ...................................... 43 Lockout ............................. 13 VOX (Voice-Operated Transmit) Adjusting Delay .................. 43 Selecting A/B ......... 38 Beep Function ...... 36 IF Shift ..................

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful